Bairstow Rigging

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PRODUCTS

Twin-Path® Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Synthetic Wear Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Synthetic Sling Hardware . . . . . .10-12, 22, 41Polyester Roundslings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13Nylon Web Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-27Wire Rope Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-35Spreader Beams & Lifters . . . . . . . . . . .36-37Alloy Chain Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38-44Wire Mesh Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45Wire Rope – Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46-63Aircraft Cable S/S & Galvanized . . . . . .64-65Cable Crimpers & Cutters . . . . . . . . . . .66-68Rigging Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69-97Blocks, Balls & Sheaves . . . . . . . . . . .98-113Chain & Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114-119Binder Chains & Gear . . . . . . . . . . . .120-121Web Tie Downs & Gear . . . . . . . . . . .122-127Rope: All Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128-133Fall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134-147Chain Hoists & Pullers . . . . . . . . . . . .148-153Cable Come-A-Longs . . . . . . . . . . . . .154-155Suspended Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158-161Plate Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Beam Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163Training, General Info, Map Contact Info & Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164-168

CATALOG BLP-04

TOLL FREE: 800-241-8990 • PHONE: 404-351-2600

SEE US ONLINE ASEE US ONLINE AT T WWWWWW.B.BAIRSTAIRSTOOWW.COM.COM

SAFE USE & INSPECTION

Twin-Path® Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-17Synthetic Sling Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15Polyester Roundsling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14Nylon Web Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24-27Wire Rope Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34-35Chain Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42-43Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50-63Wire Rope Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70-71Shackles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80Eye Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88-89Swivel Hoist Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Wedge Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108-113Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Chain Load Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121Web Load Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Fiber Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131-133Fall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144-147Plate Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Instruction Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165-166Bairstow Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

2 BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. • 1-800-241-8990 • WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com

Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoidsharp edges and exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180°F. DEATH or INJURY can occur fromimproper use or maintenance.

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.)VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET HITCHES (Horizontal Angles APPROXIMATE

WEIGHT APPROXIMATE(lbs. Per Ft.) BODY WIDTH

CODE NO. (Bearing-Bearing) (inches)

TPXC 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .31 3”TPXC 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .40 3”TPXC 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .55 3”TPXC 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .65 4”TPXC 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .80 4”TPXC 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 1.12 5”TPXC 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,139 70,700 1.50 5”TPXC 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.60 5”TPXC 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.68 6”TPXC 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.85 6”TPXC 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 2.20 6”TPXC 12500 125,000 100,000 250,000 216,500 176,500 3.00 8”TPXC 15000 150,000 120,000 300,000 259,800 212,100 3.36 8”TPXC 17500 175,000 140,000 350,000 303,100 247,450 4.00 10”TPXC 20000 200,000 160,000 400,000 346,400 282,800 4.37 10”TPXC 25000 250,000 200,000 500,000 433,000 353,500 5.50 12”TPXC 27500 275,000 220,000 550,000 476,300 388,850 6.90 12”TPXC 30000 300,000 240,000 600,000 519,600 424,200 7.50 12”

US. Patent 4,850,629Canadian Patent 1,280,458NOTE: Capacities shown include both paths and are for one complete sling. Ratings based on straight pindiameter one-half the sling width.Metric capacities available. Do not exceed rated capacity.

NOTE: See pages 15-17 for Safe Use Information

TWIN-PATH® EXTRA SLINGS

OPTIC FIBER TELL-TAILSAND TELL-TAIL TAGS LET

YOU KNOW WHEN THESLING HAS BEEN OVER-LOADED OR DAMAGED.

Proudly made in our shopin Atlanta, Georgia

TPXC This is the world’s first truly ergonomic sling. It has a bulked nylon outer cover for superi-or abrasion resistance. These are made in sizes up to 300,000 lbs. vertical rated capacity. Largercapacity slings are available on special order. Extra Heavy Duty Covermax® is standard on70,000 lb. vertical capacity and higher. These slings have overload tell-tails,, inner red cover, andare used worldwide in place of wire rope slings for heavy lifts. They are about 10% of the weightof a steel sling. These products are repairable. The Twin-Path® patented design provides the rig-ger with two connections between the hook and the load for redundant back-up protection.These slings have 1% stretch at rated capacity compared to braided polyester round slingswhich can stretch up to 9%. If ergonomics, productivity and safety are important, then theseslings are the only choice. This is the lightest and strongest sling on the market today with K-Spec® the longest lasting load bearing core yarn, backed by independent testing. All slings havefiber optic internal inspection system.

TWIN-PATH® EXTRA LIFTING SLINGS w/HIGH PERFORMANCE FIBERS & TELL-TAILS

WARNING

Capacities up to 500,000 lbs. Vertical 1,000,000 lbs.Basket Available on Request

BAIRSTOW LIFTING PRODUCTS CO. • 1-800-241-8990 • WEB & LINKS www.bairstow.com 3

• LIGHTWEIGHT REDUCES PERSONAL INJURIES• EASY STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION• ADVANCED SAFETY FEATURES HELP PREVENT ACCIDENTS• TWIN-PATH® CAN BE MADE AND DELIVERED QUICKLY• DRASTICALLY REDUCES RIGGING TIME

• SOFT SLING WON’T MAR LOAD

• EASILY REPAIRABLE AND MADE TO EXACT LENGTH

TWIN-PATH® EXTRA SLINGS SAVE TIME AND MONEY

MADE EXTRA TOUGH AND EXTRA SOFTTWIN-PATH® slings are actually 2 complete slings in one, each making separate connections between hook and load. TWIN-PATH® slings have double-layered covers for extra protection. This back-up system could help maintain control of the load shoulddamage occur. It’s the same kind of redundancy described in the lifting regulations for nuclear plants.

EXTENDED USE MAKES THEM MORE ECONOMICALWear points can be shed so that TWIN-PATH® slings last longer than many other types of slings . . . resistant to most acid conditions.

SOFT AND FLEXIBLE FOR ADDED LOAD PROTECTIONTWIN-PATH® slings adapt easily to vertical, basket or choker lifts . . . shape easily to fit hooks or shackles that might be too smallfor other slings . . . and gives the widest possible bearing contact with the load. Their flexibility makes them both easy to handleand easy to store in a restricted space.

EASY TO INSPECT

UNIQUE SAFETY FEATURES

Double-layered, color-coded covers make them easy to inspect. When the outer cover is cut, the red inner layer shows through.This tells the inspector to remove the sling from service.

Repair Patch Tell-Tail TagsRetract When Sling Is Overloaded

Side By Side RoundslingsFor Backup Protection

Two Cover Jackets ofDifferent Colors for

Protection and Spotting Wear

Fiber optic Tell - Tails for inspection


FIBER OPTIC INSPECTION FOR ALL TWIN-PATH® SLINGSFIBER OPTICTELL-TAILS®

Twin-Path® slings have the Fiber Optic inspection system. The condition of the internal core yarn can be inspected just by check-ing the continuity of the fiber optic cable. If crushing or cutting, heat or chemical damage, has occurred then the damage to thefiber optic cable will destroy its ability to transmit light from one end to the other giving the inspector a reason to remove the slingfrom service and send it in for repair evaluation.The fiber optic cable will conduct light using natural, overhead or flashlight sources.The inspector simply covers and removes his finger from one end and watches the other end for blinking which indicates that thesling is OK to use for another lift.

RIGGING PRODUCTS

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.)VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET HITCHES APPROX. APPROX.

WEIGHT BODY(LBS. PER FT.) WIDTH

CODE NO. (Bearing-Bearing) (Inches)

TPC 200 2,000 1,600 4,000 3,464 2,828 .28 2”TPC 300 3,000 2,400 6,000 5,196 4,242 .30 2”TPC 450 4,500 3,600 9,000 7,794 6,383 .45 2”TPC 600 6,000 4,800 12,000 10,392 8,484 .48 3”TPC 750 7,500 6,000 15,000 12,990 10,605 .65 3”TPC 900 9,000 7,200 18,000 15,588 12,726 .70 3”TPC 1200 12,000 9,600 24,000 20,784 16,968 .90 4”TPC 1400 14,000 11,200 28,000 24,248 19,798 .95 4”TPC 1700 17,000 13,600 34,000 29,440 24,038 1.20 4”TPC 2200 22,000 17,800 44,000 38,104 31,108 1.40 5”TPC 2600 26,000 20,800 52,000 45,032 36,784 1.70 5”TPC 3200 32,000 25,600 64,000 55,424 45,248 1.90 5”TPC 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,600 70,700 2.70 6”TPC 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 3.00 6”

TWIN-PATH® POLYESTER CORE YARN SLINGS WITH COVER MAX™Canadian Patent 2,280,458. U.S. Patent 4,850,629. Please note: capacities shown include both paths and are for one completesling. Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width. Do not exceed rated capacity. Metric capacities available.

TWIN PATH® POLYESTER SLINGS

Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edgesand exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180°F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use ormaintenance. WARNING


TWIN PATH® EYE & EYE SLING

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.)VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET HITCHES APPROX. APPROX.

WEIGHT BODY(LBS. PER FT.) WIDTH

CODE NO. (Bearing-Bearing) (Inches)

TPXCEE 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .31 4”TPXCEE 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .40 4”TPXCEE 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .55 4”TPXCEE 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .65 5”TPXCEE 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .80 5”TPXCEE 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 1.12 6”TPXCEE 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,139 70,700 1.50 6”TPXCEE 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.60 8”TPXCEE 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.68 8”TPXCEE 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.85 10”TPXCEE 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 2.20 10”TPXCEE 12500 125,000 100,000 250,000 216,500 176,500 3.00 12”TPXCEE 15000 150,000 120,000 300,000 259,800 212,100 3.36 12”

TWIN-PATH® EYE & EYE SYNTHETIC SLINGTPXCEE & TPCEE Slings are made to be an eye and eye sling only. They have a loop at each end and sin-gle tube body (still divided into two separate paths). This sling is light, strong and less expensive than a round-sling with a sleeve. It can be manufactured using either K-Spec® core yarn or polyester. Riggers have told usthat they have some applications where they want only an eye and eye sling. This is the one with all of theTwin-Path® features in a strictly eye and eye product.

1) U.S. Patent #5,727,833 and #4,850,6292) Capacities shown include both paths and are for one

complete sling. Ratings based on straight pin diam-eter one-half the sling width.

3) Metric capacities available. Do not exceed ratedcapacity.

4) Larger capacities on request.5) Polyester slings also available

TWIN PATH® TWO-LEG BRIDLES

TWIN-PATH® TWO-LEG BRIDLESTPXCTL & TPCTL slings are simply the lightest and strongest synthetic bridles in the world today. these are perfect toreplace existing chain and, wire rope bridles. The Twin-Path® synthetic bridle with K-Spec® core yarn is less than halfthe weight of any steel assembly and is the ergonomic bridle of the future, here today. The loop at the top goes on thecrane hook and there is no heavy steel ring to deal with. If you need a four leg bridle, just order two Twin-Path® Two Legbridles. Please specify the loop size required at the top and any hardware such as hooks for the bottom of each leg.Hooks or other hardware can be removed if attached with G-link™ connectors or roundsling shackles rather than beingmade into place.

1) U.S. Patent #5,727,833 and #4,850,629.2) Capacities shown are both legs used together.3) Larger capacities on request.4) Polyester slings also available.

HORIZONTAL ANGLES WT. PER FT. EYESTOCK NUMBERS VERTICAL 60˚ 45˚ (POUNDS) (WIDTH)

TPXCTL 1000 10,000 8,500 7,000 .34 3"TPXCTL 1500 15,000 12,750 10,500 .44 3"TPXCTL 2000 20,000 17,000 14,000 .61 3"TPXCTL 3000 30,000 25,500 21,000 .88 4"TPXCTL 4000 40,000 34,000 28,000 1.23 5"TPXCTL 5000 50,000 42,500 35,000 1.65 5"

TWIN-PATH® 2-LEG BRIDLES WITH K-SPEC®

Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edgesand exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180°F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use ormaintenance. WARNING


SINGLE ADJUSTABLE RING DIMENSIONS SHACKLE DIMENSIONS SLING WEIGHT (LBS.)BRIDLE APPROX. RING MAIN HOOK RING NOMINAL APPROX. APPROX.

TPA CAPACITY SLING STOCK AREA AREA SHACKLE TONNAGE 3 FOOT ADDERCODE (LBS.) WIDTH DIAMETER (WIDTH) (LENGTH) SIZE (W.L.L.) BASE PER FOOT

TPA 6 6,000 2” 1/2” 2-1/2” 2-1/2” 5/8” 3-1/4T 4.40 1.35TPXA 12 12,000 3” 3/4” 3” 3” 7/8” 6-1/2T 6.80 1.95TPXA 20 20,000 4” 1” 4” 4” 1-1/4” 12T 13.60 2.70TPXA 40 40,000 5” 1-1/2” 5-1/4” 5-1/4” 1-3/4” 25T 31.10 4.20TPXA 60 60,000 5” 2” 7” 7” 2” 35T 60.00 5.70TPXA 90 90,000 6” 2-1/4” 8” 8” 2-1/4” 55T 86.00 8.10

PLEASE NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN INCLUDE BOTH PATHS AND ARE FOR ONE COMPLETE ASSEMBLY.

TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE TPXA (with K-Spec®), TPA (with polyester)The Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle is the ultimate multiple use rigging tool. It can be used in applications where a standard two-leg orfour leg bridle is used with the added advantage of self-adjustment to awkward loads. The Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle self-adjustsover the center of gravity to find the lifting point. The Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle can also be used as a complete rigging tool for chok-er, vertical, or basket hitches. The use of two or more Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridles facilitates lifts with multiple lifting points.

RIGGING PRODUCTS

Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edgesand exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180°F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use ormaintenance. WARNING

CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET

TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE SPECIFICATIONS


RATED CAPACITIES APPROXIMATECHOKER VERTICAL BASKET WEIGHT

(LBS. PER FT.)SLING WIDTH STOCK NUMBER (Bearing-Bearing)

TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE FOR OFF-CENTER LOADS

SE When you have a hot environment up to 3000f, use a Sparkeater® to lift the load without marring the surface of the lifted piece.Also, when doing stage rigging order this products for the protection it gives from exposure to fire, heat, sparks and pyrotechnics.Just specify black color for the theater or yellow for all other applications. These slings are made from Nomex® for the cover andAramid high performance core yarns. Available in capacities of 2,000 to 30,000 lbs. When lifting heated steel. wire rope or chainslings might scratch the load causing expensive rework. Fire exposure testing was performed by the Offshore Certification Bureauand the product was identified as being as good as wire rope or chain for use in off shore applications in the oil industry.

The Twin-Path® Adjustable Sling is a multi-purpose rigging tool and it’s important that it is used properly. The adjustment ring has adouble sling on one side and a single sling on the other side.

If the lifting points are an equal distance from thecenter of gravity then the Twin-Path® Adjustablecan be hooked-up with the double or single slingon either lifting point.

If the lifting points are an equal distance oneither side of the center of gravity, but one ishigher, then the double sling should beattached to the higher lifting point.

If one of the lifting points is closer to the cen-ter of gravity, then attach the double sling tothis lifting point. It will have the highestweight concentration. If the Twin-Path®

Adjustable is attached so that the singlesling is nearest the center of gravity, it willnot allow the lift to be made.

Never use the Twin-Path® AdjustableBridle in situations where the sling-to-hook angle is greater than 45°. Alwaysconnect above the center of gravity. Ifconnections are made below the cen-ter of gravity, then the load may turnwhen lifted.

TWIN-PATH® SPARKEATER SLING FOR HOT LOADS

RIGGING PRODUCTS

SPARKEATER SLING

Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edgesand exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 300°F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use ormaintenance. This warning is for sparkeater slings only. WARNING

TPSE 200 2.5” 1,600 2,000 4,000 .20TPSE 400 2.5” 3,200 4,000 8,000 .24TPSE 600 2.5” 4,800 6,000 12,000 .28TPSE 1000 3” 8,000 10,000 20,000 .31TPSE 2000 3” 16,000 20,000 40,000 .55TPSE 3000 4” 24,000 30,000 60,000 .80

PLEASE NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN INCLUDE BOTH PATHS AND ARE FOR ONE COMPLETE SLING.


WEAR PADS

SYNTHETIC WEAR PADS

SL-SLEEVE TYPE

SEW-SEWN ON PAD

RM-SLEEVE TYPE

RMT-ROUND TYPE

NOTE: Please Specify Length of Padsand Sling Width, Thickness orDiameter.

Covermax™ Wear Pads (Style CM)Wear Pads protect loads and slings. CM Wear Pads are cut resistant and can be madeready to use in any length or width. They fit wire rope, chain, nylon webbing or any regularrope or sling product. These pads can also be made into long lengths which the customercan cut into suitable sizes on the job. Double or triple thickness provide cut resistance forthe most severe conditions.

•CM-SL (Sliding Type)CM-SL Pads are sliding wear pads that wrap around the sling body with sewn seams alongboth edges or seamless tubulaR design that can then slide into position to protect the sling.they can also be used in the sling eye.

•CM-RM (Removable Sliding Type)CM-RM Pads is a removable wear pad with a hook & loop fastener on one edge and theother edge sewn shut.

•CM-EE (Sleeve to make an Eye & Eye sling)CM-EE sleeves are used to enclose both legs of a Twin-Path™ or roundsling so that it looksand functions like an eye & Eye sling. (Note: Remove sleeve after use to inspect sling andchange wear points.)

•CM-RMT (Removable Sliding Tubular Pad)CM-RMT ads are made to wrap around a small items like rope, wire rope, or chain. Theyhave hook & loop fasteners on one side.

•CM-SEW (Single Ply Sewn into Place)CM-SEW Pads are single plies of covermax™ sewn into place on one side of a web, roundor Twin-Path sling or eye.

•Performance Pad Wear Pads (Style PK)PK style wear pads are the same as CM pads except that they are made from extra tough,high performance and very cut resistant felt type material that is white and 3/8" thick.PK-SL (Sliding Type)PK-RM (Removable Sliding Type)PK-EE (Sleeve to make an Eye & eye Sling)PK-RMT (Removable Sliding Tubular Pad)PK-SEW (Single Ply Sewn into Place)

•Nylon Web Wear Pads (Style NW)NW Pads are the same as CM pads except that they are made from yellow nylon web slingmaterial about 7/32" thick and are not as cut and abrasion resistant.NW-SL (Sliding Type)NW-RM (Removable Sliding type)NW-EE (Sleeve to make Eye & Eye Sling)NW-RMT (Removable Sliding Tubular Pad)NW-SEW (Single Ply Sewn into Place)


CORNERMAX™ WEAR PADS

CORNERMAX™ WEAR PADSPATENT PENDINGCovermax™ wear pads are good for abrasion protection but a different type ofwear pad is best to protect the sling from corners and edges. The new CornerMax™wear pad forms a tunnel between the pad and the edge, greatly reducing the possibility ofcontact and cutting. These pads can have fixed loops or hook & loop attachments for easyinstallation on the sling at the point of contact. They can protect the sling from loads up to100,000 lbs.

Easily attaches to the sling with hook & loop containment straps

SAVE YOURSLING FROM

EDGES

The photoshows theformation ofa tunnel

Part Number DescriptionCornerMax 4 Fits 2", 3", 4" Wide SlingsCornerMax 8 Fits 5", 6", 8" Wide SlingsCornerMax 12 Fits 10", 12" Wide Slings

SHACKLE PIN-PADSThe pin area of a shackle can cause synthetic slings to cut and plac-ing synthetic slings on the pin should be avoided. Even a new shack-le can have a sharp edge where the threaded pin goes through theshackle ear. If the sling is exposed to this area, it can cut and fail.

The Shackle Pin-Pad is the latest SLINGMAX® SOLUTION in theconstant effort to ensure the ultimate rigging safety of our cus-tomers. If you must rig on the pin, protect your sling with a SLING-MAX® Pin-Pad.

SHACKLE PIN-PAD WEAR PADS

NEW

NEW

Easy Attachmentwith hook & loopstraps

Protects Sling from cutting

Part # PIN-PAD + Shackle Size (example 11⁄2" shackle = PIN-PAD 11⁄2)


G-LINK™ CONNECTORS

G-LINK™ CONNECTORSNEW! A multi-use coupler specifically designed for connecting hardware to web, round or Twin Path® slings. This versatile patent-pending coupler can be used to connect two slings together, as a sliding choker hook or as a two leg bridle! Always use G-Linksof correct width and rated capacity. Two G-links used together will double the rated capacity of one G-Link.

PRODUCT FEATURES:✓ Couples web, round or Twin-Path® slings with hardware (oblongs or hooks).

✓ Splices two slings into longer length.

✓ Connects two slings with oblong and two hooks into bridle sling.

✓ Allows sling to be used as sliding choker sling.

✓ Two G-Link™ connectors used together will double the rated capacity of one G-Link™ connector.

✓ Conforms with ASME B30.9 web and round sling specifications.

Patent #5,651,573

VERT. CHOKER SLINGMODEL RATED RATED SIZE WGT.

NUMBER CAP. TONS CAP. TONS (IN.) (LBS.)SC200L 2-1/2 2 2 2SC300L 5 3 3 3-1/2SC400L 7-1/2 4 4 7SC500L 15 8 *5 15SC600L 25 12 *6 29

MODEL A B C D E F G H J O R T WSC200L 2 5/8 1-1/8 5/8 1-1/8 1-15/16 1 5.0 1-13/16 1/2 .5 .5 3.5SC300L 3 11/16 1-1/4 11/16 2-1/4 2-7/16 1-1/4 6.62 2-1/2 9/16 .75 .75 5.0SC400L 4 13/16 1-3/8 13/16 2-1/2 2-7/8 1-3/8 7.5 2-3/4 3/4 .75 1.0 6.0SC500L 5 1-1/16 2 1-1/16 3 3-3/4 2 9.75 3-3/4 1 1.0 1.25 8.0SC600L 6 1-1/4 2-1/4 1-1/4 4 5 2-1/4 12.5 4-3/4 1-1/4 1.0 1.5 9.38

DIMENSIONS:

Connect Hook or Oblong to Sling Choker Sling

Connect Two Slings

Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. DEATH or INJURYcan occur from improper use or maintenance. WARNING


GUNNEBO WEB & ROUNDSLING HARDWARECHAIN WORKING DIMENSIONS WEIGHTSIZE LOAD LIMIT (INCHES) EACH

MODEL IN *(LBS) L B K S (LBS)SKR-7/8-8 9/32 3,500 1.4 1.6 .71 .95 .46SKR-7/8-8 1/16 4,500 1.4 1.6 .71 .94 .46SKR-10-8 3/8 7,100 1.7 1.9 .95 1.1 .84SKR-13-8 1/2 12,000 2.0 2.1 1.1 1.4 1.5SKR-16-8 5/8 18,100 2.4 2.6 1.4 1.7 2.6SKR-18/20-8 3/4 28,300 2.8 3.2 1.7 2.0 4.4SKR-22-8 7/8 34,200 4.3 4.9 1.9 2.7 11SKR-26-8 1 47,700 5.1 5.9 2.3 3.4 18.7

CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT DIMENSIONS (INCHES) WEIGHT EACHMODEL IN *(LBS) L L1 B B1 G H (LBS)

SKN-7/8-8 9/32 3,500 3.5 4.6 1.3 1.1 .71 .83 1.2SKN-7/8-8 5/16 4,500 3.5 4.6 1.3 1.1 .71 .83 1.2SKN-10-8 3/8 7,100 4.5 5.8 1.6 1.3 .91 1.1 2.3SKN-13-8 1/2 12,000 5.6 7.3 1.9 1.7 1.1 1.4 4.8SKN-16-8 5/8 18,100 6.5 8.5 2.2 1.9 1.3 1.7 8.6SKN-18/20-8 3/4 28,300 7.4 9.8 2.6 2.3 1.7 2.0 13.7

•Design Factor 4:1 Proof tested and certified.

CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT DIMENSIONS (INCHES) WEIGHT EACHMODEL IN *(LBS) L D (LBS)

SKLI-7/8-8 9/32 3,500 3.0 1.9 1.5SKLI-7/8-8 5/16 4,500 3.0 1.9 1.5SKLI-10-8 3/8 7,100 3.8 2.3 3.1SKLI-13-8 1/2 12,000 4.7 3.0 6.4SKLI-16-8 5/8 18,100 5.4 3.5 10.8SKLI-18/20-8 3/4 28,300 6.3 4.1 15.9

CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT DIMENSIONS (INCHES) WEIGHT EACHMODEL IN MM *(LBS) L L1 B G B1 (LBS)

SKO-7/8-8 9/32 7 3,500 3.9 5.0 2.0 .55 .59 .84SKO-7/8-8 5/16 7 4,500 3.9 5.0 2.0 .55 .59 .84SKO-10-8 3/8 10 7,100 5.0 6.3 2.6 .71 .79 1.8SKO-13-8 1/2 13 12,000 5.7 7.4 2.8 .87 .99 3.1SKO-16-8 5/8 16 18,100 6.9 8.9 3.2 .99 1.2 5.1SKO-18/20-8 3/4 20 28,300 8.0 10.5 4.1 1.2 1.4 8.2



WEB ROUNDSLING

CONNNECTOR- SKR

SLING HOOKS- SKN WITH

HALF LINKS &LATCH

ALLOYROLLERBEARINGSWIVEL

SYSTEMSINSULATED -

SKLI

OPEN MASTERLINKS - SKOWITH HALF

LINKS

CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT DIMENSIONS (INCHES) WEIGHT EACHMODEL IN *(LBS) L B D E F G H (LBS)BKB-10-8 3/8 7,100 6.7 1.5 2.8 1.3 .5 1.3 1.7 5.3

•Design Factor 4:1 Proof tested and certified.Particularly suitable for use with Web/round slings.

SAFETYHOOKS - BKB

FOR WEBSLINGS

(EYE TYPE)

See Pages 22 & 41 for other Hardware

Can fall if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. DEATH or INJURYcan occur from improper use or maintenance. WARNING


CROSBY SYNTHETIC SLING HARDWARE

WEB SLING ROUND WORKING S-252 BOLT TYPE S-253 SCREW TYPE DIMENSIONS (IN.)NOMINAL SLING LOAD LIMIT S-252 WEIGHT S-253 WEIGHTSIZE (IN.) SIZE (NO.) (TONS) STOCK NO. EA. (LBS.) STOCK NO. EA. (LBS.) A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R

1 1 & 2 3-1/4 1020485 1.4 1020575 1.4 0.88 0.62 1.38 0.75 1.50 0.44 3.38 3.68 1.12 1.50 0.75 2.69 3.22 0.44 1.001.5 3 & 4 6-1/2 1020496 2.4 1020584 2.2 1.25 0.75 1.75 0.88 1.88 0.50 4.15 4.25 1.31 1.81 1.00 3.38 4.03 0.50 1.192 5 & 6 8-3/4 1020507 4.1 1020593 3.8 1.38 0.88 2.25 1.00 2.81 0.56 5.50 4.72 1.50 2.09 1.12 4.19 4.50 0.50 1.443 7 & 8 12-1/2 1020518 8.0 1020602 7.3 1.62 1.12 3.25 1.25 3.06 0.75 6.34 5.88 1.88 2.62 1.38 5.62 5.59 0.62 1.814 9 & 10 20-1/2 1020529 16.9 1020611 15.2 2.12 1.38 4.50 1.50 5.75 0.88 9.75 7.19 2.25 3.12 1.75 7.50 6.88 0.75 2.135 11 & 12 35 1020540 35.0 1020620 30.8 2.50 1.75 5.50 2.00 6.34 1.12 11.50 9.31 3.00 4.19 2.25 9.19 8.66 1.00 2.886 13 50 1020551 57.5 1020629 52.0 3.00 2.12 6.50 2.25 7.70 1.25 13.75 10.38 3.38 4.75 2.75 11.00 10.22 1.22 3.19

*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2=-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION FOR ROUNDSLING SHACKLES

Recommended Application ChartApplication Use Comments

Web Slings, connect to Pad eye, S-281 Sling SaverEye Bolt, or Lifting Lug. Web Sling Shackle

Round Sling, conenct to Pad eye, S-253 or S-252 Sling SaverEye Bolt, or Lifting Lug. Shackle

Connect two S-252 or S-253 SlingSaver shackles together S-256 Link Plate

To keep the load centered on thePin, thus keeping the slingpositioned correctly in the shacklebow. S-255 Spool

Web Slings or Round Slings S-280 Sling Saverconnecting to Master Links, rings, Web Connectoror Crosby 320N Eye Hooks. with spool

Web Slings or Round Slings S-282 Sling Saverconnecting to Grade 8 Chain. Chain connector with spool.

High Strength, High CapacityRound Slings WS-320A Web Sling Hook.

Choking with Web Slings orRound Slings S-287 Sliding Choker Hook

AlwaysInsureRated

WorkingLoad

Limits aregreaterthan the

loadplaced onthe fitting.

See Page 22 & 41 for other Hardware


NORMAL APPROXIMATE MEASUREMENTSJACKET VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET 45° BASKET BODY WIDTH WEIGHT PER MINIMUM

CODE NO. SIZE COLOR POUNDS POUNDS POUNDS POUNDS UNDER LOAD FOOT LBS. LENGTH FT.

E30 1 Purple 2,600 2,100 5,200 3,700 1-1/8” .3 3E60 2 Green 5,300 4,200 10,600 7,500 1-1/2” .4 3E90 3 Yellow 8,400 6,700 16,800 11,900 1-7/8” .5 3E120 4 Tan 10,600 8,500 21,200 15,000 1-1/8” .6 3E150 5 Red 13,200 10,600 26,400 18,700 1-1/4” .8 3E180 6 Orange 16,800 13,400 33,600 23,800 2-1/2” .9 6E240 7 Blue 21,200 17,000 42,400 30,000 3” 1.2 6E250 8 Orange 25,000 20,000 50,000 35,400 3-1/4” 1.5 6E360 9 Orange 31,000 24,800 62,000 43,800 3-3/4” 2 6E400 10 Orange 40,000 32,000 80,000 56,600 4-1/4” 2.8 7E600 11 Orange 53,000 42,400 106,000 74,900 4-5/8” 3.6 7

Larger sizes on request. Also see Twin-Path® Polyester on page 4.

Our Roundslings are constructed of 100% polyester load bearing internal yarns. The load bearing yarns are protected by aSEAMLESS polyester cover. Due to the tubular design of the protective cover, the Roundsling is made without seams, thus, thereis no weakening in the strength of the covering materials and no edges to contend with.

Each sling has a durable tag permanently attached. This tag contains load capacities and all information currently required bythe various regulatory agencies.

CAUTION—Slings are subject to cutting when lifting on sharp edges. Edges in contact with the sling must be padded with materialof sufficient thickness to prevent damage to the sling.The sleeve is sewn around the cover of the Roundsling so that it can be positionedto the area where it is needed. (see page 26 for additional information on sleeves.)

RATED CAPACITY FOR POLYESTER ROUNDSLINGS

POLYESTER ROUNDSLINGSSINGLE PATH POLYESTER ROUNDSLING

• Hook, and load contact points can continually be rotated to further extend not only the wear life of the protective outer cover, butthe overall service cycle of the sling.

• The load bearing yarns never come into contact with the load.There is no wear to them as long as the protective outer cover remainsintact.

• Wide variety of sling lengths and load capacities.• Protects not only the load, but the user’s hands.• Adapts to all types, sizes and load configurations.• SEAMLESS COVER—no edges to wear out.• Lightweight—easy to handle, store and clean• Excellent resistance to ultraviolet light, rot and mildew.• Only 3% elongation.• Maximum temperature exposure 180°F.• No loss of strength in water.• Soft and pliable. Conforms to load.

ROUNDSLING FEATURES

Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoid sharp edgesand exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180°F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use ormaintenance. WARNING


ROUNDSLING SAFE USE & INSPECTION

MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS

1) Determine weight of the load.2) Select proper polyester roundsling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitchand environment. only polyester roundslings with legible identification tags shall be used.3) Polyester roundslings shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacity. Considerationshall be given to the angle from the horizontal (load to roundsling angle) which affects ratedcapacity.4) Polyester roundslings with fittings which are used in a choker hitch shall be of sufficient lengthto assure that the choking action is on the polyester roundsling and never on the fitting.5) Polyester roundslings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced to preventslippage.6) Polyester roundslings shall not be dragged on the floor or over an abrasive surface.7) Polyester roundslings shall not be twisted or tied into knots, or joined by knotting.8) Polyester roundslings shall not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on thesling.9) Polyester roundslings shall be used with lifting devices that are compatible with roundslings.10) Polyester roundslings shall always be protected from being cut by sharp corners, sharpedges, protrusions or abrasive surfaces.11) Do not drop polyester roundslings equipped with metal fittings.12) The opening in fittings shall be the proper shape and size to insure that the fitting will seatproperly in the hook or other attachments.13) Polyester roundsling protective covers that are cut, exposing the load bearing yarn, shallbe removed from service.14) Consideration shall be given to the fitting’s radius in that it shall be compatible to that ofthe crane hook on which it is to be used.15) Consideration shall be given to the distribution of load weight on a multi-legged lift.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS1) Polyester roundslings should be stored in a cool, dry, and dark place to prevent loss of strengthwhen not in use through exposure to ultra-violet rays. Polyester roundslings shall not be storedin chemically active areas.2) Chemically active environments can affect the strength of synthetic polyester roundslingsin varying degrees ranging from little to total degradation.The polyester roundsling manufactureror a qualified person shall be consulted before polyester roundslings are used in chemicallyactive environments.

ACIDS1) Polyester is resistant to many acids, but is subject to degradation ranging from little tomoderate in some acids.2) Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:

a. Type of acidb. Exposure conditionsc. Concentrationd. Temperature

ALKALIS1) Polyester is subject to degradation in alkalis, ranging from little to total degradation.2) Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:

a. Type of alkalib. Exposure conditionsc. Concentrationd. Temperature

3) Polyester roundslings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 194˚F (90˚C), or attemperatures below minus 40˚F (-40˚C).4) Polyester roundslings incorporating aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes,vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of alkalis and/or acids are present.

RECOMMENDED OPERATING PRACTICES FOR ROUNDSLINGS

BASIC RULES OF HITCHING1) RATED CAPACITY: Be sure the polyester roundsling you intend to use is strong enoughfor the job (refer to identification tag on the polyester roundsling).2) WARNING! Rated capacities are affected by the Angle of Lift (roundsling to load angle) whenused in multi-legged polyester roundslings or basket hitches.3) CONTROL AND BALANCE: Use a hitch that will keep the load under control at all times,and be sure the lifting device is directly over center of gravity (CG).4) PREVENT DAMAGE: Use corner protectors on sharp or abrasive corners and edges.5) LIFTING LOAD: Lift load carefully, accelerating smoothly. Avoid shock loading.6) CONDITIONS OF POLYESTER ROUNDSLINGS: Inspect roundslings and their partscarefully before each lift and at regular intervals. Remove the polyester roundsling fromservice if any conditions cause doubt as to the strength of the roundsling.

POLYESTER ROUNDLSLING INSPECTION1) INSPECTION RECORDS

a) Written inspection records should be established and kept on file for each polyesterroundsling. This record should include all the information taken from the polyester roundsling’s identification tag (type, reach, rated capacity), along with its location.These records should be updated after each inspection.

b) Polyester roundslings shall be visually inspected by a designated person handling thepolyester roundsling before each use. These visual observations shall be concerned with the identification tag and discovering damage. Polyester roundslings shall be removed from service if there is any doubt as to the condition of the polyester roundsling.

2) TYPE OF INSPECTIONa) Initial Inspection – Before any polyester roundsling is placed into service it shall be

inspected by a designated person to ensure that the correct polyester roundsling is beingused, as well as to determine that the polyester roundsling meets the requirements ofthe manufacturer’s specification.

b) Frequent Visual Inspection – This inspection shall be made by the person handlingthe polyester roundsling each time the roundsling is used.

c) Periodic Inspection – This inspection shall be conducted by a designated person.Frequency of inspection should be based on:

1. Frequency of use.2. Severity of service conditions.3. Experience gained on service life of polyester roundslings used in similar

applications.4. Periodic inspections should be conducted at least monthly.

3) REMOVAL FROM SERVICEA polyester roundsling shall be removed from service if any of the following is visible:

a) If polyester roundsling identification tag is missing or unreadable.b) Melting, charring or weld spatter on any part of the polyester roundsling.c) Holes, tears, cuts, embedded particles, abrasive wear, or snags that expose the core

fibers of the polyester roundsling.d) Broken or worn stitching in the cover which exposes the core fibers.e) Fittings when damaged, stretched or distorted in any way.f) Polyester roundslings that are knotted.g) Acid or alkali burns on the polyester roundsling.h) Any conditions which cause doubt as to the strength of the polyester roundsling.


WEB & ROUNDSLING HARDWARE SAFE USE

9.1.1 In Twin-Path® Slings Tell-Tails should extend past the tag area of each sling. If both Tell-Tails are not visible, remove the sling from service. If the Tell-Tails show evidence of chemicaldegradation, remove the sling from service. Send to manufacturer for repair evaluation.

9.1.2 Slings should be inspected for evidence of cutting or tearing of the outer cover. Slings with cuts should be removed from service and sent back to the manufacturer for repair evaluation.Damage to the cover may indicate core damage.

9.1.3 Inspect slings for evidence of heat damage. Slings with polyester or Cordura® covers should not be exposed to temperatures above 82°C/180°F Nomex® covered Aramid SparkeaterSlings should not be exposed to temperatures over 149°C/300°F. Slings with Spectra® Olefin cores should not be exposed to temperatures above 65°C/150°F. K-Spec® Core Slingsshould not be exposed to temperatures above 82°C/180°F. Cold temperature exposure down to minus 40°C/minus 40°F do not affect the strength of the products. Other temperaturesshould be referred to the manufacturer.

9.1.4 Slings using aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, or mists of alkalis or acids are present.9.1.5 Twin-Path® Lifting Slings, Roundslings, and any fittings attached should be the subject of frequent and regular inspections. In addition to the initial inspection by a competent person

and frequent written inspections, the slings should be visually inspected before each use.9.1.6 Written inspections should be performed each 30 days and documents of such inspections by a competent person shall be kept on file in the safety department of the plant or site

where used. Inspections may be done more often based on frequency of use, severity of conditions, experience of past service life.9.1.7 Slings should be examined throughout their length for abrasion, cuts, heat damage, fitting distortion or damage, tag legibility, and if any doubts are held by the inspector, the sling

should be removed from service. Core integrity is determined by hand inspection of the entire sling or by fiber optic light transfer if this type of tell-tail is installed in the sling. If adeterioration is found, the sling must be removed from service and returned to the manufacturer for evaluation.

9.1.8 Slings removed from service that are not capable of repair should be destroyed and rendered completely unfit for future use.9.1.9 Abrasion, heat damage or cuts to the cover may indicate a loss of strength to the load core and these slings should not be used until evaluated by the manufacturer. At area of damage,

cover should be opened and the core yarns counted and visually inspected.10.0 Proof Testing Procedures for Complete Twin-Path® Sling Products.10.1.1 Complete slings shall be tested using pins of at least 2” diameter or larger material.10.1.2 Proof tests shall consist of pulling the slings to twice their rated capacity as shown in the appropriate tables. Slings shall be held at the proof test limit for a period of 15 seconds and

then the tension may be released.

TWIN-PATH CARE, USE AND INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS


7.1.1 When not in use, slings should be stored in a clean dry place. Heat sources and non-ventilated placesshould be avoided.

7.1.2 Chemically active environments can affect the strength of Lifting Slings. Different chemicals will react withdifferent exposure to CoverMax® Bulkd Nylon, Dacron® Polyester, Kevlar® Aramid, Nomex® Aramid, andSpectra® Olefin. Please see the enclosed tables for reactions of specific chemicals.

Aramids are resistant to most ketones, alcohols, dry cleaning solvents and many other organic solvents. Its acidresistance is superior to that of nylon but is not as good as that of polyester. Aramids shows good resistance toalkalis at room temperature, but is degraded by strong alkalis at higher temperatures.

Aramids are compatible with fluorine-containing elastomers, resins, and refrigerants at high temperatures, and isresistant to fluorine compounds in concentrations usually encountered in stack gases from metallurgical and rock-processing operations.

7.0 — ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

6.2.1 Determine the weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling.

6.2.2 Select a sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment.

6.2.3 Slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration shall be given to angle of lift which may affectthe lifting capacity. Diameters of pins and sharp edges also may affect the capacity of the lifting sling.

6.2.4 Slings used in a choker shall not be forced to tighten around the load by pounding with hammers or other objects. Chokerhitches are the least effective way to use a sling based on capacity. Two chokers should be used to balance the load.One choker in the center of the load may create an unbalanced situation which could lead to an accident.

6.2.5 Slings used in a basket hitch must have the load balanced to prevent slippage and accidents.

6.2.6 Slings used with fittings shall be compatible with the fittings used. The lifting capacity shall be rated at the lower of thefitting or sling. Fitting openings shall be of the proper shape and size to assure that the sling will seat properly.

6.2.7 Slings shall be protected from cutting and sharp edges. All sharp protrusions and abrasive surfaces will be kept fromcontact with the sling. Where poor situations develop padding shall be interjected between the sling and the load. Slingsshould not be attached to the pin area of shackles. This practice leads to bunching and cutting of the sling and prema-ture failure.

6.2.8 Slings shall not be dragged on the floor or across other surfaces which may damage the sling.

6.2.9 Slings shall not be twisted or tied in knots to shorten.

6.2.10 Slings shall not be pulled from under loads resting on the sling.

6.2.11 Do not drop objects on slings or run over them with vehicles.

6.2.12 Slings which are damaged shall not be used.

6.2.13 Sling hitches must provide control of the load.

6.2.14 Portions of the human body shall be kept from between the sling and the load and from between the sling and anyattachment to lifting devices such as hooks.

6.2.15 Personnel shall stand clear of suspended loads.

6.2.16 Personnel shall not ride on the sling or suspended loads.

6.2.17 Avoid snatch or shock loading.

6.2.18 Twisting and kinking of the legs of the sling shall be avoided.

6.2.19 It is important to rotate the sling bearing points to prevent cover and core damage from extended wear. Rotating slingbearing points will greatly increase sling life.

6.2.20 Loads applied to the hook should be centered in the bowl of the hooks. Do not point load the hook. Hooks must beshaped to properly support the sling without bunching.

6.2.21 During lifting with or without the load, all personnel shall be alert for possible snagging.

6.2.22 The slings should contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity so that the loadwill not tilt when the load is lifted.

6.2.23 Slings shall be of the proper length so that the angle of the sling to the load does not reduce the ratedcapacity below the capacity needed to safely lift the load.

6.2.24 Only legibly marked or labeled slings should be used. If the tag is not legible, or missing, the sling shouldnot be used.

6.2.25 Keep labels or tags away from the load, the hook and the angle of choke.

6.2.26 All Slings should be inspected each time before each lift.


SECTION 6.2 MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS

FIGURE 1Typical Stress-Strain Curves of

Representative DuPont Industrial Yarns


POLYPRO- HDPEGENERIC FIBER TYPE NYLON POLYESTER PYLENE OLEFIN ARAMID K-SPEC®

PERCENT STRENGTHRETENTION AFTER

6 MONTHS IMMERSIONAGENT SPECRA 900

Sea Water 10010% Detergent Solution 100Hydraulic Fluid 100Kerosene 100Gasoline 100Toluene 100Perchlorethylene 100Glacial Acetic Acid 1001M Hydrochloric Acid 1005M Sodium Hydroxide 100Ammonium Hydroxide (29%) 100Hypophosphite Solution (10%) 100Clorox® 91

Bulk Strength1 1.0 .9-1.1 .55 2.8 2.7 2.75Weight 1.0 1.21 .80 .85 1.26 1.01Working2 Elastic Elongation 1.0 .60 .80 .10 .10 .10Co-efficient3 of Friction .10-.12 .12-.15 .15-.22 .08 10.12 .10

Chars At Chars AtMelting Point 460°F 480°F 330°F 297°F 800°F 297°FCritical4 Temperature 180°F 180°F 180°F 150°F 300°F 180°FCold-Flow (Creep) Negligible Negligible Negligible to High Negligible to High Negligible Negligible

1 Bulk Strength is defined as strength per circumference squared.2 Working is defined as rope actually in use under a cycling load.3 Co-efficient of friction is based on reluctance to slip or slide.4 Critical temperature is defined as the point at which degradation is caused by temperature alone.

Cold-Flow (Creep) is defined as a fiber deformation (elongation) due to molecular slippage under a constantsteady static loading situation. Fibers that have this inherent characteristic will display extremely low or negligiblecreep if minor fluctuations occur in the rate and/or frequency of load levels. In rope form, this would apply topolypropylene, and HDPE Olefin Fibers.

(Using Nylon as a basis of 1.0)

The resistance of Aramids to oxides of sulphur at temperatures above the acid dew point is superior to that of polyester. Below thedew point, concentrated sulphuric acid may condense on the fiber and cause a progressive loss in strength.

In moderate to strong acid or alkali environments, evaluation of Aramids should be made to ensure that the yarn will performacceptably before use.

Polyester and nylon are not significantly affected by most compounds of the following classes:

Alcohols

Dry Cleaning Solvents

Halogenated Hydrocarbons

Ketones

Soaps and Synthetic Detergents

Water (Including Sea Water)

Polyester also shows good to excellent resistance to:

Aqueous solutions of most weak acids at the boil, and to most strong acids at room temperature, but is disintegrated by concen-trated (95%) sulphuric acid at room temperature.

Aqueous solutions of strong alkalis at room temperature, but is degraded at the boil.

Oxidizing agents, and is not degraded by bleaching treatments ordinarily used for textiles.

Nylon is not significantly affected by most aldehydes, alkalis, ethers, or hydrocarbons, but is deteriorated by dilute acids (e.g.,hydrochloric acid and sulphuric acid in 10% concentrations at room temperature cause a noticeable loss in breaking strength in10 hours).

Solvents for nylon include:

Concentrated formic acid

Phenolic compounds at room temperature

Calcium chloride in methanol at room temperature

Hot solutions of calcium chloride in:

Glacial Acetic Acid

Ethylene Chlorohydrin

Ethylene Glycol

Hot solutions of zinc chloride in methanol

Benzyl alcohol at the boil

Aramids are resistant to most weak acids and alkalis, ketones, alcohols, hydrocarbons, oils and dry cleaning solvents. Strong acidsand bases and sodium hypo-chlorite bleach attack aramids, particularly at high temperatures of high concentrations.

Spectra® has excellent chemical resistance.

8.0 ‚ FIBER CHARACTERISTICS



VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET HITCH NOMINAL NOMINALEYE EYE

WIDTH LENGTH WIDTHCODE NO. (“) PLY L (“) W (“)

EE1-901 1 1 1,600 1,200 3,200 2,800 2,300 1,600 9 1

EE1-902 2 1 3,200 2,400 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200 9 2

EE1-903 3 1 4,800 3,600 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 12 1-1/2

EE1-904 4 1 6,400 4,800 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400 12 2

EE1-906 6 1 9,600 7,200 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 12 2

EE1-908 8 1 12,800 9,600 25,600 22,200 18,100 12,800 18 3

EE2-901 1 2 3,200 2,400 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200 9 1

EE2-902 2 2 6,400 4,800 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400 9 2

EE2-903 3 2 8,900 6,500 17,800 15,400 12,600 8,900 12 1-1/2

EE2-904 4 2 11,500 8,700 23,000 20,000 16,300 11,500 12 2

EE2-906 6 2 16,300 12,200 32,600 28,300 23,100 16,300 15 2

EE2-908 8 2 19,200 14,400 38,400 33,600 26,800 19,200 18 3

EE4-901 1 4 5,000 3,800 10,000 8,700 7,000 5,000 12 1

EE4-902 2 4 10,000 7,500 20,000 17,500 14,000 10,000 12 2

EE4-903 3 4 14,900 11,100 29,800 26,000 20,800 14,900 15 1-1/2

EE4-904 4 4 19,800 14,800 39,600 34,600 24,200 19,800 15 2

EE4-906 6 4 29,800 22,300 59,600 52,100 41,700 29,800 18 3

EE4-908 8 4 39,700 29,700 79,400 69,400 55,500 39,700 24 4

EE1-601 1 1 1,200 900 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200 9 1

EE1-602 2 1 2,400 1,800 4,800 4,200 3,400 2,400 9 2

EE1-603 3 1 3,600 2,700 7,200 6,200 5,100 3,600 12 1-1/2

EE1-604 4 1 4,800 3,600 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 12 2

EE2-601 1 2 2,400 1,800 4,800 4,200 3,400 2,400 9 1

EE2-602 2 2 4,800 3,200 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 9 2

EE2-603 3 2 6,700 4,900 13,300 11,500 9,400 6,700 12 1-1/2

EE2-604 4 2 8,600 6,500 17,300 15,000 12,200 8,600 12 2

EE4-601 1 4 4,200 3,200 8,400 7,300 5,800 4,200 12 1

EE4-602 2 4 8,000 6,000 16,000 14,000 11,200 8,000 12 2

EE4-603 3 4 12,000 9,000 24,000 21,000 16,800 12,000 15 1-1/2

EE4-604 4 4 16,000 12,000 32,000 28,000 22,400 16,000 15 2

WARNING: Horizontal sling angles less than 30° shall not be used.

NOTE: 1) Slings 3” and wider have tapered eyes unless otherwise specified.

2) See Ordering and Measuring Details on page 20.

3) All slings are made with yellow treated nylon web unless otherwise specified.

4) Please specify length.

EYE & EYE TYPE 3 (EE) SPECIAL ORDER

Type 4 slings are the same as Type 3 Slings except the eyes are twisted before sewing. This twisting allows for a better chokerhitch and lets the eyes of the sling nest together better on a crane hook when it is used in a basket hitch. Rated capacities in lbs.

Type 3 slings are furnished with an eye or loop sewn on each end of the sling in a flat configuration to allow for passage throughnarrow spaces. Type 3 Slings 3” or wider have tapered eyes unless specified otherwise.

TWISTED EYE TYPE 4 (EE) STANDARD STOCK STYLE

EYE & EYE NYLON WEB SLINGS

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

ONE PLYHeavy Duty

TWO PLYHeavy Duty

FOUR PLYHeavy Duty

ONE PLYLight Duty

TWO PLYLight Duty

FOUR PLYLight Duty

Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before use. Use only if trained. Observe rated capacity. Avoidsharp edges and exposure to acid, alkali, sunlight and temperature over 180°F. DEATH or INJURY can occur fromimproper use or maintenance. WARNING


Type 5 Slings are the strongest, most versatile, and least expensive slings for general usage available. They are simple in con-struction, consisting of an endless loop of webbing overlapped and sewn together, and they have a wide variety of uses and hitchconfigurations. Rated capacities in lbs.

VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET HITCH TAPEREYE EYE

WIDTH LENGTH WIDTHCODE NO. (“) PLY L (“) W (“)

EN1-901 1 1 3,200 2,500 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200 — —

EN1-902 2 1 6,400 5,000 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400 1 9

EN1-903 3 1 8,600 6,900 17,200 15,000 12,000 8,600 1-1/2 12

EN1-904 4 1 11,500 9,200 23,000 20,100 16,100 11,500 2 12

EN1-906 6 1 16,300 13,000 32,600 28,500 22,800 16,300 2 15

EN2-901 1 2 6,100 4,900 12,200 10,600 8,500 6,100 — —

EN2-902 2 2 12,200 9,800 24,400 21,300 17,000 12,200 1 9

EN2-903 3 2 16,300 13,000 32,600 28,200 23,000 16,300 1-1/2 12

EN2-904 4 2 20,700 16,500 41,400 36,200 28,900 20,700 2 12

EN2-906 6 2 28,600 23,000 57,200 50,000 40,000 28,600 3 15

EN3-901 1 3 8,000 6,400 16,000 14,000 11,200 8,000 — —

EN3-902 2 31 16,000 12,800 32,000 28,000 22,400 16,000 * *

EN3-903 3 3 24,700 19,800 49,400 42,800 34,900 24,700 * *

EN3-904 4 3 28,700 23,000 57,400 50,200 40,100 28,700 * *

EN3-906 6 3 40,700 32,500 81,400 71,200 56,900 40,700 * *

EN1-601 1 1 2,400 1,900 4,800 4,200 3,400 2,400 — —

EN1-602 2 1 4,800 3,800 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 1 9

EN1-603 3 1 7,200 5,200 14,400 12,500 10,200 7,200 1-1/2 12

EN1-604 4 1 9,600 6,900 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 2 12

EN2-601 1 2 4,800 3,800 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 — —

EN2-602 2 2 9,600 7,700 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 1 9

EN2-603 3 2 11,700 9,400 33,400 20,300 16,500 11,700 1-1/2 12

EN2-604 4 2 15,500 12,400 31,000 27,100 21,700 15,500 2 12


NOTE: 1) Please specify when sling is to be tapered at hook contact area.

2) Three ply slings are tapered by special request only.

3) Wider Endless slings are available for special applications.

4) Please specify length.

ENDLESS SLING TYPE 5

ENDLESS NYLON WEB SLING

ONE PLYHeavy Duty

TWO PLYHeavy Duty

THREE PLYHeavy Duty

ONE PLYLight Duty

TWO PLYLight Duty


See Wear Pads Pages 8, 9


VERTICAL CHOKER** BASKET HITCHES

WIDTHCODE NO. (“) PLY

TRIANGLE AND CHOKER WEB SLINGS

1-902 2 1 3,200 2,400 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200

1-903 3 1 4,800 3,600 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800

1-904 4 1 6,400 4,800 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400

1-906 6 1 9,600 7,200 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600

1-908 8 1 12,800 9,600 25,600 22,200 18,100 12,800

1-910 10 1 16,000 12,000 32,000 27,700 22,600 16,000

1-912 12 1 19,200 14,400 38,400 33,200 27,100 19,200

2-902 2 2 6,400 5,000 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400

2-903 3 2 8,900 6,900 17,800 15,400 12,600 8,900

2-904 4 2 11,200 9,000 22,400 19,400 15,800 11,200

2-906 6 2 16,300 13,100 32,600 28,300 23,100 16,300

2-908 8 2 20,500 16,400 41,000 35,500 29,000 20,500

2-910 10 2 24,000 19,200 48,000 41,600 33,900 24,000

2-912 12 2 26,900 21,500 53,700 46,500 38,000 26,900

1-602 2 1 2,400 1,900 4,800 4,200 3,400 2,400

1-603 3 1 3,600 2,900 7,200 6,200 5,100 3,600

1-604 4 1 4,800 3,800 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800

2-602 2 2 4,800 3,800 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800

2-603 3 2 6,700 5,300 13,300 11,500 9,400 6,700

2-604 4 2 8,600 6,900 17,300 15,000 12,200 8,600


TRIANGLE AND CHOKER SLING TYPE 1 (TC)Type 1 Slings can be used in a choker hitch or a basket hitch, and will give extended life where damage to the ends of a sling isa problem.

TRIANGLE AND TRIANGLE SLING TYPE 2 (TT)Type 2 Slings are the same as Type 1 Slings except that they have metal triangles on both ends and are limited to vertical or baskethitches. Rated capacities in lbs.

ONE PLYHeavy Duty

TWO PLYHeavy Duty

ONE PLYLight Duty

TWO PLYLight Duty

WEB NEW UNILINK PAIR OF STEEL TRIANGLES & CHOKERS TRIANGLEWIDTH INCHES WT. UNILINKS INCHES TRIANGLE CHOKER & CHOKERINCHES D L LBS. WT. LBS. D L WT. LBS. WT. LBS. WT. LBS.

2 2 3-7/8 1.6 3.2 1-3/4 2-3/8 .9 2.0 2.93 3 5-1/4 3.2 6.4 2 3-5/16 1.7 3.6 5.34 4 6-7/8 5.0 10.0 2-3/8 4 3.1 5.7 8.8

UNILINK®

Unilink® is both a Triangle and Choker Fitting Forged Steel for Single or Two Ply 2-3-4 inch Wide Web Slings. No more “old fash-ioned” TT (Type 1) or TC (Type 2) web slings with their higher costs and limited usage. The webbing always tries to slide aroundthe corner of the bottom or bearing side of the triangles or out of the shallow groove on the cross bar of the chokers.

Unilink® advantages over most steel end fittings: Positive webbing entrapment in the bearing slot. Top curved bearing area forthe hook or web in choker hitch guides the choker action carefully along sling line axis. Acts as a choker fitting for either end ordirection. Larger hook opening than triangles or chokers. Forged medium carbon steel for strength and ductility. Smooth, roundedforging profile to protect webbing. Zinc dichromate plate for corrosion resistance. Designed for both single or two ply slings.

Unilink (UU) slings are less expensive than aluminum or steel triangle and choker (TC) slings. In some cases they cost lessthan triangle and triangle (TT) slings. In all cases they can be rewebbed many times, for either one or two ply.

FOR CODE #PLEASE SPECIFY

TYPE TC ORTYPE TTExample:

TC1-602 X 6 ft.

**Choker rated capacitiesapply to Type 1 slingsonly.Steel fittings are standardon both 1-ply and 2-plyslings.Aluminum fittings areavailable up to 6: in 1-plycapacities.



These slings are wide slings (6” through 24” width), intended for basket hitch usage.They offer excellent load stability and low bear-ing pressure to the material being lifted.

WIDE LIFT SLING

VERTICAL CHOKER BASKETSLING

PLY WIDTHCODE NO. TYPE (“)

WL1-906 One Ply Heavy Duty 6 — — 15,400WL1-908 One Ply Heavy Duty 8 — — 20,400WL1-910 One Ply Heavy Duty 10 — — 25,600WL1-912 One Ply Heavy Duty 12 — — 30,800WL1-916 One Ply Heavy Duty 16 — — 38,000WL1-920 One Ply Heavy Duty 20 — — 45,000WL1-924 One Ply Heavy Duty 24 — — 52,000WL2-906 Two Ply Heavy Duty 6 — — 28,600WL2-908 Two Ply Heavy Duty 8 — — 38,000WL2-910 Two Ply Heavy Duty 10 — — 47,600WL2-912 Two Ply Heavy Duty 12 — — 57,200WL2-916 Two Ply Heavy Duty 16 — — 61,500WL2-920 Two Ply Heavy Duty 20 — — 63,000WL2-924 Two Ply Heavy Duty 24 — — 70,000

These slings are toughest and most durable of all web slings. They have exceptional strength and incorporate a special abrasionresistant material that completely covers both sides of the sling body and eyes. Special Reversed Eye Slings work well in choker,basket and vertical hitches, and where sling usage is constant or tends to be abusive. They will outlast all other web sling types.

SPECIAL REVERSED EYE SLING

VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET

PLY WIDTHCODE NO. TYPE (“)

RE1-902 One Ply Heavy Duty 2 4,500 3,600 9,000RE1-904 One Ply Heavy Duty 4 7,700 6,200 15,400RE1-906 One Ply Heavy Duty 6 11,000 8,800 22,000RE2-902 Two Ply Heavy Duty 2 6,500 5,200 13,000RE2-904 Two Ply Heavy Duty 4 13,000 10,400 26,000RE2-906 Two Ply Heavy Duty 6 20,000 16,000 40,000RE1-602 One Ply Light Duty 2 3,600 2,900 7,200RE1-604 One Ply Light Duty 4 6,800 5,400 13,600RE1-606 One Ply Light Duty 6 8,000 6,400 16,000RE2-602 Two Ply Light Duty 2 5,200 4,200 10,400RE2-604 Two Ply Light Duty 4 10,500 8,400 21,000RE2-606 Two Ply Light Duty 6 14,400 11,500 28,800

SPECIAL REVERSED EYE & WIDE LIFT SLINGS

BASKET HITCHWIDTH

STOCK NO. (INCHES) PLY

WLA-1-906 6 1 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000 1 9WLA-1-908 8 1 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000 1 12WLA-1-910 10 1 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000 1 15WLA-1-912 12 1 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000 1 18WLA-1-916 16 1 10,000 8,700 7,100 5,000 2 24WLA-1-920 20 1 10,000 8,700 7,100 5,000 2 24WLA-1-924 16 1 10,000 8,700 7,100 5,000 2 24

NormalEye WidthW (Inches)

NormalEye LengthL (Inches)

These are designed for applications where you need a wide sling for load stability and for proper handling of frag-ile or highly finished surfaces. They have a lower rated capacity when the Wide Body Basket. Eyes are construct-ed to fit properly on small hoist hooks and are reinforced for longer life.

ATTACHED-EYE LOAD BALANCER SLING


ROUND WEB SLINGS* S-280 S-280 WEIGHT REPLACEMENTSLING WEBBING EYE WORKING LOAD STOCK EACH KIT S-4280

SIZE (NO.) WIDTH (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) PLY LIMIT** (TONS) NO. (LBS.) STOCK NO.

1 & 2 2 2 2 3-1/4 1021681 1.5 10218203 3 1.5 2 4-1/2 1021690 1.9 10218214 4 2 2 6-1/4 1021700 2.9 1021822

5 & 6 6 3 2 8-1/2 1021709 5.1 1021823*Type III (Eye and Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply.

**NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times theWorking Load Limit.

WEB CONNECTOR LINEWeb Connector line is designed to connect Synthetic Web Slings and Synthetic Round Slings to conventional hardware.

Designed with No-Slip surface that: Eliminates “bunching” effect caused by traditional shackles. Reduces sling tendency to slide.Shackles available in sizes 1-1/2 to 5 tons. Hooks available in sizes 1-1/2, 3 and 5 tons. Increased radius of bow/eye gives widersling bearing surface resulting in an increased area for load distribution, thus: Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency by at last 15%as compared to standard anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings ratedWorking Load Limit to be achieved. Allows better load distribution on internal fibers. Design factor of 5 to 1. Shackles available inboth a Screw Pin and Bolt, Nut and cotter pin configuration. Bolt (Pin) has a larger diameter that provides better load distribution.Each shackle and hook has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a Working Load Limit and thename Crosby forged into it. All Alloy construction. Fatigue rated to 20,000 cycles at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit.

WEB SLING SAVER SHACKLES AND HOOKS

S-280 WEB CONNECTOR

S-4280 REPLACEMENT KIT

ROUND WEB SLINGS* S-281 S-281 WEIGHTSLING WEBBING EYE WORKING LOAD STOCK EACH

SIZE (NO.) WIDTH (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) PLY LIMIT** (TONS) NO. (LBS.)

1 & 2 2 2 2 3-1/4 1021048 1.23 3 1.5 2 4-1/2 1021057 1.54 4 2 2 6-1/4 1021066 2.5

5 & 6 6 3 2 8-1/2 1021075 4.3*Type III (Eye and Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply.

**NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times theWorking Load Limit.

WEB SLING SHACKLEWeb Sling Shackle is designed to connect Synthetic Web Slings and Synthetic Round Slings to eyebolts, pad eyes and lifting lugs.

S-281 WEB SLING SHACKLE

WEB SLING ROUND WORKING HOOK CODE # CODE # S-4320NOMINAL SLING LOAD LIMIT* ID WS-320-A WSL-320A REPLACEMENTSIZE (NO.) SIZE (NO.) (TONS) CODE S.C. WITH LATCH LATCH KIT STOCK NO.

1” 1 1-1/2 FA 1022701 1022706 10963742” 2 3 HA 1022712 1022717 10964683” 3 5 IA 1022723 1022728 1096515

320 AN - Alloy SteelWS-320 A

WEB SLINGWeb slings shall not be construsted or bunched betweenthe ears of a clevis or shackle, or in a hook.

ROUND SLINGSThe round shall not be constricted or buched between theears oaf aclevis or shackle ,or in a hook.

The openingof fittings shall be proper shape and size toensure that the fittings will seat properly on the round sling.

SYNTHETIC SLINGS RATED LOADFolding, Bunching or Pinching of synthetic slinggs,whichoccurs when used with shackles, hooks or other applica-

tions will reduce the rated load.

The Round Slings shall not be constricted or bunchedbetween the ears of a clevis or shackle, or in a hook. Whena Round Sling is used with a shackle, it is recominded thatit be used (rigged) in the bow of the shackle.

When connecting web or round slings, useconventional fittings with:1. Large Radius2. Straight Pins3. Pads or use special fittings designed for

synthetic slings.See Pages 10, 11, 12 For Other Hardware


RATED CAPACITY LBS.

PEAR OBLING HOOK WEBCODE NO. LINK LINK SIZE WIDTH

DOS1-601 2100 1700 1200 1/2” 1/2” 3/4 TON 1”

DOS1-901 2800 2300 1600 1/2” 1/2” 1 TON 1”

DOS1-602 4200 3400 2400 5/8” 1/2” 1-1/2 TON 2”

DOS1-902 5500 4500 3200 3/4” 5/8” 2 TON 2”

DOS2-601 4200 3400 2400 5/8” 1/2” 1-1/2 TON 1”

DOS2-901 5500 4500 3200 3/4” 5/8” 2 TON 1”

DOS2-602 8300 6800 4800 7/8” 3/4” 3 TON 2”

DOS2-902 11,100 9000 6400 1” 1” 5 TON 2”

DOE1-601 2100 1700 1200 1/2” 1/2” — 1”

DOE1-901 2800 2300 1600 1/2” 1/2” — 1”

DOE1-602 4200 3400 2400 5/8” 1/2” — 2”

DOE1-902 5500 4500 3200 3/4” 5/8” — 2”

DOE2-601 4200 3400 2400 5/8” 1/2” — 1”

DOE2-901 5500 4500 3200 3/4” 5/8” — 1”

DOE2-602 8300 6800 4800 7/8” 3/4” — 2”

DOE2-902 11,100 9000 6400 1” 1” — 2”

DEN1-601 4200 3400 2400 5/8” 1/2” — 1”

DEN1-901 5600 4600 3200 3/4” 5/8” — 1”

DEN1-602 8400 6800 4800 7/8” 3/4” — 2”

DEN1-902 11,000 9000 6400 1” 1” — 2”

DEN2-601 8400 6800 4800 7/8” 3/4” — 1”

DEN2-901 11,000 9000 6400 1” 1” — 1”

DEN2-602 16,600 13,600 9600 1-1/4” 1” — 2”

DEN2-902 22,200 18,000 12,800 1-3/8” 1” — 2”

NOTE: 1) Oblong link will be used unless pear shaped is specified.

2) 3 and 4-leg slings available.

MULTI-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS

LIFCO LOAD GRIPPERS

ForWEB

TIE-DOWNSSee

Pages118-123122-127


PLEASE SPECIFY:1. Quantity2. Code Number3. Sling Length Pull to Pull4. Sling Type Number5. Nylon or Polyester Material6. Note If Untreated Material Is Desired

EXAMPLE:

2 ea. EE 1 - 904 X 12 FT. TYPE 4 NYLON SLING

HOW TO ORDER

SlingConfiguration

Numberof Plies

Strengthof Web

Widthof Web

Lengthof Sling

SlingType

WebMaterial

RATED CAPACITYThe term “Rated Capacity,” as used in this catalog represents the ratio of the minimum breaking strength divided by a safety fac-tor of five. The rated capacities in our catalog apply to a new and unused sling, in a straight pull, under ideal sling conditions, andideal test conditions. NOTE: DO NOT UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES EXCEED RATED CAPACITY.

ELONGATIONWeb slings will stretch when loaded, and this stretch is measured as a percent of the sling length with no load. LIFCO Nylon Slingsstretch about seven percent at their rated capacity, and our polyester slings stretch about one-half that much at their rated capac-ity. The elongation may vary with web and sling construction. Sling will recoil and cause injury or death if released under load.

TEMPERATURESynthetic web slings should be not be used where they will be exposed to temperatures over 180° F.

TYPES OF SLING WEBBINGNYLON—Slings made of nylon web are by far the most popular and best suited slings for general usage. Nylon is the strongestmaterial available for web sling usage and it has elastic properties that are desirable in many instances. Nylon slings are not affect-ed by grease or oil and have good chemical resistance. (See Chemical Information Chart on page 22).Their stretch at rated capac-ity is approximately 7 percent, and their temperature limit is 180°F.

POLYESTER—Slings made of polyester should be used when acid conditions exist, or a minimum of stretch is desired. Theirstretch at rated capacity is approximately 1/2 that of nylon slings and they are good in most chemical environments except con-centrated sulphuric acid, aldehydes, and ethers. Polyester web also has a temperature limit of 180°F.

TREATMENT FOR ABRASION RESISTANCEAll slings are treated with yellow latex for abrasion resistance unless otherwise specified. Wear Pads should be used to preventabrasion and cutting.

FOR INFORMATION ON:Sling Angle Loading • Effects of Chemicals

Safe Use • Inspection

SEE PAGES 21,22,23SEE FOLLOWING PAGES

SLING CHARACTERISTICS


These are some of the most common types of web sling damage caused by abuse and misuse. When you see any of these prob-lems during your regular inspection, stop. Replace the sling immediately because the damage is done. Never attempt to mend thesling yourself and, more so, never attempt to lift with these slings.

Whether a sling is damaged from improper use or normal wear, the same rule applies in all cases: always cut the sling eyesand discard the sling right away when you see the damage. Only with proper working slings can you take a load off your mind.

TENSILE BREAKThe distinguishing sign of a tensile break is a frayed appearance close to the point of failure or damage.This usually happens whena sling is loaded beyond its existing strength. The photo shows an example of a sling pulled to destruction on a testing machine.You an avoid tensile breaks by never overloading your sling.

CUTYou an easily see a cut in your sling when you see a clean break in the webbing structure or fibers. This usually results when asling contacts a sharp object or unprotected edge of a load.This can happen anywhere on the sling body or eyes. Many slings fea-ture Red Guard warning yarns to alert you of serious cuts. One way you can avoid cuts from contacting sharp corners is to usewear pads on the sling to protect the fabric. See page 20 for details.

CUT AND TENSILE DAMAGEA good example is the photo shown here. It shows what can happen when you use a sling that’s already been cut by a sharp objectalong one edge of the sling body. The cut dramatically reduces lifting capacity, and continued use will ultimately lead to sling fail-ure, usually at a load far below the sling’s rated capacity. The solution, obviously, is to never use a sling after it’s been cut.

ABRASION DAMAGEAnytime you see frayed fibers on the surface exposing the “picks,” or cross fibers, of the webbing that hold the load-bearing (length-wise) fibers in place, it’s abrasion damage. The most common abrasion damage occurs either when the sling slips while in contactwith a load during a lift or when the sling is pulled from under a load. When you see the Red Guard warning yarns exposed, it’syour signal that serious damage—and loss of lifting capacity—has occurred. We recommend that slings with any damage to load-bearing fibers be discarded. Wear pads are one way to avoid this damage.

ACID DAMAGEIt’s true nylon and polyester webbing are stable when exposed to many common chemicals, but they should never be exposed toany strong acids or corrosive liquids whenever possible. The same is true for metal fittings on slings.

Example 1 (top photo).This is what happens when sulfuric acid, like car battery acid is heated to the boiling point and droppedon nylon webbing. The charring on the surface fibers deteriorates the sling and will continue to get worse, severely affecting thewebbing strength.

Example 2 (bottom photo). This is what happens when nylon webbing is immersed in sulfuric acid at room temperature forthree weeks, resulting in major damage. Note the fibers are softened and swollen, and the entire fabric is grossly distorted, virtu-ally destroying the webbing.You an help prevent this damage by never storing slings in areas where they may be exposed to acidor acid fumes, which are as destructive as liquid.

WHY PROPER CLEANING AND STORAGE IS VITALAll it takes is a little ordinary dirt, grit and grime to reduce the overall strength and life of your sling. It’s very easy for these con-taminants to penetrate between fibers anytime the webbing bends, pulls tight against loads, or stretches and relaxes during load-ing and unloading. Once in place, they grind against the fibers, reducing their strength and useful life.

That’s why it’s a good idea to properly store your slings when they’re out of service and to clean them when they becomesoiled. When slings are clean, they’re not only easier to inspect, they’re also stronger and more durable.

There are many procedures you an use to clean your slings, depending on how soiled they are. For every day dirt and grime,you can clean with soap or detergent and water for good results.

Whatever cleaning method you use, always hang your washed slings in a dry, sheltered place. Always keep slings from pro-longed contact with direct sunlight during drying and storage because ultraviolet rays can degrade synthetic fibers. Nylon or poly-ester slings that have been dyed any color but white will fade somewhat due to washing, but this in no way affects the strength ofthe webbing.

Both nylon and polyester webbing have an extremely low water absorption rate, making them flexible, light and easy to han-dle even after prolonged soaking in water. Both show excellent resistance to mold, mildew and fungus, although dirt that accumu-lates on slings may support their growth, and that’s why regular cleaning is very important.

IDENTIFYING WEAR AND ABUSE and SLING CARE


1. DETERMINE RATEDCAPACITY

Needed to safely lift your load. Match slingand type hitch on rated capacity chart to equalor exceed your load.

2. CHECK SLING-TO-LOAD ANGLE

Rated capacities are stated at twosling-to-load angles. 30° for a ChokerHitch and 90° for a Basket Hitch.

3. BALANCE ISIMPORTANT

Use more than one sling if necessaryfor balance. Avoid load slipage. There’ssafety in sling numbers.

4. DANGER!ACIDS ANDCAUSTICS!

Don’t use nylon slingaround acids. Don’t usepolyester around caustics.Don’t use any sling in tem-peratures over 180°.

5. SLING LOAD

6. DON’T PULLSLING FROMUNDER LOAD

The full weight of load on sling can dam-age sling and reduce performance.

7. AVOID ABRASIVE SURFACESDon’t drag slings on flooring or over equipment.

8. DON’T KNOT A SLINGSlings should never be joined by ‘knots’. Tyingknots seriously weakens sling life and capacity.

9. PROTECTLOADANDSLINGSWITH

GUARDS

CHEMICAL INFORMATION CHART

Watch sharp corners, edges andprotrusions.

HOW TO MATCH A SLING TO THE JOB—SAFETY CHECKLIST

Halo-Dry genated Oils Soap & Water &

Alde- Strong Bleaching Cleaning Hydro- Hydro- Oils Lubri- Deter- Sea- WeakAcids Alcohols hydes Alkalis Agents Solvents Ethers Carbons Carbons Ketones Crude cating gents water Alkalis

POLYESTER * OK NO ** OK OK NO OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OKNYLON NO OK OK OK NO OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

*Disintegrated by concentrated sulfuric acid**Degraded by strong alkalis at elevated temperatures

USE WEAR PADSTO PROTECT

SLINGS FROMCUTTING

See Pages8 & 9

Watch for corners, edges and protrusions.

9. PROTECTLOADANDSLINGSWITH

GUARDS


As the included angle between the legs of a sling increases, the load on each leg increases. The effect is the same whether asingle sling is used as a basket, or two slings are used with each in a straight pull, as with a 2-legged bridle.

Anytime pull is exerted at an angle on a leg or legs of a sling, the load per leg can bedetermined by using the data in the table at left. Proceed as follows to calculate this load anddetermine the rated capacity required of the sling or slings, needed for a lift.

1. First, divide the total load to be lifted by the number of legs to be used. This provides theload per leg if the lift were being made with all legs lifting vertically.

2. Determine the angle between the legs of the sling and the horizontal.3. Then MULTIPLY the load per leg (as computed in No. 1 above) by the Load Factor for

the leg angle being used (from the table at left) - to compute the ACTUAL LOAD on each legfor this lift and angle. THE ACTUAL LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED THE RATED SLING CAPACI-TY.

(Sling angle at 60°): 1000 - 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x 1.154 = 577 Ibs. =ACTUAL LOAD on each leg at the 60° included angle being used.

(Sling angle of 45°): 1000 - 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x 1.414 = 707 Ibs. =ACTUAL LOAD on each leg at the 45° horizontal angle being used.

CALCULATING THE LOAD ON EACH LEG OF A SLING

Cited below are removal criteria established by the Occupational Safety andHealth Administration and the American National Standard Institute Safety Standard.

1. OSHA 1910.184: Criteria for Removal From Service. Synthetic web slingsshall be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions arepresent: (a) acid or caustic burns; (b) melting or charring of any part of the slingsurface; (c) snags, punctures, tears or cuts; (d) broken or worn stitches; (e) distortionof fittings.

2. ANSI B30.9-9-5.6.2. Possible Defects. A sling shall be removed from service ifany defects, such as the following, are visible: (a) acid or caustic burns; (b) melting orcharring of any part of the sling surface; (c) snags, punctures, tears or cuts; (d)broken or worn stitches; (e) wear or elongation exceeding the amount recommendedby manufacturer; (f) distortion of fittings; (g) other apparent defects which causedoubt as to the strength of the sling should be referred to the manufacturer for

determination.To these we recommend adding the following reasons for removal from service:

(a) Distortion of the sling identification tag which renders any portion of it illegible.Riggers must be able to read this vital information easily and quickly; (b) Loading asling beyond its rated capacity. Anytime a sling has been loaded beyond the tagstated capacity—purposely or inadvertently—its future usefulness is suspect.

While most of the foregoing standards are quite specific regarding some removalcriteria, a certain amount of judgment is involved in others. The issue of wear to thesling body, the selvage edge of webbing, and to sling eyes creates the greatestamount of contention. We recommend that any exposure of the RED GUARDwarning yarns is sufficient cause to remove a sling from service and destroy it.

NOTE: We do not repair or recommend the repair of used slings or tie-downstraps. Hardware can be reused if properly inspected and tested.

REMOVAL CRITERIA

WEB SLING SAFETY AND INSPECTION

1. Inspect slings for damage before each use.2. Slings shall not be exposed to temperatures in excess of the manufacturer's

recommendation. (Normally 180°F)3. A sling shall be used that is long enough to provide the maximum practical angle

between the sling leg and the horizontal.4. Slings shall not be shortened with knots, bolts, or similar methods.5. Twisting and/or kinking the legs of a sling is prohibited.6. A sling shall not be loaded in excess of its rated capacity.7 The load shall be centered in the base (bowl) of the hook to prevent point loading.8. Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced to prevent slippage.9. A sling shall be padded or protected from edges, corners or protrusions.10. Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its load.11. Each sling shall be securely hitched to its load.12. The load shall be kept free to move before lifting and shall be kept clear of all

obstructions.13. Shock loading shall be avoided as sling may recoil and cause injury or death.

14. All personnel must stand clear of a suspended load.15. Don't pull sling from under load, the full weight of the load can damage the sling

and reduce performance.16. Nylon slings shall not be used where acid conditions exist.17 Polyester slings shall not be used where caustic conditions exist.18. Polyester and nylon slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 180

degrees F.19. Aluminum fittings shall not be used where caustic conditions exist.20. Damaged slings should be replaced not repaired.21. Avoid abrasive surfaces, don't drag slings on flooring or over equipment.22. If the red core markers of the webbing can be seen, the sling should be removed

from service.23. Prolonged exposure to ultra-violet light will degrade webbing and weaken sling.24. Use Common Sense: If a sling looks damaged or its rated capacities not known,

don't use it.25. Slings may recoil if load is unexpectedly released. The recoil may cause injury or

death.

SAFETY GUIDELINES FOR WEB SLING USE

LOADLEG FACTOR

ANGLE (Degrees)

90 1.00085 1.00380 1.01575 1.03570 1.06465 1.10360 1.15455 1.22050 1.30545 1.41440 1.55535 1.74330 2.000


ROPE BASKET WITH INCLINED SIDES EYE DIMENSIONSDIAMETER CHOKER

CODE NO. INCHES VERTICAL HITCH A B

ROPE BASKET WITH INCLINED SIDES EYE DIMENSIONSDIAMETER CHOKER

CODE NO. INCHES VERTICAL HITCH A B

RATED CAPACITIES TONS

RATED CAPACITIES TONS

140EE 1/4 .56 .41 1.1 .97 .79 .56 2 4516EE 5/16 .87 .64 1.7 1.5 1.2 .87 2-1/2 5380EE 3/8 1.2 .92 2.5 2.2 1.8 1.2 3 6716EE 7/16 1.7 1.2 3.4 2.9 2.4 1.7 3-1/2 7120EE 1/2 2.2 1.6 4.4 3.8 3.1 2.2 4 8916EE 9/16 2.8 2.0 5.5 4.8 3.9 2.8 4-1/2 9580EE 5/8 3.4 2.5 6.8 5.9 4.8 3.4 5 10340EE 3/4 4.9 3.6 9.7 8.4 6.9 4.9 6 12780EE 7/8 6.6 4.8 13. 11. 9.3 6.6 7 14100EE 1 8.5 6.3 17. 15. 12. 8.5 8 16118EE 1-1/8 10. 7.9 21. 18. 15. 10. 9 18

NOTE: Higher Ratings Available with EIPS Wire

6 X 19 IWRC IPS

In the flemish eye mechanical splice, rope is separated into two parts— 3 adjacent strands, and 3 adjacent strands and core.Theseare then re-laid back in opposite directions to form an eye and secured with pressed metal sleeve.

FLEMISH EYE SPLICE

SINGLE LEG WIRE ROPE SLING • MECHANICALLY SPLICED

114EE 1-1/4 13. 9.7 26. 22. 18. 13. 10 20138EE 1-3/8 15. 12. 31. 27. 22. 15. 11 22112EE 1-1/2 18. 14. 37. 32. 26. 18. 12 24158EE 1-5/8 21. 16. 43. 37. 30. 21. 13 26134EE 1-3/4 25. 19. 49. 43. 35. 25. 14 28200EE 2 32. 24. 64. 55. 45. 32. 16 32214EE 2-1/4 39. 30. 77. 67. 55. 39. 18 36212EE 2-1/2 47. 37. 94. 82. 67. 47. 20 40

NOTE: 1) Please specify length. 2) Larger sizes available. 3) Higher Ratings Available with EIPS Wire

6 X 37 IWRC IPS

All capacities in tons of 2,000 lbs. All eye dimensions in inches. Rated capacities basket hitch based on D/d Ratio of 25/1. Ratedcapacities based on pin diameter no larger than natural eye width or less than the nominal sling diameter. Rated capacities basedon design factor of 5. Sling angles less than 30 degrees from horizontal shall not be used.

A

B

LENGTH

VERTICALBASKET

VERTICALBASKET


TWO-LEG BRIDLEAngles measured from horizontal. Rated capacity for two-legged bridles, whether used as chokers or with hooks or other end fix-tures, are affected by rigging angles, the same as straight slings in basket hitches. Note reduction in rated capacity as legs spreadto wider lifting connections, or for unbalanced loads. For other applications contact us.

MULTIPLE LEG SLINGS

RATED CAPACITY (TON 2000 LBS.)ROPE RECOMMENDED

CODE NO. DIAMETER MINIMUM LENGTH

1402L 1/4 1’ 6” .97 .79 .565162L 5/16 1’ 8’ 1.5 1.2 .873802L 3/8 1’ 10” 2.2 1.8 1.27162L 7/16 2’ 4” 2.9 2.4 1.71202L 1/2 2’ 6” 3.8 3.1 2.29162L 9/16 2’ 10” 4.8 3.9 2.85802L 5/8 3’ 4” 5.9 4.8 3.43402L 3/4 3’ 8” 8.4 6.9 4.97802L 7/8 4’ 4” 11. 9.3 6.61002L 1 5’ 15. 12. 8.51182L 1-1/8 5’ 10” 18. 15. 10.1142L 1-1/4 6’ 6” 22. 18. 13.1382L 1-3/8 7’ 27. 22. 15.1122L 1-1/2 7’ 6” 32. 26. 18.1582L 1-5/8 9” 37. 30. 21.1342L 1-3/4 9’ 2” 43. 35. 25.2002L 2 12” 55. 45. 32.



THREE-LEG BRIDLEAngles measured from horizontal. Rated capacity for 3 and 4 legged bridles are based on equal load for each leg and the sling anglebeing the smallest angle measured between any sling leg and the horizontal plane of the load. For other applications, contact us.

PLEASE SPECIFY LENGTH

1403L 1/4 1’ 6” 1.5 1.2 .845163L 5/16 1’ 8’ 2.3 1.8 1.33803L 3/8 1’ 10” 3.2 2.6 1.97163L 7/16 2’ 4” 4.4 3.6 2.51203L 1/2 2’ 6” 5.7 4.6 3.39163L 9/16 2’ 10” 7.2 5.8 4.15803L 5/8 3’ 4” 8.8 7.2 5.13403L 3/4 3’ 8” 13. 10. 7.37803L 7/8 4’ 4” 17. 14. 9.91003L 1 5’ 22. 18. 13.1183L 1-1/8 5’ 10” 27. 22. 16.1143L 1-1/4 6’ 6” 33. 27. 19.1383L 1-3/8 7’ 40. 33. 23.1123L 1-1/2 7’ 6” 48. 39. 27.1583L 1-5/8 9” 55. 45. 32.1343L 1-3/4 9’ 2” 64. 52. 37.



FOUR-LEG BRIDLE (SEE 3-Leg Description)

1404L 1/4 1’ 6” 1.9 1.6 1.15164L 5/16 1’ 8’ 3.0 2.5 1.73804L 3/8 1’ 10” 4.3 3.5 2.57164L 7/16 2’ 4” 5.9 4.8 3.41204L 1/2 2’ 6” 7.6 6.2 4.49164L 9/16 2’ 10” 9.5 7.8 5.55804L 5/8 3’ 4” 12. 9.6 6.83404L 3/4 3’ 8” 17. 14. 9.77804L 7/8 4’ 4” 23. 19. 13.1004L 1 5’ 30. 24. 17.1184L 1-1/8 5’ 10” 36. 30. 21.1144L 1-1/4 6’ 6” 44. 36. 26.1384L 1-3/8 7’ 54. 44. 31.1124L 1-1/2 7’ 6” 63. 52. 37.

Reduce Rated Capacity for Unbalanced Loads


TH 380 — 3/8” .92TH120 LH 120 1/2” 1.6TH916 LH916 9/16” 2.0TH580 LH580 5/8” 2.5TH340 LH340 3/4” 3.6TH780 LH780 7/8” 4.8TH100 LH100 1” 6.3TH118 — 1-1/8” 7.9TH114 — 1-1/4” 9.7TH138 — 1-3/8” 12TH120 — 1-1/2” 14

AFTER SWAGE DIM., IN.CODE NO. WIRE ROPE DIAMETER LENGTH, L A B

USE WITH RATED DIMENSIONS, IN.CODE NO. CABLE CAPACITY TONS A B C D E F G

PC-3/4 3/4” 4.9 5-9/16 2 2-1/8 1-1/8 4-11/16 1-7/8 1-1/8PC-3/4 7/8” 4.9 5-9/16 2 2-1/8 1-1/8 4-11/16 1-7/8 1-1/8PC-1 1” 8.5 6 2-1/2 2-5/8 1-3/8 5-5/8 2 1-3/8PC-1 1-1/8” 8.5 6 2-1/2 2-5/8 1-3/8 5-5/8 2 1-3/8PC-1 1-1/4” 8.5 6 2-1/2 2-5/8 1-3/8 5-5/8 2 1-3/8PC-1-1/2 1-1/2” 15.0 8 3 3-1/4 1-5/8 7-5/8 3 1-5/8

TEA CUP PIPE CARRIER

LS-3/4 3/4” 5’ 0” STD 3.25 1.55LS-7/8 7/8” 5’ 0” STD 3.86 1.80LS-1 1” 5’ 0” STD 4.36 2.05LS-1-1/8” 1-1/*’ 5’ 0” STD 4.81 2.30LS-1-1/4” 1-1/4” 5’ 0” STD 5.42 2.56LS-1-1/2” 1-1/2” 5’ 0” STD 6.52 3.00

Loop, lifting end; Travelling Choker Hook,body; Loop, load end.

Loop, lifting end; Ferrule Choker Hook,body; Ferrule, load end.

An efficient way to handle concrete water and sewer pipes. The Caldwell Tea Cup Pipe Carrier will save you time and money. Withthree sizes available these “tea cups” will handle from 3/4” to 1-1/2” cable, and lifts up to 15 tons.

An efficient way to handle concrete water and sewer pipes. The Caldwell Tea Cup Pipe Carrier will save you time and money. Withthree sizes available these “tea cups” will handle from 3/4” to 1-1/2” cable, and lifts up to 15 tons.

CODE NO. CODE NO. WIRE DIAMETER CHOKER RWL TONS

PIPE CHOKERS TYPES TH AND LH

1.Drop pipe carrierlifting sling throughhole in pipe.

2.Align and insert“tea cup” pipecarrier into liftingsling.

3.Lift pipe.

TEA CUP SLINGS TYPE LS

TYPE TH TYPE LH TYPE LS

PIPE LIFTING SLINGS

SEE PAGE 41WELD-ON HOOKS

FOR BUCKETS


ROPE RATED CAPACITY PIN HOLECODE NO. CODE NO. CODE NO. DIA. TONS (XIP) DIA. DIA.

OSOS140 CSCS140 OSCS140 1/4” .69 .688 .75OSOS516 CSCS516 OSCS516 5/16” 1.05 .812 .875OSOS380 CSCS380 OSCS380 3/8” 1.50 .812 .875OSOS716 CSCS716 OSCS716 7/16” 2.04 1.00 1.063OSOS120 CSCS120 OSCS120 1/2” 2.66 1.00 1.063OSOS916 CSCS916 OSCS916 9/16” 3.36 1.19 1.25OSOS580 CSCS580 OSCS580 5/8” 4.12 1.19 1.25OSOS340 CSCS340 OSCS340 3/4” 5.88 1.38 1.438OSOS780 CSCS780 OSCS780 7/8” 7.96 1.63 1.688OSOS100 CSCS100 OSCS100 1” 10.34 2.00 2.063OSOS118 CSCS118 OSCS118 1-1/8” 13.00 2.25 2.313OSOS114 CSCS114 OSCS114 1-1/4” 15.98 2.50 2.563OSOS138 CSCS138 OSCS138 1-3/8” 19.20 2.50 2.563OSOS112 CSCS112 OSCS112 1-1/2” 22.80 2.75 2.813OSOS134 CSCS134 OSCS134 1-3/4” 30.60 3.50 3.563OSOS200 CSCS200 OSCS200 2” 39.60 3.75 3.813OSOS214 CSCS214 OSCS214 2-1/4” 49.40 4.25 4.312OSOS212 CSCS212 OSCS212 2-1/2” 60.40 4.25 4.312

SWAGED SOCKET ASSEMBLIES

SWAGED SOCKET ASSEMBLIES


TF3140 1/4” 1.7 1/2”TF3516 5/16” 2.6 5/8”TF3380 3/8” 3.6 3/4”TF3716 7/16” 4.9 7/8””TF3120 1/2” 6.4 1”TF3916 9/16” 8.0 1-1/8””TF3580 5/8” 9.9 1-1/4”TF3340 3/4” 14.0 1-1/2”TF3780 7/8” 19.0 1-3/4”TF3100 1 24.8 2”

TF3118 1-1/8” 31.2 2-1/4”TF3114 1-1/4” 38.4 2-1/2”TF3138 1-3/8” 46.0 2-3/4”TF3112 1-1/2” 55.0 3”TF3158 1-5/8” 63.4 3-1/4”TF3134 1-3/4” 73.0 3-1/2”TF3200 2” 95.0 4”TF3214 2-1/4” 118.0 4-1/2”TF3212 2-1/2” 145.0 5”

DIAMETER VERTICAL FINISHEDCODE NO. OF PARTS RATED LOAD DIAMETER


ONE TRI-FLEX® SLING - 3 PARTS EIP ROPEOne TRI-FLEX® SLING is a complete sling with 3 parts for flexibility.

TF9140 1/4” 4.6 1”TF9516 5/16” 7.0 1-1/4”TF9380 3/8” 10.0 1-1/2”TF9716 7/16” 13.8 1-3/4”TF9120 1/2” 18.0 2”TF9916 9/16” 22.7 2-1/4”TF9580 5/8” 27.8 2-1/2”TF9340 3/4” 39.7 3”TF9780 7/8” 53.7 3-1/2”TF9100 1 69.8 4”

TF9118 1-1/8” 87.7 4-1/2”TF9114 1-1/4” 108.0 5”TF9138 1-3/8” 130.0 5-1/2”TF9112 1-1/2” 154.0 6”TF9158 1-5/8” 178.0 6-1/2”TF9134 1-3/4” 206.0 7””TF9200 2” 267 0 8”TF9214 2-1/4” 333.0 9”TF9212 2-1/2” 408.0 10”



THREE TRI-FLEX® SLINGS - 9 PARTS EIP ROPE9-Part TRI-FLEX® SLINGS break down into three 3-part standard TRI-FLEX® SLINGS.

TF27140 1/4” 12.9 2”TF27516 5/16” 19.9 2-1/2”TF27380 3/8” 28.5 3”TF27716 7/16” 38.6 3-1/2”TF27120 1/2” 50.0 4”TF27916 9/16” 63.5 4-1/2”TF27580 5/8” 78.0 5”TF27340 3/4” 110.0 6”TF27780 7/8” 150.0 7”TF27100 1 195.0 8”

TF27118 1-1/8” 245.0 9”TF27114 1-1/4” 302.0 10”TF27138 1-3/8” 363.0 11”TF27112 1-1/2” 430.0 12”TF27158 1-5/8” 499.0 13”TF27134 1-3/4” 578.0 14”TF27200 2” 748.0 16”TF27214 2-1/4” 934.0 18”TF27212 2-1/2” 1140.0 20”



NINE TRI-FLEX® SLINGS - 27 PARTS EIP ROPE27-Part TRI-FLEX® SLINGS break down into three 9-part slings or nine 3-part slings.

The TRI-FLEX® SYSTEM allows the purchase of multiple part slings for big lifts which can easily be taken apart to provide slingsfor smaller lifts or for storage.

Gulf of Mexico—Offshore600 Tons

9-PartTri-Flex® Sling

This sling is the answer to a rigger’s prayer. It is both strong and lightweight. The TRI-FLEX® SLING can be used in choker, basket or vertical lifts. Owners like TRI-FLEX®

SLINGS because they give the most value for their sling dollar. In many cases TRI-FLEX® SLINGS are the lowest cost at initial investment and over the long haul are eas-ier to use and outlast most other types of wire rope slings.TRI-FLEX® SLINGS come in all sizes from stock up to 2-1/2” Dia. w/1140 Ton vertical capacity. And the big storyis flexibility—Three times more flexible than standard slings. Certified proof testing. Rated load with 5-1 factor. Rated load in tons.

ADVANCED TRI-FLEX® SLINGS


LARGE CAPACITY GATOR-MAX™ & GATOR-LAID©LARGE CAPACITY GATOR-MAX™ & GATOR-LAID©

GATOR-MAX™ WIRE ROPE SLING WITH PARALLEL EYES

US Patent #5,561,973 & Patents Pending

This is the strongest multi-part sling with great flexibility. It will develop its full strength on small pinswith a D/d ration of 1/1 where D is the sling body andd is the pin. (4/1 D/d when comparing the component

parts to the pin). For heavy lifting work this is the mostefficient wire rope sling that meets all of the standards.The eyes have the wire ropes (12) laid in parallel sothat there is no cross over and then they are wrappedwith heavy duty material to keep them in position. Thissling was developed to meet conditions specified bythe US Navy and the Wire Rope Technical Board SlingManual. Testing has proven it to be the strongest multi-part wire rope sling when attached to small pinsbecause it has twelve parts of wire rope in the loop ina parallel construction.

GATOR-LAID® WIRE ROPE SLINGUS Patent #4,240,659 & #5,561,973

This is identical to the Gator-Max™ sling with the parallel eyes except it has metal sleeves for the spliceconnection. This is the product when a big lift butshorter sling is required. It also has twelve parts ofwire rope in the loop. The Gator-Flex® andGator-Laid® products were developed in conjunctionwith the off shore oil industry to provide the world'sbest heavy lift wire rope slings.

GATOR-MAX™ & GATOR-LAID© SLINGSTECHNICAL CHART

FIN.DIA.

1/2”5/8”3/4”7/8”1”

1-1/4”1-1/2”1-3/4”

2”2-1/4”2-1/2”

3”3-1/2”

4”4-1/2”

5”5-1/2”

6”7”8”9”10”

COMPONENTPARTS

1/8”3/16”5/32”7/32”1/4”5/16”3/8”7/16”1/2”9/16”5/8”3/4”7/8”1”

1-1/8”1-1/4”1-3/8”1-1/2”1-3/4”

2”2-1/4”2-1/2”

STD.EYE SIZE

8”10”12”14”16”18”20”22”24”26”28”30”35”40”45”50”55”60”70”80”90”

100”

VERTICALRC TONS

1.41.82.73.74.87.4

10.514.019.024.029.042.056.074.092.0

113.0137.0162.0216.0280.0350.0428.0

CHOKERRC TONS

.951.42.02.73.65.57.9

11.014.019.022.031.042.055.069.085.0

102.0121.0162.0210.0261.0321.0

BASKETRC TONS

2.73.65.57.49.7

14.721.029.038.048.058.083.0

112.0146.0184.0227.0273.0323.0432.0560.0700.0856.0

WGT.PER FT.

.26

.40

.59

.77

.991.562.193.154.145.316.489.36

12.7816.6521.0626.0131.5037.4451.0366.5184.24

104.00

NOTE: Rated capacity is based on 5-1 Design Factor.NOTE: Rated Capacity is based on a 5-1 Design Factor. Basket Capacity is based on using a 5/1 D/d ratio where D is the finished

body diameter of the sling and d is the diameter of the load being put into the sling.


ANGLE OF CHOKE IN DEGREES RATED CAPACITY PERCENT

SLING USE AND SUGGESTIONS

OVER 120 10090 - 120 8760 - 89 7430 - 59 620 - 29 49

For wire rope slings in choker hitch when angle of choke is less than 120°. Percent of sling rated capacity in a choker hitch.

If a load is hanging free, the normal choke angle is approximately 135 degrees.When the angle is less than 135 degrees an adjust-ment in the sling rated capacity must be made. Choker hitches at angles greater than 135 degrees are not recommended sincethey are unstable. Extreme care should be taken to determine the angle of choke as accurately as possible.

In controlled tests, where the angle was less than 120 degrees, the sling body always failed at the point of choke when pulledto destruction. Allowance for this phenomenon must be made anytime a choker hitch is used to shift, turn or control a load, or whenthe pull is against the choke in a multi-leg lift.

Find Out: Weight of load, shape of load and its balance, how the load is to be lifted, size of the load, overhead room available, envi-ronmental conditions.

Suggested Proper Sling Based On: Rated load, sling type, kind of sling (Press-Grip, Cable-Laid, Hand-Braided, etc.), specialfittings (Links, hooks, thimbles, protectors, etc.). NOTE: Never exceed 30° angle from horizontal.

Precautions to Take: Use only for rated load, never “Shock” load, protect sling from sharp corners, never use sling if damagedor corroded, avoid dragging sling under or over loads, avoid dropping slings from heights, avoid rolling loads with slings, maintainslings by proper storage and lubrication, avoid extreme heat and corrosive atmospheres.

INSPECTION OF SLINGSHere are some things to look for when inspecting slings: Broken wires, with special attention to ferrules and fittings, condition ofthe ferrule, corrosion, kinks, abrasion, extreme eye elongation, crushed areas, slippage of strands from ferrule.

STORAGEWire rope slings should be stored in an area where they will not be damaged by: Moisture, extreme heat, corrosion (chemical),being run over by vehicular traffic, kinking.

OSHA SAYS1. Slings and their fittings and fastenings, when in use, shall be inspected daily for evidence of overloading, excessive wear,

or damage. Slings found to be defective shall be removed from service.2. A wire rope sling shall be retired if it develops ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or five broken wires in

one strand in one rope lay.3. Fiber core slings of all grades shall be permanently removed from service if they are exposed to temperatures in excess of

200°F. If steel core slings are submitted to temperatures in excess of 400°F or minus 60°F, the manufacturer shall be consulted.4. Suitable protection shall be provided between the sling and sharp, unyielding surfaces of the load to be lifted.

D/d RATIOSling eyes are designed to provide what amounts to “small inverted slings” at the ends of the sling body. Therefore, the width ofthe eye opening will be affected by the same general forces which apply to legs of a sling rigged as a basket.

A sling eye should never be used over a hook or pin with a body diameter larger than the natural width of the eye. Never forcean eye onto a hook.

On the other hand, the eye should always be used on a hook or pin with at least the nominal diameter of the rope—sinceapplying the D/d Ratio shows an efficiency loss of approximately 50% when the relationship is less than 1/1.

CHOKER HITCH RATED CAPACITY ADJUSTMENT

FOLLOW THESE TIPS FOR SAFE USE OF SLINGS


LEGANGLE LOAD

From Horizontal FACTOR

90 1.00085 1.00380 1.01575 1.03570 1.06465 1.10360 1.15455 1.22050 1.30545 1.41440 1.55535 1.74330 2.000

TABLE A

No precise rules can be given to determine the exact time a sling should be replaced since many variable factors are involved. Safetyin this respect depends largely upon the use of good judgment by an experienced person in evaluating remaining strength in a usedsling. Proper allowance must be made for deterioration as disclosed by inspection. The safety of an operating sling depends uponthis remaining strength.

Conditions such as the following should be sufficient reason for questioning safety of slings and for considering replacement:a. Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay.b. Wear or scraping of one-third the original diameter of outside individual wires.c. Kinking, crushing, birdcaging, or other damage resulting in distortion of the rope structure.d. Evidence of heat damage.e. End attachments that are cracked, deformed or worn.f. Hooks that have been open more than 15 percent of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point or twisted

more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.g. Corrosion or rope or end attachments.

As the included angle between the legs of a sling increases, the load on each leg increases. The effect is the same whether asingle sling is used as a basket, or two slings are used with each in a straight pull, as with a 2-legged bridle.

Anytime pull is exerted at an angle on a leg or legs of a sling, the load per leg can be determined by using the data in TableA. Proceed as follows to calculate this load and determine the rated capacity required of the sling or slings, needed for a lift.

1. First, divide the total load to be lifted by the number of legs to be used. This provides the load per leg if the lift were beingmade with all legs lifting vertically.

2. Determine the angle between the legs of the sling and the horizontal.3. Then MULTIPLY the load per leg (as computed in No. 1 above) by the Load Factor for the leg angle being used (from

Table A) - to compute the ACTUAL LOAD on each leg for this lift and angle. THE ACTUAL LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED THERATED SLING CAPACITY.

Thus, in drawing three (sling angle at 60°): 1000 – 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x 1.154 = 577 Ibs. = ACTUALLOAD on each leg at the 60° included angle being used.

In drawing four (sling angle of 45°): 1000 – 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x 1.414 = 707 Ibs. = ACTUAL LOADon each leg at the 45° horizontal angle being used.

REPLACEMENT

Whenever any sling is used, it is recommended that the following practices be observed:a. Slings that are unsafe should be destroyed.b. Slings should never be exposed to temperatures in excess of manufacturer’s recommendations.c. Use a sling that is long enough to provide the maximum practical horizontal angle.d. Slings should never be shortened with knots, bolts, or other methods.e. Care should be taken never to twist or kink the legs of a sling.

RECOMMENDED OPERATING PRACTICES

The horizontal angle of bridles with 3 or more legs is measured the same as the horizontal sling angle of 2-legged hitches. Inthis case where a bridle designed with different leg lengths results in horizontal angles, the leg with the smallest horizontal anglewill carry the greatest load. Therefore, the smallest horizontal angle is used in calculating actual leg load and evaluating therated capacity of the sling proposed.

ANGLES OF BRIDLES (DRAWING 6)

CALCULATING THE LOAD ON EACH LEG OF A SLING

It is vitally important to recognize and avoid possible abuses of wire rope slings. By law, the sling user is no longer permitted touse jury-rigged slings and short cuts that were accepted practice for many years. Some of these practices that should be avoidedare:

a. Tying knots in wire rope.b. Using “Home-made” fittings and attachments.c. Making slings from used operating rope.d. Use of any sling that is of questionable strength.

ABUSES

SLING SAFETY

(1) (2)

(3) (4) (5)

DRAWINGS 1-5

DRAWINGS 6

..

..


LIFTING BEAMSUP TO 40 TONS. MODEL 20

ROTATING BEAMSUP TO 50 TONS. MODEL 21

TWO HOIST LIFT BEAMSUP TO 40 TONS. MODEL 25

ADJUSTABLE BAIL LIFTING BEAMSUp to 20 tons. MODEL 26

THREE AND FOUR POINTLIFTING BEAMSUp to 50 tons. MODEL 27

FORK LIFT TRUCK LIFTING BEAMSUp to 50 tons. MODEL 10

BATTERY LIFTING BEAMSUp to 7000 Lbs. MODEL 76

FIXED SPREADER BEAMSUp to 40 tons. MODEL 30

ADJUSTABLE SPREADERSUp to 15 tons. MODEL 32

UNIVERSAL SPREADERSUp to 7 tons. MODEL 36

SPECIAL SPREADER SYSTEMSUp to 150 tons. MODEL 38

ADJUSTABLE BAIL LIFTING BEAMUp to 20 tons. MODEL 24

CALL FOR SPECIFICATION AND DETAIL SHEETS

CALDWELL LIFTING AND SPREADER BEAMS


PRESSURETONGS

GRIPPINGTONGS

SUPPORTINGTONGS

BAIL LIFTINGTONGS

DIE LIFTINGTONGS

MODEL BEF – SPREADER BEAM END FITTINGS

(shown fully assembled)

PRODUCT FEATURES:Applications for the Posi-Turner® are endless.Some common applications are:• Composite Molds• Fabrication & Assembly• Materials/Metal Handling• Machining• Die & Mold Maintenance• Assembly Line• Mold Production Removal• Inspection & Repair

Posi-Turner®Load Rotation Systems

PRODUCT FEATURES:• Build your own spreader beam.• Designed to work with a

range of shackle sizes,both top and bottom

• Conforms to ASMEB30.20 (when assem-bled to specifications).

Capacity In Tons FittingSpread (ft.) 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 15 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 Weight

BEF-2-1/2 7.5 7 6.5 5.5 4 2.9 2 1.8 - - - - - - - - - - - 8BEF-5 17 17 17 17 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 8 7 6 5 4.5 - - - 42BEF-8 39 39 39 39 39 38 36 36 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 16 15 144

SPECIAL LIFTING GEAR


CHAIN SINGLE DOUBLE LEG TRIPLE AND QUADCODE NO. SIZE IN. 90° 60° 45° 30° 60° 45° 30°

ACTUALMATERIAL INSIDE INSIDE LINKS POUNDS

TRADE SIZE DIAMETER, LENGTH, WIDTH, PER PER 100 WORKING LOAD LIMIT*CODE # INCHES MM INCHES INCHES INCHES FOOT FEET POUNDS KGS.

732G80 7/32 5 .218 0.69 0.30 17-1/2 43 2,100 950140G80 1/4 or 9/32 7 .276 0.86 0.40 13-3/4 70 3,500 1,590380G80 3/8 10 .394 1.22 0.55 10 142 7,100 3,200120G80 1/2 13 .512 1.57 0.75 7-3/4 244 12,000 5,400580G80 5/8 16 .630 1.93 0.87 6-1/2 356 18,100 8,200340G80 3/4 20 .787 2.44 1.02 5-1/2 562 28,300 12,800780G80 7/8 22 .881 2.45 1.22 5 750 34,200 15,500100G80 1 25 1.000 2.80 1.40 4-1/4 965 47,700 21600114G80 1-1/4 32 1.250 3 50 1.75 3-1/2 1,525 72,300 32 800112G80 1-1/2‡ 38 1.500 4.49 1.94 2-5/8 2,140 80,000 36,300

Dimensions and weights are approximate.‡Manufactured to System 6 specifications.•WARNING: Do not exceed Working Load Limit.

G-80 ALLOY CHAINSPECIFICATIONS

-140 1/4 or 9/32 3,500 6,100 4,900 3,500 9,100 7,400 5,200-380 3/8 7,100 12,300 10,000 7,100 18,400 15,100 10,600-120 1/2 12,000 20,800 17,000 12,000 31,200 25,500 18,000-580 5/8 18,100 31,300 25,600 18,100 47,000 38,400 27,100-340 3/4 28,300 49,000 40,000 28,300 73,500 60,000 42,400-780 7/8 34,200 59,200 48,400 34,200 88,900 72,500 51,300-100 1 47,700 82,600 67,400 47,700 123,900 101,200 71,500-114 1-1/4 72,300 125,200 102,200 72,300 187,800 153,400 108,400

*CAUTION Working Load Limits Should Not Be Exceeded.Add three letter prefix to code number.

G-80 Alloy steel chain is electrically welded alloy steelembodying the latest manufacturing technology. Alloyprovides a superior chain sling with high tensilestrength and excellent wear resistance. The minimumelongation at break test is 15%. The tensile strengthfollowing heat treatment exceeds all existing OSHA,Government, NACM, and ASTM specification require-ments. The G-80 chain and attachments used in fabri-cating chain slings offer a design factor of a minimumof 4 to 1 when used at recommended working loadlimits. This also meets NACM's System 8 working loadlimits, and is in line with the design factors required bythe International Standards Organization (ISO). Someusers, however, may elect to use the higher workingload limits with a design factor of 3.5 to 1. See index.

WORKING LOAD LIMITS OF GRADE 80 CHAIN SLINGS. (LBS).*

GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN

GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN SLINGS

Note: All data approximate and subject to variation.

NOTE: All AnglesMeasured from

Horizontal

PLEASE SELECT THE THREE LETTERPREFIX FROM SLINGS LIST ABOVE

AND ADD TO CODE # AT RIGHTTO SPECIFY A SLING.

EXAMPLE: DOS-380 X 10 FT.

See Safe Use Info Pages 42-43

Grade 100 Also Available


WORKING DIMENSIONS WEIGHTCODE NO. STYLE CHAIN SIZE LOAD LIMITS (LBS) L B E EACH (LBS)

545101 G-7/8-8 *1/4" 3,500 2.2 .71 .87 .4545102 G-10-8 3/8" 7,100 2.7 .99 1 .7545103 G-13-8 1/2" 12,000 3.5 1.1 1.3 1.5545104 G-16-8 5/8" 18,100 4.1 1.4 1.6 2.4545105 G-18/20-8 3/4" 28,300 4.9 1.7 1.9 4.0545106 G-22-8 7/8" 34,200 5.9 1.9 2.3 6.6545107 G-26-8 1" 47,700 6.3 2.3 2.4 10.1545109 G-32-8 1-1/4" 72,300 7.9 2.8 3.1 18.9

DESIGN FACTOR 4:1

ALLOY COUPLING LINKS

WORKING DIMENSIONS WEIGHTCODE NO. STYLE CHAIN SIZE LOAD LIMITS (LBS) L B H EACH (LBS)

512388 GKN-7/8-8 *1/4" 3,500 3.8 1.3 .87 1.1512390 GKN-10-8 3/8" 7,100 4.8 1.6 1.1 2.2512392 GKN-13-8 1/2" 12,000 5.8 1.9 1.4 4.4512394 GKN-16-8 5/8" 18,100 6.7 2.2 1.7 7.7

DESIGN FACTOR 4:1

SLING HOOKS WITH LATCH (CLEVIS TYPE)

WORKING DIMENSIONS WEIGHTCODE NO. STYLE CHAIN SIZE LOAD LIMITS (LBS) L B EACH (LBS)

512400 GG-7/8-8 *1/4" 3,500 2.2 .39 .6512410 GG-10-8 3/8" 7,100 3.1 .51 1.8512420 GG-13-8 1/2" 12,000 3.8 .63 3.3512430 GG-16-8 5/8" 18,100 4.9 .79 6.2

DESIGN FACTOR 4:1

CRADLE GRAB HOOKS (CLEVIS TYPE)

CODE G80 WORK LOAD WEIGHTFor Chain ALLOY 4:1 G80 ALLOY e b d1 d2 LB/PC.

7/32 XK 5.5 2100 3.58 1.33 .82 .31 .601/4 XK 7 3500 4.84 2.08 .94 .43 1.505/16 XK 8 4500 4.80 2.08 .94 .43 1.503/8 XK 10 7100 6.26 2.73 1.22 .55 2.701/2 XK 13 12000 8.03 3.62 1.53 .66 6.005/8 XK 16 18100 8.70 4.01 1.57 .78 8.80

For mounting into assemblies requiring a shortening capability. Can be used with any master link assembly.Compact and convenient fitting. Not for use in basket configurations.

CLEVIS Shortening Hook XK

LARGER HOOKS AND OTHER ATTACHMENTS PLUS GRADE 100 ARE ALSO AVAILABLE

*1/4” AND 9/32” ARE INTERCHANGEABLE

G

GKN

GG

GRADE 80 ALL0Y CHAIN SLING HARDWARE


TRADE WORKING DIMENSIONS WEIGHTSIZE LOAD LIMIT (INCHES) EACH

IN MM MODEL *(LBS.) L B D LBS.

3/8 11 0-6-8 3,000 3.9 2.4 .43 .41/2 14 0-86-8 4,920 4.7 2.8 .55 .95/8 17 0-108-8 6,600 5.5 3.2 .67 1.53/4 19 0-13-8 10,320 5.9 3.5 .75 2.27/8 22 0-1310-8 14,040 6.3 3.7 .87 3.31 25 0-16-8 24,360 7.5 4.3 .99 4.91-1/8 28 0-1613-8 27,000 7.1 4.1 1.1 6.01-1/4 30 0-19-8 35,160 7.9 4.7 1.2 7.71-3/8 34 0-2216-8 42,000 9.5 5.5 1.3 11.01-1/2 38 0-26-8 47,880 9.9 5.9 1.5 15.01-5/8 40 0-2619-8 60,600 9.9 5.9 1.6 18.01-3/4 45 0-3222-8 62,520 11.8 7.1 1.8 26.02 50 0-3626-8 97,680 11.8 7.9 2.0 33.02-1/4 55 0-4028-8 119,400 11.8 7.9 2.2 40.02-1/2 60 0-4532-8 147,300 13.8 7.9 2.4 55.02-3/4 70 0-100T-8 178,200 15.8 9.9 2.8 88.03-1/4 80 0-125T-8 262,200 15.8 9.9 3.2 117.0

*Design Factor 5:1 Proof tested and certified. WLL for Single Leg Sling.

OBLONG MASTER LINKS

TRADE FOR CHAIN SIZE WORKING WEIGHTSIZE (INCHES) MM LOAD LIMIT (LBS) DIMENSIONS (INCHES) EACH

3-LEG & 4-LEG 60˚ LBS.IN MM MODEL IN MM 4:1 L1 L B D l b d

3/4 19 OT-6-8 7/32 6 5,450 10.2 5.9 3.5 .75 4.3 2.4 .55 4.07/8 22 OT-8-8 9/32 7 9,100 11.8 6.3 3.7 .87 5.5 3.2 .67 6.21 25 OT-9-8 3/8 10 18,400 13.4 7.5 4.3 .98 5.9 3.5 .75 7.01-1/4 30 OT-10-8 1/2 13 31,200 14.2 7.9 4.7 1.2 6.3 3.7 .87 13.01-5/8 40 OT-13-8 5/8 16 47,000 16.9 9.9 5.9 1.6 7.1 4.1 1.1 29.02 50 OT-16-8 3/4 20 73,500 19.7 11.8 7.9 2.0 7.9 4.3 1.3 51.02-1/4 55 OT-19-8 7/8 22 88,900 22.0 11.8 7.9 2.2 10.2 5.5 1.5 70.02-1/2 60 OT-22-8 1 25 123,900 24.0 13.8 7.9 2.4 10.2 5.5 1.8 100.02-3/4 70 OT-26-8 1-1/4 32 187,800 26.8 15.8 9.9 2.8 11.0 6.3 2.0 150.03-1/4 80 OT-32-8 1-1/4 32 187,800 26.8 15.8 9.9 3.1 11.0 6.3 2.2 190.00

*Design Factor 4:1 Proof tested and certified.

OBLONG MASTER LINKS WITH SUB-ASSEMBLIES

GUNNEBO ALLOY MASTER LINKS

ADDITIONAL GUNNEBO PRODUCTS


GUNNEBO ALLOY HOOKS

CHAIN WORKING WEIGHTSIZE LOAD LIMIT DIMENSIONS INCHES EACH

CODE NO. IN POUNDS L B E F G H LBS.

BK-5/6-8 7/32 2,100 4.3 1.1 .87 .39 .55 .75 .9BK-7/8-8 9/32 3,500 5.4 1.4 .99 .43 .67 .91 1.6BK-10-8 3/8 7,100 6.6 1.7 1.3 .51 .98 1.1 3.3BK-13-8 1/2 12,000 8.2 2.1 1.6 .63 1.1 1.5 5.9BK-16-8 5/8 18,100 10.0 2.5 2.0 .79 1.5 1.9 12.0BK-18/20-8 3/4 28,300 11.4 2.7 2.4 .87 1.7 2.2 17BK-22-8 7/8 34,200 12.6 3.1 2.8 .95 1.9 2.4 25BK-26-8 1 47,700 13.6 3.9 3.1 1.0 2.0 2.7 32BK-28-8 1-1/8 55,100 15.8 4.7 3.5 1.1 2.4 3.2 48

SAFETY HOOKS EYE-TYPE

WORKING WEIGHTCHAIN LOAD LIMIT DIMENSIONS INCHES EACH

CODE NO. SIZE POUNDS L B G H LBS.

BKG-7/8-8 1/4* 3,500 4.7 1.4 .67 .91 1.7BKG-10-8 3/8 7,100 5.6 1.7 .98 1.1 3.3BKG-13-8 1/2 12,000 7.1 2.1 1.1 1.5 6.2BKG-16-8 5/8 18,100 8.5 2.5 1.5 1.9 11.0

SAFETY HOOK CLEVIS TYPE


CODE NO. SIZE POUNDS L B K G H LBS.

BKH-5/6-8 7,32, 1/4 2,100 5.8 1.1 .35 .55 .75 1.6

SAFETY HOOK CLEVIS BALL BEARING SWIVEL TYPE


CODE NO. SIZE POUNDS L B D E F G H LBS.

BKB-10-8 3/8 7,100 6.7 1.5 2.8 1.3 .5 1.3 1.7 5.3

SAFETY HOOK EYE-TYPE FOR WEB SLINGS


MODEL IN POUNDS L B K S LBS.

SKR-7/8-8 9/32 3,500 1.4 1.6 .71 .95 .4SKR-10-8 3/8 7,100 1.7 1.9 .95 1.1 .8SKR-13-8 1/2 12,000 2.0 2.1 1.1 1.4 1.4SKR-16-8 5/8 18,100 2.4 2.6 1.4 1.7 2.6SKR-18/20-8 3/4 28,300 2.8 3.2 1.7 2.0 4.2SKR-22-8 7/8 34,200 4.3 4.9 1.9 2.7 10.6SKR-26-8 1 47,700 5.1 5.9 2.3 3.4 18.7


WEB ROUND SLING CONNECTOR

Replacement hook for manual/electric chain hosts.


MODEL IN POUNDS L B C E F G H LBS.

BKL-5/6-8 7/32 2,100 5.8 1.1 .87 1.3 .43 .55 .75 1.5BKL-7/8-8 9/32 3,500 7.2 1.4 1.1 1.4 .47 .67 .91 2.4BLK-10-8 3/8 7,100 8.5 1.7 1.3 1.6 .59 .99 1.1 4.2BKL-13-8 1/2 12,000 10.9 2.1 1.6 1.9 .75 1.1 1.5 8.4BKL-16-8 5/8 18,100 13.2 2.5 2.0 2.4 .87 1.5 1.9 15.9BKLK-18/20-8 3/4 28,300 14.5 2.7 1.7 2.3 2.2 2.9 1.0 23.8


SAFETY HOOKSWITH BALL BEARINGS (SWIVEL EYE TYPE)Hooks swivel 360° under full load.

WORKING WEIGHTLOAD LIMIT DIMENSIONS INCHES EACH

MODEL *(TONS) B C G H K L S a LBS.

UKN-0.75** 0.75 .79 2.2 .51 .79 .75 3.2 .20 .12 .6UKN-1** 1.0 .83 2.8 .67 .99 .99 3.7 .24 .16 1.2UKN-2** 2.0 4.5 1.0 .79 3.4 1.2 .20 1.2 .32 2.2UKN-3 3.0 1.1 4.1 .91 1.2 1.4 5.2 .39 .24 2.2UKN-4 4.0 1.1 4.4 1.1 1.5 1.7 5.5 .43 .28 4.2UKN-5 5.0 1.3 5.1 1.2 1.8 1.8 1.5 .47 .32 6.5UKN-4 8.0 1.3 5.2 1.5 2.0 2.0 6.8 .51 .35 8.2UKN-10 10.0 1.9 6.6 1.7 2.3 2.2 8.7 .55 .35 11.0SHB-14 14.0 2.0 8.8 1.7 2.4 2.4 8.3 .79 .31 19.0

ALLOY WELD-ON HOOKS

*1/4” AND 9/32” ARE INTERCHANGEABLE

*Design Factor 5:1 Proof tested and certified. **Welding plate on UKN-0.75, UKN-2, andUKN-1 is slightly curved. Baseplate SHB-14 is 1024C steel (use electrode AWS/ASTME7018-1, ISO E51 5 B120 20H).Welding is to be done by a qualified welder. Hook latch is alloy.


MINIMUMALLOWABLE

ACTUAL DIAMETERSIZE STOCK AT WORN

CHAIN SIZE DIAMETER PORTION OFINCHES MM NEW, INCHES LINK, INCHES

7/32 5 .218 .1729/32 7 .276 .2343/8 10 .394 .2961/2 13 .512 .3915/8 16 .630 .4843/4 20 .787 .5947/8 22 .881 .7031 25 1.000 .8131-1/4 32 1.250 1.0001-1/2 38 1.500 1.187

WHILE HEATED, APPLY AFTER COOLING,FOLLOWING PERMANENTREDUCTIONS REDUCTION

TEMP. OF TO WORKING TO WORKINGCHAIN LOAD LIMIT LOAD LIMIT

400°F 10% 10%500°F 10% 10%600'F 20% 10%700°F 25% 10%800°F 45% 10%900°F 55% 15%1000°F 60% 20%

1. Determine the maximum load to be lifted.

2. Refer to the following pages and choose the proper type of chain sling (single, double, etc.) dictated by the size, shape and weight of the load.

3. Estimate the approximate angle between a leg of the sling and the load during operation.

4. Select the proper attachments (hooks and master links) for your chain sling.

5. Determine the overall reach from bearing point on master link to bearing point on attachment.

6. Refer to the Working Load Limit Chart and to your pre-determined angle of the type sling you have selected.

7. Choose the chain size which meets your requirements.

8. When entering your order be sure you give complete information as to the size, reach and attachments required.

Note: Angle to the load on multiple leg slings will be 60° or greater as long as the distance between lifting eyes ofload is not greater than reach shown on identification tag.

HOW TO ORDER CHAIN SLINGS

Sling chains are designed and built for rugged lasting service. As with any quali-ty product, however, certain precautions and standards of treatment should beobserved. In order to maximize useful service life, the following cautions and pro-cedures should be noted and followed.

To maximize life expectancy, A CONTINUAL INSPECTION PROGRAM MUST BEUNDERTAKEN. (We offers a variety of printed material outlining inspection pro-cedures and delineating working load limits, as well as technical bulletins andrecord keeping forms).

SLINGS AND ASSEMBLIES MUST NEVER BE USED ABOVE THE WORKINGLOAD LIMIT. Overloading causes stretching and reduction in the material diam-eter of the links. Stretched chain must be removed from service. Refer to thecharts in this catalog for individual working load limits.

Do not rest load on chain.

Inspect load at contact with hooks to be sure the load is properly seated withinthroat opening.

Balance the load. Unbalanced loads can put too much stress on one leg of mul-tiple chain slings.

Never bounce or jerk load when lowering or lifting.

Never force or hammer hooks or chain into position

Store chain slings in a clean dry area, preferably by hanging on racks or wallsrather than placing slings on floors where they are subject to abuse.

Never anneal alloy slings. Return sling to factory for proper repair procedures.

Do not use in acid solutions. Consult manufacturer for recommendations.

Clean chain slings regularly as dirt and grit can cause wear at link bearing points.

A link-by-link inspection will afford an opportunity to discover deep gouges, dis-tortion, spread in the throat opening of hooks and damage to master links andcoupling links. An inspection can also detect elongation of the legs themselves(i.e., reach) and should also include a link-by-link inspection to uncover individuallink wear. Note the Cam-Alloy MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LINK DIAMETER CHARTon this page.

WARNING: When using Cam-Alloy chain slings under conditions where high temperaturesexist, note the HEAT INDUCED REDUCTIONS in WORKING LOAD LIMIT CHART below.When alloy chain is subjected to heat, the working load limit is reduced due to temperembrittlement Consult manufacturer for recommendations

INSPECTION, CARE AND PROPER USE OF CHAIN SLINGS


MASTER LINK SIZE Should fit easily overlifting or crane hook

MASTER LINKWEAR POINTSExaggerated foremphasis.

MASTER LINK WIDTHMust not permit link todistort when load isapplied. Space mustnot exceed diameter ofmaterial size of themaster link.

LINK STRESSPOINTSWhere breaks aremost likely to occur.

FREEZE POINTS ONDEFORMED LINKWhere worn chaindeforms and binds.

DRAG WEARMetal has beenremoved by abrasion.

GOUGESDepending on severi-ty and location, nicksand gouges aregrounds for removalof a chain from serv-ice. These cases mustbe evaluated individu-ally.

15%Throat

Enlargement

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLEBENDING OF HOOKS

HOOK EYEDAMAGE

If no-Go Gauge fits over any part of any link, loss ofmetal or diameter reduction is indicated, and chainshould be removed from service.

Twisted, Bent orElongated Links in achain indicate exces-sive loading or abuse,and are cause forremoval from service.

HOW LIFTINGANGLES REDUCEWORKING LOADLIMITS OF SLINGS

ALLOY CHAIN SLING INSPECTION TIPS


SLINGMAX CHAIN SLING SADDLE RINGS


WIRE MESH RATED CAPACITY (LBS.)CODE NO. WIDTH (IN.) VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET

SPECIALTY SLINGS WITH PARTICULAR PROPERTIES AND USES

WM102 2 2,300 2,300 4,600WM103 3 3,500 3,500 7,000WM104 4 4,800 4,800 9,600WM106 6 7,200 7,200 14,400WM108 8 9,600 9,600 19,200WM1010 10 12,000 12,000 24,000WM1012 12 14,400 14,400 28,800WM1014 14 16,800 16,800 33,600WM1016 16 19,200 19,200 38,400WM1018 18 21,600 21,600 43,200WM1020 20 24,000 24,000 48,000

Widely used in metalworking shops and steel warehouses where loads are abrasive, hot or tend to cut web slings.

FEATURES, ADVANTAGES AND BENEFITSPromotes safety: Steel construction resists abrasion and cutting. Each sling permanently stamped with capacity and serial num-ber. Good flexibility—grips load’s contours. Each sling proof tested and certified. Saves money: Grips load firmly without stretch-ing—reduces load damage. Resists abrasion and cutting for greater sling life. Low stretch and flexibility reduce load damage. Widebearing area distributes load to help avoid load damage. Repairable—thus very cost effective. Alloy steel end fittings—plated forlong life. Wire mesh is zinc plated—resists corrosion. Saves time: Width of mesh helps control and balance load. End fittings fitmost large crane hooks.

ROUGHNECK WIRE MESH SLING CONSTRUCTIONStandard Construction: Alloy steel end fittings, zinc plated. Mesh is galvanized high tensile steel. 10 gage is standard, 12 gage isavailable upon request.

Optional Construction: Stainless steel mesh is available for corrosive and hotter environments.

INSPECTION CRITERIA FOR ROUGHNECK WIRE MESH SLINGSRemove the sling from service if any of the following is visible: A broken weld or braized joint along the sling edge. A broken wirein any part of the mesh. Reduction in wire diameter of 25% due to abrasion or 15% due to corrosion. Lack of flexibility due to dis-tortion of the mesh. Visible distortion or wear of either end fitting. Cracked end fitting.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS

10 GAGE—HEAVY DUTY

Wire mesh slings shall not be used at temperatures above 550°F. Store in a clean, dry area to avoid corrosive action.

This single 4” wide mesh sling in a choker hitch atload center of gravity provides adequate stabilityfor many structural steel loads.

Sling capacity rating decreases as the angle from horizontal decreases. We do not recommend using at angles of less than 30°.See “Effect of Angle of Lift” on page 9 Do not exceed rated capacities. Ratings must be reduced when slings are used at anglesof less than 90° from horizontal. WARNING

WIRE MESH SLINGS


6 X 25 CLASSIFICATION

Because of emphasis on fatigue resistance the problem of choice within the 6 x 37 Classification is greatly reduced. Althoughthere are exceptions, the constructions in the 6 x 37 Classification are primarily designed to be the most efficient for each ropediameter. As the rope size increases, for instance, a large number of wires can be used to achieve required fatigue resistance andstill those wires will be large enough to offer adequate resistance to abrasion. In sizes over two inches, the 6 x 49 SWS construc-tion is normally used. In smaller sizes, however, the outer wires in the 6 x 49 SWS would be so small that their resistance to abra-sion would be lowered.

It should be noted that the greater number of wires make the 6 x 37 classification more susceptible to crushing. This, howev-er, can frequently be overcome by an independent wire rope core and by the use of well designed sheaves and grooved drums.

Most wire ropes with six round strands and with 16 through 26 wires per strand are included in the he 6 x 19 Classification.The 6 x 37 Classification includes most 6-strand, round strand ropes having 27 to 49 wires per strand. Although their physi-cal characteristics may vary widely, all have the same weight per foot and the same nominal strength, size-for-size.

While 6 x 19 ropes give primary emphasis to abrasion resistance in varying degrees, the 6 x 37 ropes are important forfatigue resistance. This fatigue resistance is made possible by the greater number of wires per strand.

The 6 x 19 Seale has outer wires larger than 6 x 21 FW, 6 x 25 FW or 6 x 26 WS, and therefore its resistance to abrasion isincreased but its fatigue resistance is decreased; it is a good rope to withstand abrasion or crushing on the drum.

Outer wires of 6 x 21 FW are larger and fewer than those of 6 x 25 FW, which means better resistance to abrasion but some-what less resistance to bending fatigue, making it a good choice where abrasive wear is accompanied by moderate bending.

A 6 x 25 FW has good balance between resistance to abrasion and fatigue resistance, and is often considered the “work horse”of wire ropes, used for more purposes than any other construction.

The 6 x 26 WS is a compact construction with solid support for the wires, hence it has a high resistance to crushing.Resistance.to abrasion is the same as 6 x 21 FW. Number and relative size of inner wires add to stability of strands, and givefatigue resistance comparable to 6 x 25 FW. It is a good choice where both abrasion resistance and fatigue resistance are required.

6 X 37 CLASSIFICATION

6 X 25 AND 6 X 37 CLASS ROPES GENERAL INFORMATION

PRO D U CTS

BAIRSTO

WLIFTING


NOMINAL STRENGTH@ IN TONS OF 2000 POUNDS6 x 25 6 X 37 EXTRA IMPROVED APPROXIMATE WEIGHTCLASS CLASS DIAMETER PLOW STEEL PER FOOT IN POUNDSCODE NO. CODE NO. IN INCHES IWRC IWRC

140AAR — 1/4* 3.40 .116516AAR — 5/16* 5.27 .18380AAR — 3/8* 7.55 .26716AAR 716BAR 7/16 10.2 .35120AAR 120BAR 1/2 13.3 .46916AAR 916BAR 9/16 16.8 .59580AAR 580BAR 5/8 20.6 .72340AAR 340BAR 3/4 29.4 1.04780AAR 780BAR 7/8 39.8 1.42100AAR 100BAR 1 51.7 1.85118AAR 118BAR 1-1/8 65.0 2.34114AAR 114BAR 1-1/4 79.9 2.89138AAR 138BAR 1-3/8 96. 3.50112AAR 112BAR 1-1/2 114. 4.16158AAR 158BAR 1-5/8 132. 4.38134AAR 134BAR 1-3/4 153. 5.67178AAR 178BAR 1-7/8 174. 6.50200AAR 200BAR 2 198. 7.39218AAR 218BAR 2-1/8 221. 8.35214AAR 214BAR 2-1/4 247. 9.36238AAR 238BAR 2-3/8 274. 10.4212AAR 212BAR 2-1/2 302. 11.6258AAR 258BAR 2-5/8 331. 12.8234AAR 234BAR 2-3/4 361. 14.0278AAR 278BAR 2-7/8 392. 15.3300AAR 300BAR 3 425. 16.6318AAR 318BAR 3-1/8 458. 18.0314AAR 314BAR 3-1/4 492. 19.5338AAR 338BAR 3-3/8 529. 21.0312AAR 312BAR 3-1/2 564. 22.6358AAR 358BAR 3-5/8 602. 24.3334AAR 334BAR 3-3/4 641. 26.0378AAR 378BAR 3-7/8 680. 27.7400AAR 400BAR 4 720. 29.6418AAR 418BAR 4-1/8 757. 31.7414AAR 414BAR 4-1/4 799. 33.3438AAR 438BAR 4-3/8 844. 35.4

NOMINAL STRENGTH@ IN TONS OF 2000 POUNDSEXTRA IMPROVED APPROXIMATE WEIGHT

DIAMETER PLOW STEEL PER FOOT IN POUNDSCODE NO. IN INCHES IWRC IWRC

140BAR 1/4* 3.20 .116516BAR 5/16* 4.98 .18380BAR 3/8* 7.14 .26

@Available galvanized at 10% lower strengths, or in equivalent strengths on special request.

STANDARD ROPES

Ropes in these diameters are made with Multiple Operation Strands, and have the Nominal Strengths and Weights shown in thisTable.

Nominal strengths and weights— 6 x 25 Class and 6 x 37 Class

SMALL DIAMETER 6 X 37 CLASSIFICATION

NOTE: SEE SAFETY AND TECHNICALINFORMATION ON PAGES 50-63

WIRE ROPE STRENGTHS AND WEIGHTS

GalvanizedStainless Steel

and Special

ConstructionsAvailable

on Request

1/16" - 3/8"Aircraft Cablein Galvanized

Stainlessor Vinyl Coated

Seepages 64-65


NOMINAL STRENGTH*APPROX. WEIGHT IN TONS OF 2000 POUNDS

DIAMETER PER FOOT IMPROVED EXTRA IMPROVEDCODE NO. IN INCHES IN POUNDS PLOW STEEL PLOW STEEL

316NON 3/16 .064 1.42 1.57140NON 1/4 .113 2.51 2.77516NON 5/16 .177 3.90 4.30380NON 3/8 .25 5.59 6.15716NON 7/16 .35 7.58 8.33120NON 1/2 .45 9.85 10.8916NON 9/16 .58 12.4 13.6580NON 5/8 .71 15.3 16.8340NON 3/4 1.02 21.8 24.0780NON 7/8 1.39 29.5 32.5100NON 1 1.82 38.3 42.2118NON 1-1/8 2.30 48.2 53.1114NON 1-1/4 2.83 59.2 65.1138NON 1-3/8 3.43 71.3 78.4112NON 1-1/2 4.08 84.4 92.8

*These strengths apply only when a test is conducted with both ends fixed. When in use the strength of theseropes may be significantly reduced if one end is free to rotate.

In an application where a single part hoist rope is used to lift a free load, or where rotation resistant properties are essential forrope performance, a 19 x 7 rope can be used. The rotation resistant characteristic of 19 x 7 rope is achieved by laying six strandsaround a core strand in one direction, and then laying 12 strands around the first operation in the opposite direction. Thus, whenthe rope is in tension, opposing rotational forces are created between the inner and outer layers.

Ropes of 19 x 7 construction require special handling, selection and usage considerations, due to their construction. They aresusceptible to kinking, crushing and unbalancing in the form of "core pops" and “birdcages". Extreme care must be taken to avoidoperational practices which can lead to these conditions.

In addition, frequent, regular inspection for broken wires is critical when using 19 x 7. By design, the 19 x 7 construction hasa relatively low reserve strength. This can result in short service life between the point in time when the broken wire report crite-ria are met and when actual rope fracture occurs.

19 X 7 ROPE

19 X 7 ROTATION RESISTANT AND 8 X 25 SPIN RESISTANT

NOMINAL STRENGTH*APPROX. WEIGHT IN TONS OF 2000 POUNDS

DIAMETER PER FOOT IMPROVED EXTRA IMPROVEDCODE NO. IN INCHES IN POUNDS PLOW STEEL PLOW STEEL

516SPIN 5/16 .18 4.01 4.63380SPIN 3/8 .26 5.76 6.63716SPIN 7/16 .36 7.80 8.97120SPIN 1/2 .47 10.1 11.6916SPIN 9/16 .60 12.8 14.7580SPIN 5/8 .73 15.7 18.1340SPIN 3/4 1.06 22.5 25.9780SPIN 7/8 1.44 30.5 35.0100SPIN 1 1.88 39.6 45.5118SPIN 1-1/8 2.39 49.8 57.3114SPIN 1-1/4 2.94 61.3 70.5138SPIN 1-3/8 3.56 73.8 84.9112SPIN 1-1/2 4.24 87.3 100.

*These strengths apply only when a test is conducted with both ends fixed. When in use the strength of theseropes may be significantly reduced if one end is free to rotate.

In a multi-part wire rope system where the blocks have a tendency to twist, or for a single part hoist line which does not requirethe degree of rotation resistant properties found in a 19 x 7 rope, the 8 x 25 Resistwist rope has found successful application. Therotation resistant characteristic is achieved by laying the eight outer strands around an independent wire rope core so thesestrands are in the opposite direction to the lay of the core. Thus, when the rope is in tension, opposing rotational forces are creat-ed between core and outer strands.

In addition to 8 x 25 Resistwist ropes being more stable than 19 x 7 ropes, several other advantages exist. The 8 x 25Resistwist has increased resistance to bending fatigue and crushing on drums and sheaves. This is achieved through the use of8-strand construction with an independent wire rope core.

As with any application where the type of rope on an installation is changed, an 8 x 25 Resistwist rope should be substitutedonly after carefully comparing specifications and strength requirements.

8 X 25 ROPE


SURELIFT DY-PAC® 6 AND CUSHION™ 6DY-PAC® 6 ROPES FOR CRANE AND WINCHING APPLICATIONSBacked by over a century of rope-making experience, Wire Rope Industries offers a series of specialized Surelift products and services to meet theincreasingly demanding requirements of crane and winching equipment. Tested and designed for superior performance and value, our Surelift lineincludes high performance products such as Dy-Pac 6.DY-PAC® 6 INCREASES ROPE PERFORMANCE: A proven 6x25/31 IWRC construction and specially selected wire tensiles createropes that have the most suitable characteristics for Dy-Pac enhancement and rope performance. The Dy-Pac strand compaction process increasesthe steel area of the individual strands to produce a rope with greater strength, increased lifting capacity. A greater steel area in the rope results inhigher crush resistance and significantly enhanced drum spooling. A smooth outer strand profile improves rope wear resistance, reduces sheave anddrum wear. Greater contact area between each strand reduces inter strand nicking and increases flexibility under load fatigue life and performance.Specially formulated lubrication increases rope performance, reduces corrosion and minimizes environmental impact due to fly-off. Well marked coretracers make it easy to identify Dy-Pac 6 high performance ropes. Full technical support allows WRI customers to make the correct Dy-Pac ropeselection, obtain the relevant installation, inspection and maintenance procedures, and receive the necessary training.DY-PAC® 6 REDUCES OPERATING COSTS & INCREASES PROFITS: Reduced overall operating costs as a result of signifi-cantly enhanced rope performance. Reduced equipment downtime as a result of fewer rope change-outs. Lower equipment maintenance costs as aresult of reduced sheave and drum wear. Lower inventory costs as a result of reduced purchase requirements. For more information on Dy-Pac 6 orany other high performance Surelift products, please contact your local Wire Rope representative.

DIAMETER ROPE APPROX. WEIGHT NOMINAL BREAKINGCODE NO. INCHES (MM) CONSTRUCTION LBS./FT/ (KG/M) LOAD TONS (kN)

DP380AAR 3/8 (10) 6 X 19 RRL Dy-Pac 0.30 (0.44) 9.1 (81)DP716AAR 7/16 (11) 6 x 25 RRL Dy-Pac 0.39 (0.58) 11.6 (103)DP120AAR 1/2 (13) 6 x 25 RRL Dy-Pac 0.51 (0.76) 14.1 (134)DP916AAR 9/16 (14) 6 x 25 RRL Dy-Pac 0.64 (0.95) 19.1 (170)DP580AAR 5/8 (16) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac 0.79 (1.18) 23.5 (209)DP340AAR 3/4 (19) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac 1.14 (1.70) 32.5 (289)DP780AAR 7/8 (22) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac 1.54 (2.29) 44.0 (391)DP100AAR 1 (25) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac 2.01 (2.99) 57.6 (512)DP118AAR 1-1/8 (29) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac 2.54 (3.80) 72.7 (647)DP114AAR 1-1/4 (32) 6 x 32 RRL Dy-Pac 3.07 (4.57) 88.0 (783)DP138AAR 1-3/8 (35) 6 x 31 RRL Dy-Pac 3.67 (5.46) 107.8 (959)DP112AAR 1-1/2 (38) 6 x 31 RRL Dy-Pac 4.55 (6.77) 131.3 (1169)

Breaking load values are subject to a minus tolerance of 2.5%.

DY-PAC® 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE ROPES WEIGHTS AND BREAKING LOADS

CUSHION™ 6 ROPES FOR CRANE APPLICATIONSBacked by over a century of rope-making experience, Wire Rope Industries offers a series of specialized Surelift products and services to meet theincreasingly demanding requirements of crane hoisting applications. Designed and tested for superior performance and value, our Surelift line includestop performers such as Cushion 6 ropes.CUSHION™ 6 INCREASES ROPE PERFORMANCE: A well-proven 6x26/36 IWRC rope, specially designed for plastic enhance-ment, provides an excellent performance/strength combination. WRI’s exclusive plastic enhancement process maximizes impregnation that cushionsand separates the rope strands from the steel core. This creates a more balanced rope in which stress is evenly distributed and inter-strand nicking isvirtually eliminated resulting in improved performance and better resistance to shock loading. Full plastic enhancement significantly reduces stretchand minimizes drum crushing which improves performance and reduces downtime. Full rope cushioning minimizes moisture and contaminant pene-tration reducing internal abrasion and corrosion. A completely round outer rope profile maximizes the contact area between the rope and the equip-ment, enhancing rope wear resistance and significantly reducing sheave and drum wear. Specially formulated lubrication provides protection for indi-vidual wires, reducing friction and maintaining freedom of movement between the wires and the plastic. External markings on the rope make it easyto identify Cushion 6 high performance ropes. Full technical support allows WRI customers to make the correct Cushion rope selection, obtain the rel-evant installation, inspection and maintenance procedures, and receive the necessary training.CUSHION™ 6 REDUCES OPERATING COSTS & INCREASES PROFITS: Reduced overall operating costs as a result of sig-nificantly enhanced rope performance and trouble free operation. Lower equipment maintenance costs as a result of reduced sheave and drum wear.Lower inventory costs as a result of reduced purchase requirements. For more information on Cushion 6 or any other high performance Surelift prod-ucts, please contact your local Wire Rope representative.

DIAMETER ROPE APPROX. WEIGHT NOMINAL BREAKINGCODE NO. INCHES (MM) CONSTRUCTION LBS./FT/ (KG/M) LOAD TONS (kN)

CU380AAR 3/8 (10) 6 x 19 RRL Cushion Rope 0.26 (0.38) 6.6 (59)CU716AAR 7/16 (11) 6 x 19 RRL Cushion Rope 0.35 (0.52) 9.0 (81)CU120AAR 1/2 (13) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope 0.45 (0.67) 11.7 (104)CU916AAR 9/16 (14) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope 0.58 (0.86) 15.0 (133)CU580AAR 5/8 (16) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope 0.72 (1.07) 18.6 (165)CU340AAR 3/4 (19) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope 1.02 (1.51) 26.3 (234)CU780AAR 7/8 (22) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope 1.41 (2.09) 36.4 (324)CU100AAR 1 (25) 6 x 26 RRL Cushion Rope 1.82 (2.71) 47.1 (419)CU118AAR 1-1/8 (29) 6 x 36 RRL Cushion Rope 2.18 (3.24) 57.2 (510)CU114AAR 1-1/4 (32) 6 x 36 RRL Cushion Rope 2.88 (4.29) 69.6 (663)CU138AAR 1-3/8 (35) 6 x 36 RRL Cushion Rope 3.52 (5.24) 85.7 (763)CU112AAR 1-1/2 (38) 6 x 36 RRL Cushion Rope 4.18 (6.21) 101.5 (904)

Breaking load values are subject to a minus tolerance of 2.5%.

CUSHION™ 6 HIGH PERFORMANCE ROPES WEIGHTS AND BREAKING LOADS


USE CONSTRUCTION LAY CORE

Main Hoist Rope 6 x 25 FW, Cushion 6 Reg IWRCor 6 x 31 FW Reg IWRC

Jib Hoist—Single Part Line 18 x 7 (19 x 7) Dy-Pac 18 Reg IWRCRotation Resistant Reg FC or IWRC

Jib Hoist or Whipline—Two Part Line 6 x 25 FW Reg IWRCBoom Hoist 6 x 25 FW Lang IWRC

DyPac 6 x 25 FW Lang IWRCCusion Pac-8 6 x 25 FW Lang IWRC

Jib Front and Back Stays 6 x 36 WS Reg IWRCPendants 6 x 36 WS Reg IWRCTagline 6 x 36 WS Reg IWRC

MOBILE CRANENOTE: These are general recommendations, consult crane manufacturer for correct specifications.

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT APPLICATION


CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT APPLICATION


Hoist Rope7/8” and Smaller 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS Lang or Reg. IWRC1” and Larger 6 x 41 F.W. or 6 x 49 SWS

Dy-Pac 6 Reg. IWRCor 6 x 55 SWS Lang IWRC

Shovel Crowd and Retract7/8” and Smaller 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS Lang IWRC1” and Larger 6 x 41 F.W. or 6 x 49 SWS


Shovel Trip Line 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS Reg. IWRCBoom Hoist Rope 6 x 25 F.W. or Reg. IWRC

Dy-Pac 6 Reg. IWRC6 x 30 Flattened Strand Lang IWRC

SHOVELF.W.—Filler Wire; WS—Warrington Seale; SWS—Seale Warrington Seale.All ropes can be furnished in Powersteel or Yellow Strand.


Closing and Holding Lines 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS Lang or Reg. IWRCDy-Pac 6 Reg. IWRC6 x 30 Flattened Strand Lang or F.C.

Boom Hoist Rope 6 x 25 F.W. Reg. IWRCDy-Pac 6 Reg. IWRC6 x 30 Flattened Strand Lang IWRC

Tag Line 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS Reg. IWRC

CLAMSHELLF.W.—Filler Wire; WS—Warrington Seale; SWS—Seale Warrington Seale.All ropes can be furnished in Powersteel or Yellow Strand.


Drag Rope1/2”-1-4/8” 6 x 21 F.W. or 6 x 30

Flattened Strand Lang IWRC1-1/2”-2-1/2” 6 x 21 F.W. or 6 x 25 F.W. Lang IWRC

6 x 30 Flattened Strand Lang IWRC205/8”-3-1/2” 6 x 41 F.W. or 6 x 49 SWS

or 6 x 55 SWS Lang IWRCHoist Rope

7/8” andSmaller 6 x 25 F.W. or 6 x 36 WS Lang or Reg. IWRC

Dy-Pac 6 Reg. IWRC1” and Larger 6 x 41 F.W. or 6 x 49 SWS


Boom Hoist Rope 6 x 25 F.W. Reg. IWRCDy-Pac 6 Reg. IWRC6 x 30 Flattened Strand Lang IWRC

Bucket Dump Line 6 x 25 F.W Lang or Reg. IWRC

DRAGLINEF.W.—Filler Wire; WS—Warrington Seale; SWS—Seale Warrington Seale.All ropes can be furnished in Powersteel or Yellow Strand.


The Reserve Strength of a standard rope is a relationshipbetween the strength represented by all the wires in the outerstrands and the wires remaining in the outer strands with theouter layer of wires removed. Reserve strength is calculatedusing actual metallic areas of the individual wires. Since thereis a direct relationship between metallic area and strength,Reserve Strength is usually expressed as a percentage of therope's nominal strength. Reserve Strength is used as a relativecomparison between the internal wire load bearing capabilitiesof different rope constructions.

Reserve Strength is an important consideration in selec-tion, inspection and evaluation of a rope for applications wherethe consequences of a rope failure are great. The use ofReserve Strength is premised on the theory that the outerwires of the strands are the first to be subjected to damage orwear. Therefore, the Reserve Strength figures are less signifi-cant when the rope is subjected to internal wear, damage,abuse, corrosion or distortion.

The more wires there are in the outer layer of a strand con-struction, the greater will be the rope's Reserve Strength.Geometrically, as more wires are required in the outer layer ofa strand, they must be smaller in diameter. This results ingreater metallic area remaining to be filled by the inner wires.

Separate columns are shown for standard Fiber Core andIWRC ropes. For Fiber Core ropes, the Reserve Strength is theapproximate percentage of the rope's metallic area made up bythe inner wires of the outer strands. An IWRC in a rope is con-sidered to contribute 7-1/2% to the rope's total strength. By def-inition, the core is not included in the Reserve Strength calcu-lation so a 7-1/2% reduction has been made for ropes with anIWRC.

Rotation Resistant ropes, due to their construction, canexperience different modes of wear and failure than standardropes. Therefore, their Reserve Strength is calculated different-ly. For Rotation Resistant ropes, the Reserve Strength is based on the percentage of the metallic area represented by the corestrand plus the inner wires of the strands of both the outer and inner layers.

EACH CHARACTERISTIC AFFECTS OTHER CHARACTERISTICS

Wire rope strength is usually measured in tons of 2,000 pounds. In published material wire rope strengthis shown as "nominal" strength. Nominal strength refers to calculated strength figures that have beenaccepted by the wire rope industry.

When placed under tension on a test device a new rope shouId break at a figure equal to,or higher than, the nominal strength shown for that rope.

To account for variables which might exist when such tests are made to determine the break-ing strength of a new wire rope an "acceptance" strength may be used. The acceptance strength is 2-1/2% lower than the nominal strength and all ropes must meet or exceed this strength.

The nominal strength applies to new, unused rope. A rope should never operate at, or near, the nominal strength. During itsuseful life, a rope loses strength gradually due to natural causes such as surface wear and metal fatigue.

Every wire rope has its own “personality” which is a reflection of its engineered design. Each rope con-struction has been established to produce a desired combination of operating characteristics which willbest meet the performance requirements of the work, or application, for which that design is intended . .. and each rope construction is, therefore, a design compromise.

The best illustration of a design compromise—or best combination of desired characteris-tics—is the inter-relationship between resistance to abrasion and fatigue resistance.

Fatigue resistance (a rope's capability to bend repeatedly under stress) is accomplished byusing many wires in the rope strands. Resistance to metal loss through abrasion is achieved primarilywith a rope design which uses fewer and therefore larger wires in the outer layer to reduce the effects ofsurface wear.

Therefore, from a design standpoint when anything is done to alter either abrasion resist-ance or fatigue resistance, both of these features will be affected.

1. STRENGTH

2. RESERVE STRENGTH

RESERVE STRENGTH OFROTATION RESISTANT ROPES

FEATURES FOR CONSIDERATION IN WIRE ROPE SELECTION

8 x 25 Resistwist 3819 x 7 23

6 x 7 17 —6 x 19 S 32 306 x 19 2 OP 40 376 x 19 W 42 396 x 21 FW 36 336 x 25 FW 43 406 x 26 WS 36 336 x 30 Style G 26 246 x 31 WS 43 406 x 33 2 0P 44 416 x 36 WS 48 446 x 37 2 OP 56 526 x 41 SFW 53 496 x 49 SWS 53 49

RESERVE STRENGTHOF STANDARD ROPES

PERCENT OFNOMINAL STRENGTH REPRESENTED

ROPE BY INNER WIRES OF OUTER STRANDSCONSTRUCTION FIBER CORE |IWRC

PERCENT OFNOMINAL STRENGTH REPRESENTED

ROPE BY INNER WIRES OF STRANDS OFCONSTRUCTION INNER AND OUTER LAYERS

6

9

10

12

12

12

14

16

16

6 x 7

6 x19 S

6 x 21 FW

Flattened

6 x 25 FW

6 x 31 WS

6 x 36 WS

8 x 25 FW

6 x 49 SWS

Strand

NU

MB

ER

OF

OU

TS

IDE

WIR

ES

PE

R S

TR

AN

D

The wire rope industry refers to this as the X-chart. It serves toillustrate the inverse relationship between abrasion resistanceand resistance to bending fatigue in a representative number ofthe most widely used wire ropes.

LEAST

RESIS

TANCE TO

ABRASION ➤

GREAT

EST

➤

LEAST RESISTANCE TO BENDING FATIGUE ➤

GREATEST

➤


3. RESISTANCE TO METAL LOSS AND DEFORMATIONMetal loss refers to the actual wearing away of metal from the outer wires of a rope, and metal deformation is the changing of theshape of outer wires of a rope.

In general, resistance to metal loss by abrasion (usually called "abrasion resistance") refers to a rope's ability to withstandmetal being worn away along its exterior. This reduces strength of a rope.

The most common form of metal deformation is generally called "peening" - since outside wires of a peened rope appear tohave been "hammered" along their exposed surface.

Peening usually occurs on drums, caused by rope-to-rope contact during take-up of the rope on the drum. It may also occuron sheaves.

Peening causes metal fatigue, which in turn may cause wire failure. The "hammering” which causes metal of the wire to flowinto a new shape, realigns the grain structure of the metal, thereby affecting its fatigue resistance. The out-of-round shape alsoimpairs wire movement when the rope bends.

4. CRUSHING RESISTANCECrushing is the effect of external pressure on a rope, which damages it by distorting the cross-section shape of the rope, its strandsor core — or all three.

Crushing resistance therefore is ability to withstand or resist external forces, and is a term generally used to express compar-ison between ropes. When a rope is damaged by crushing, the wires, strands and core are prevented from moving and adjustingnormally in operation. In a general sense, IWRC ropes are more crush resistant than fiber core ropes . . . Lang Lay ropes are lesscrush resistant than Regular Lay ropes . . . and 6-strand ropes have greater crush resistance than 8-strand ropes.

5. FATIGUE RESISTANCEFatigue resistance involves metal fatigue of the wires that make up a rope. To have high fatigue resistance, wires must be capableof bending repeatedly under stress—as when a rope passes over a sheave. Increased fatigue resistance is achieved in a ropedesign by using a large number of wires. It involves both the basic metallurgy and the diameters of wires.

In general, a rope made of many wires will have greater fatigue resistance than a same-size rope made of fewer larger wires,because smaller wires have greater ability to bend as the rope passes over sheaves or around drums. To overcome the effects offatigue, ropes must never bend over sheaves or drums with diameter so small as to kink wires or bend them excessively.There areprecise recommendations for sheave and drum sizes to properly accommodate all sizes and types of ropes.

Every rope is subject to metal fatigue from bending stress while in operation, and therefore the rope's strength gradually dimin-ishes as the rope is used.

6. BEND-ABILITYBend-ability relates to the ability of a rope to bend easily in an arc. Four primary factors affect this capability:

1. Diameter of wires that make the rope. 2. Rope and Strand Construction. 3. Metal Composition of wires and finish such asgalvanizing. 4. Type of rope core—fiber or IWRC.

Some rope constructions are by nature more bend-able than others. Small ropes are more bend-able than big ones. Fiber coreropes bend more easily than comparable IWRC ropes. As a general rule, ropes made of many wires are more bend-able thansame-size ropes made with fewer larger wires.

7. STABILITYThe word "stability" is most often used to describe handling and working characteristics of a rope. It is not a precise term, sincethe idea expressed is to some degree a matter of opinion, and is more nearly a "personality" trait than any other rope feature. Forexample, a rope is called stable when it spools smoothly on and off a drum . . . or doesn't tend to tangle when a multi-part reevingsystem is relaxed.

Strand and rope construction contribute most to stability. Preformed rope is usually more stable than nonpreformed, and LangLay rope tends to be less stable than Regular Lay. A rope made of simple 7-wire strands will usually be more stable than a morecomplicated construction with many wires per strand. There is no specific measurement of rope stabiIity.

FEATURES FOR CONSIDERATION IN WIRE ROPE SELECTION


MINIMUMTYPE OF SERVICE DESIGN FACTOR

FOUR PRIMARY FACTORS

Guys 3.5Track cables 3.2Haulage ropes 6Overhead and gantry cranes 6Jib and pillar cranes 6Hot ladle cranes. 8Small electric and air hoists 7Mine shafts

for depth to 500' 8for depth to 500-1000' 7for depth to 1000-2000' 6for depth to 2000-3000' 5for depth to 3000' or more 4

Miscellaneous hoisting equipment 5Slings 5

The term "lay" has three meanings 1) Direction strands are "layed" in a rope—right or left. 2) Relationship to the direction wiresare "layed" in strands to direction strands are "layed" in the rope—Regular or Lang. 3) A unit of length measure, as illustrated.

In REGULAR lay wires in each strand are rayed opposite the direction the strand is layed in the rope—so exposed portions of wiresappear parallel to the length of the rope. Regular lay rope is more stable, resistant to kinks and crushing than Lang lay rope.

In LANG lay exposed wires appear at an angle to the length of the rope. Lang lay rope is more fatigue resistant and resists abra-sion better than Regular lay, but has less stability. Lang lay ropes are used on applications where the rope is subjected to repeat-ed bending and both ends are attached so that the rope may not rotate.

Always measure the diameter of any rope at its widest point—by turning the caliper on the rope.

Four primary factors affect strength of any wire rope, and must be considered when specifying a ropefor an application (1) DIAMETER. (2) TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION. (3) GRADE OF ROPE. (4) CORE.

DIAMETER must fit the grooves of sheaves and hoisting drums.

CONSTRUCTION includes number of strands, number of wires per strand, and the arrangement of thewires in each strand.

GRADE OF ROPE is usually Improved Plow Steel (IPS), or Extra Improved Plow Steel (XIP) which isabout 15% stronger than IPS. Specialized Wireco ropes are also available in other grades and types ofsteel, but IPS and XIP are standards. Ropes may be "Bright"—without special finish for the wire—orGalvanized.

CORE is the member of a wire rope about which the strands are laid. It may be fiber, a wire strand, oran independent wire rope.

MEANING OF LAY

HOW TO GAUGE WIRE ROPE

The "catalog" nominal strength figure provided for any wire ropeis not to be used as the working load which that rope can repeat-edly move without failing before a reasonable amount of serviceis received. The catalog figure is the strength of a new, un-usedwire rope of that specific construction and grade, and is to beconsidered the actual Breaking Strength. A rope is at its higheststrength when it leaves the factory and diminishes gradually withuse. Therefore a DESIGN FACTOR must be applied to the cata-log strength to determine the load a rope can repeatedly movewhen the rope is placed in operation. The Design Factor musttake into consideration such things as type of service (fast orslow, rough or smooth, sudden stops and starts, etc.), conse-quences of failure and design of equipment.The following DesignFactors are generally accepted in the U.S wire rope industry.

DESIGN FACTORS

WIRE ROPE SELECTION HINTS


HOW TO EXTEND ROPE SERVICE LIFEHow long will your rope last? There is not a simple answer, but rather, there are several factors involved including: The manner inwhich you install and “break in” your new rope. The operating technique and work habits of the machine operators. Physical main-tenance of the rope throughout its service life. Physical maintenance of the system in which your rope operates.

RECOMMENDED PRACTICESWe’ve outlined several recommended practices you may use to extend your rope’s useful life. It’s also important to note that allsections of this article, in some respect, also review ways to help you get greater useful life from your rope, and that’s why youneed to thoroughly understand all the material here.

INSTALL YOUR ROPE CORRECTLYThe primary concern when installing a new rope is to not trap any twist in the rope system. Proper handling of the rope from thereel or coil to your equipment will help avoid this situation. Another important step on smooth faced drums is to spool with wrapstight and close together on the first layer. This layer forms the foundation for succeeding layers. Finally, spool the remaining ropeon the drum with tension approximating 1% to 2% of the rope’s nominal strength.

BREAK IN YOUR NEW ROPE PROPERLYWhen you install a new operating rope, you should first run it for a brief period of time with no load. Then, for best results, run itunder controlled loads and speeds to enable the wires and strands in the rope to adjust to themselves.

“CONSTRUCTIONAL” STRENGTHWhen first put into service, new ropes normally elongate while strands go through a process of seating with one another and withthe rope core. This is called “constructional” stretch because it is inherent in the construction of the rope, and the amount of elon-gation may vary from one rope to another. For standard ropes, this stretch will be about 1/4% to 1% of the rope’s length.

When constructional stretch needs to be minimized, ropes may be factory prestretched. Please specify when placing your order.Another type of stretch, “elastic” stretch, results from recoverable deformation of the metal itself. For more information, please referto the Wire Rope Technical Data Handbook.

CUT OFF ENDS TO MOVE WEAR POINTSIf you observe wear developing in a localized area, it may be beneficial to cut off short lengths of rope. This may require an origi-nal length slightly longer than you normally use. When severe abrasion or numerous fatigue breaks occur near one end or at anyone concentrated area—such as drag ropes on draglines or closing lines in clamshell buckets, for example—the movement of thisworn section can prolong rope life.

Wire breaks from vibration fatigue occur at end terminations, so short lengths cut off there with reattachment of the socket mayprolong the rope’s life. When broken wires are found, you should cut off sections of rope. In the case of a socket, you should cutoff at least five or six feet. In the case of clips or clamps, you should cut off the entire length covered by them.

Where there is an equalizing sheave, such as that found in many overhead cranes, fatigue is localized at rope tangency points tothe equalizing sheave. Rope life will be increased if you shift this point by cutting off a short length at the end of one of the drums.Be sure to make this cutoff before significant wear occurs at the equalizing sheave, and always do so at the same drum.

REVERSING ENDSFrequently, the most severe deterioration occurs at a point too far from the end or is too long to allow the worn section to be cutoff. In such cases, you may turn the rope end for end to bring a less worn section into the area where conditions are most dam-aging.This practice is beneficial for incline rope and draglines.The change must be made well before the wear reaches the removalcriteria. When changing ends, be careful to avoid kinking or otherwise damaging the rope.

PROPER ROPE USE


CLEAN AND LUBRICATE REGULARLY TO REDUCE WEARWe lubricate our wire rope during manufacture so that the strands—as well as the individual wires in the strands—may move andadjust as the rope moves and bends. But no wire rope can be lubricated sufficiently during manufacture to last its entire life. That’swhy it’s important to lubricate periodically throughout the life of the rope.

The surface of some ropes may become covered with dirt, rock dust or other material during their operation.This can prevent field-applied lubricants from properly penetrating into the rope, so it’s a good practice to clean these ropes before you lubricate them.

The lubricant you apply should be light-bodied enough to penetrate to the rope’s core. You an normally apply lubricant by usingone of three methods: drip it on rope, spray it on or brush it on. In all cases, you should apply it at a place where the rope is bend-ing such as around a sheave.We recommend you apply it at the top of the bend because that’s where the rope’s strands are spreadby bending and more easily penetrated. In addition, there are pressure lubricators available commercially. Your rope’s service lifewill be directly proportional to the effectiveness of the method you use and the amount of lubricant that reaches the rope’s work-ing parts.

A proper lubricant must reduce friction, protect against corrosion and adhere to every wire. It should also be pliable and not crackor separate when cold—yet not drip when warm. Never apply heavy grease to the rope because it can trap excessive grit, whichcan damage the rope. Nor should you apply used “engine oil” because it contains materials that can damage the rope. For unusu-al conditions, you can specify special lubricants that we can apply at the factory.

CONTINUOUS DRIP/SPRAY METHODThis method is for applying lubricant automatically during machine operation.

MANUAL SPRAY AND BRUSH-ON METHODThese methods are generally best accomplished at a sheave where strands are opened up, allowing lubricant to penetrate to thecore.

CLEAN ROPE BEFORE LUBRICATINGPrior to relubricating rope, any large accumulations of grit or other abrasive material should be cleaned off as best as possible.This operation will allow better penetration of the lubricant, and help cut down wear on both the rope and sheaves.

PROPER ROPE USE


HOW TO UNREEL OR UNCOIL WIRE ROPEThere is always a danger of kinking a wire rope if you improperly unreel or uncoil it. Youshould mount a reel on jacks or a turntable so that it will revolve as you pull the rope off. Applysufficient tension by means of a board acting as a brake against the reel flange to keep slackfrom accumulating. With a coil, stand it on edge and roll it in a straight line away from the freeend. You may also place a coil on a revolving stand and pull the rope as you would from areel or a turntable.

THE THREE STAGES OF KINKING1. THE START: A rope should

never be allowed to accu-mulate twist as shown herebecause it will loop andeventually form a kink. If thisloop is removed beforebeing pulled down tight, youcan normally avoid the kink.

HOW TO STORE WIRE ROPE PROPERLYWe recommend you store your wire rope under a roof or a weatherproof covering so thatmoisture cannot reach it. Similarly, you must avoid acid fumes or any other corrosive atmos-phere—including ocean spray—in order to protect the rope from rust. If you’re storing a reelfor a lengthy period, you may want to order your rope with a protective wrap. If not, at leastcoat the ouer layers of rope with a good rope lubricant.

If you ever take a rope out of service and want to store it for future use, you should place iton a reel after you’ve thoroughly cleaned and relubricated it. Give the same storage consid-erations to your used rope as you would your new rope.

Be sure to keep your wire rope in storage away from steam or hot water pipes, heated airducts or any other source of heat that can thin out lubricant and cause it to drain out of yourrope.

WARNINGIn the real world, accidents do happen, and that’s why you need to take special precautions.Before installing wire rope in your applications, always read and follow the warning labelattached to each product.

PROPER ROPE USE

Wire rope WILL FAIL if worn-out, overloaded, misused, damaged, improperly maintained or abused. Wire rope failure maycause serious injury or death! Protect yourself and others:• ALWAYS INSPECT wire rope for WEAR, DAMAGE or ABUSE BEFORE USE.• NEVER USE wire rope that is WORN-OUT, DAMAGED or ABUSED.• NEVER OVERLOAD a wire rope.• INFORM YOURSELF: Read and understand manufacturer’s literature or “Wire Rope and Wire Rope Sling Safety Bulletin.”• REFER TO APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS and REGULATIONS for INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS and REMOVAL CRI-

TERIA.• For additional information or the BULLETIN, ask your employer or wire rope supplier.

WARNING

Correct ways to unreel anduncoil wire rope.

2. THE KINK: By now, thedamage is done, and therope must not be used.

3. THE RESULT: Even if the wires do not appear badlydamaged, the rope is still damaged and must bereplaced. If a twist develops, remove the twist from therope before a kink can form.


WIRE ROPE INSPECTIONAll wire ropes will wear out eventually and gradually lose work capability throughout their service life. That’s why periodic inspec-tions are critical. Applicable industry standards such as ASME B30.2 for overhead and gantry cranes or federal regulations suchas OSHA refer to specific inspection criteria for varied applications.

THREE PURPOSES FOR INSPECTIONRegular inspection of wire rope and equipment should be performed for three good reasons:• It reveals the rope’s condition and indicates the need for replacement.• It can indicate if you’re using the most suitable type of rope.• It makes possible the discovery and correction of faults in equipment or operation that can cause costly accelerated rope wear.

HOW OFTENAll wire ropes should be thoroughly inspected at regular intervals. The longer it has been in service or the more severe the serv-ice, the more thoroughly and frequently it should be inspected. Be sure to maintain records of each inspection.

APPOINT A QUALIFIED PERSON TO INSPECTInspections should be carried out by a person who has learned through special training or practical experience what to look forand who knows how to judge the importance of any abnormal conditions they may discover. It is the inspector’s responsibility toobtain and follow the proper inspection criteria for each application inspected.

For information on inspection methods and techniques ask us for Techreport 107: Wire Rope Inspection. If you need further assis-tance, contact our Product Engineering Department.

WHAT TO LOOK FORHere’s what happens when a wire breaks under tensile load exceeding its strength. It’s typically recognized by the “cup and cone”appearance at the point of failure. The necking down of the wire at the point of failure to form the cup and cone indicates failurehas occurred while the wire retained its ductility.

This is a wire with a distinct fatigue break. It’s recognized by the square end perpendicular to the wire. This break was producedby a torsion machine that’s used to measure the ductility. This break is similar to wire failures in the field caused by fatigue.

A wire rope that has been subjected to repeated bending over sheaves under normal loads. This results in fatigue breaks in indi-vidual wires—these breaks are square and usually in the crown of the strands.

An example of fatigue failure of a wire rope subjected to heavy loads over small sheaves. The breaks in the valleys of the strandsare caused by “strand nicking.” There may be crown breaks, too.

Here you see a single strand removed from a wire rope subjected to “strand nicking.” This condition is a result of adjacent strandsrubbing against one another. While this is normal in a rope’s operation, the nicking can be accentuated by high loads, smallsheaves or loss of core support. The ultimate result will be individual wire breaks in the valleys of the strands.

PROPER ROPE USE


A major portion of any wire rope inspection is the detection of broken wires. The number and type of broken wires are an indication of the rope’s general condition and a benchmark for itsreplacement.

Frequent inspections and written records help determine the rate at which wires are breaking. Replace the rope when the values given in the table below are reached.

Valley wire breaks—where the wire fractures between strands or a broken wire protrudes between strands—are treated differently than those that occur on the outer surface of the rope.When there is more than one valley break, replace the rope.

Broken wire removal criteria cited in many standards and specifications, like those listed below, apply to wire ropes operating on steel sheaves and drums. For wire ropes operating onsheaves and drums made with material other than steel, please contact the sheave, drum or equipment manufacturer or a qualified person for proper broken wire removal criteria.

TYPICAL EVIDENCE OF WEAR AND ABUSEA “birdcage” is caused by sudden release of tensionand the resulting rebound of rope. These strands andwires will not be returned to their original positions.The rope should be replaced immediately.

REMOVAL CRITERIA

WHEN TO REPLACE WIRE ROPE—BASED ON NUMBER OF WIRES

These wires have been subjected to continuedpeening, causing fatigue type failures. A predeter-mined, regularly scheduled cutoff practice can helpeliminate this type of problem.

This is localized wear over an equalized sheave.Thedanger here is that it’s invisible during the rope’soperation, and that’s why you need to inspect this por-tion of an operating rope regularly. The rope shouldbe pulled off the sheave during inspection and bent tocheck for broken wires.

This is a wire rope with a high strand—a condition inwhich one or more strands are worn before adjoiningstrands.This is caused by improper socketing or seiz-ing, kinks or dog-legs. At top, you see a closeup of theconcentration of wear. At bottom, you see how itrecurs every sixth strand in a 6 strand rope.

A kinked wire rope is shown here. It’s caused bypulling down a loop in a slack line during handling,installation or operation. Note the distortion of thestrands and individual wires. This rope must bereplaced.

Here’s a wire rope that has jumped a sheave. Therope “curled” as it went over the edge of the sheave.When you study the wires, you’ll see two types ofbreaks here: tensile “cup and cone” breaks and shearbreaks that appear to have been cut on an angle.

Drum crushing is caused by small drums, high loadsand multiple winding conditions.

# OF BROKEN WIRES # OF BROKEN WIRES IN RUNNING ROPES IN STANDING ROPES

IN ONE IN ONE AT END IN ONE AT ENDSTANDARD EQUIPMENT ROPE LAY STRAND CONNECTION ROPE LAY CONNECTION

ASME/B30.2 Overhead and gantry cranes 12** 4 not specified not specified not specifiedASME/B30.4 Portal, tower and pillar cranes 6** 3 2 3 2ASME/B30.5 Mobile and locomotive cranes running ropes 6** 3 2 3 2ASME/B30.5 Mobile and locomotive cranes rotation-resistant ropes 2 randomly distributed broken wires in 6 rope diameters or

4 randomly distributed broken wires in 30 rope diameters.**ASME/B30.6 Derricks 6** 3 2 3 2ASME/B30.7 Base-mounted drum hoists 6** 3 2 3 2ASME/B30.8 Floating cranes and derricks 6** 3 2 3 2ASME/B30.16 Overhead hoists 12** 4 not specified not specified not specifiedANSI/A10.4 Personnel hoists 6** 3 2 2** 2ANSI/A10.5 Material hoists 6** not specified not specified not specified

**Also remove for 1 valley break.

PROPER ROPE USE


FLEET ANGLEThe achievement of even winding on a smooth faced drum is closely related to the magnitude of the D/d ratio, the speed of rota-tion, load on the rope, and the fleet angle. Of all these factors, the one that exerts perhaps the greatest influence on winding char-acteristics, is the fleet angle.

The schematic drawing (Fig. 34) shows an installation where the wire rope runs from a fixed sheave. over a floating sheave,and then on to the surface of a smooth drum. The fleet angle (Fig. 34) may be defined as the included angle between two lines;one line drawn through the middle of the fixed sheave and the drum—and perpendicular to the axis of the drum and a second linedrawn from the flange of the drum to the base of the groove in the sheave. (The drum flange represents the farthest position towhich the rope can travel across the drum. ) There are left and right fleet angles, measured to the left or right of the center line ofthe sheave, respectively.

It is necessary to restrict the fleet angle on installations where wire rope passes over the lead or fixed sheave and onto a drum.For optimum efficiency and service characteristics, the angle here should not exceed 1~/: ° for a smooth drum, nor 2 ° for a grooveddrum. Fleet angles larger than these suggested limits can cause such problems as bad winding on smooth drums, and the roperubbing against the flanges of the sheave grooves. Larger angles also create situations where there is excessive crushing andabrasion of the rope on the drum. Conversely, small fleet angles—less than 1/2°—should also be avoided since too small an anglewill cause the rope to pile up.

DRUMS—GROOVEDDrums are the means by which power is transmitted to the rope and thence to the object to be moved. For the wire rope to pickup this power efficiently and to transmit it properly to the working end, installation must be carefully controlled.

If the drum is grooved, the winding conditions should be closely supervised to assure adherence to the following recom-mended procedures:1) The end of the rope must be secured to the drum by such means as will give the end attachment at least as much strength

as is specified by the equipment manufacturer.2) Adequate tension must be maintained on the rope while it is being wound so that the winding proceeds under continuous ten-

sion.3) The rope must follow the groove.4) There should be at least three dead turns remaining on the drum when the rope is unwound during normal operation. Two

dead turns are a mandatory requirement in many codes and standards.If the wire rope is carelessly wound and, as a result, jumps the grooves, it will be crushed and cut where it crosses from one

groove to the other. Another, almost unavoidable problem is created at the drum flange; as the rope climbs to a second layer thereis further crushing and the wires receive excessive abrasion. Riser and filler strips may help remedy this condition.

SHEAVE INSPECTIONSheaves should be checked for: 1. Correct groove diameter; 2. Roundness or contour to give proper support to the rope; 3. Smallholes, cracks, uneven surfaces, or other defects that might be detrimental to the rope 4. Extreme deep wear.

A sheave should also be checked to make sure it turns freely, is properly aligned, has no broken or cracked flanges, and hasbearings that work properly. Drums should also be inspected for signs of wear that could damage rope. Plain-faced or smoothdrums can develop grooves or impressions that prevent rope from winding properly. Repair by resurfacing the face or replacing thelagging.

Scrubbing will occur if the rope tends to close wind. If the tendency is to open winding, the rope will encounter abnormal abuseas the second layer forces itself down between the open wraps of the first layer on the drum.

Operating with a smooth drum calls for special care. Be sure the rope is always tightly wound and thread layed on the firstlayer. Any loosening of the line is easily observed as the winding will be bad and the rope will be coming off with a series of "badspots."

Grooved drums should be examined for tight or corrugated grooves and for differences in depth or pitch that could damagethe second and subsequent layers.Worn grooves can develop extremely sharp edges that shave away small particles of steel fromthe rope. Correct this condition by grinding or filing a radius to replace the sharp edge. Drum flanges, as well as the starter, fillerand riser strips, should be checked. Excessive wear here often causes unnecessary rope abuse at the change of layers and cross-over points.

Other places of contact such as rollers, scrub boards, guides and end attachments should also be inspected.

MEASURE THE WIDEST DIAMETERRopes and sheave grooves must be precisely fitted to each other to get the most service out of your wire rope dollar. Make

measurement of rope diameter a normal part of your inspection program. There's only one right way to measure rope diameter:use machinist's calipers and be sure to measure the widest diameter. This method is not only useful for measuring the diameterof a new rope, but also for determining the amount of wear and compression that has occurred while the rope has been in use.Accurate recording of this information is essential in helping to decide when to replace wire rope.

Figure 34. This illustration of wire rope running from afixed sheave, over a floating sheave, and then on to asmooth drum, graphically defines the fleet angle.

FLEET ANGLES & DRUMS


DIAMETER (IN.) K

DRUMS—PLAIN (SMOOTH)

1/16 49.83/32 23.41/8 13.65/32 8.723/16 6.147/32 4.591/4 3.295/16 2.213/8 1.587/16 1.19

DIAMETER (IN.) K

1/2 0.9259/16 0.7415/8 0.607

11/16 0.5063/4 0.428

13/16 0.3547/8 0.3081 0.239

1-1/8 0.1911-1/4 0.152

DIAMETER (IN.) K

1-3/8 0.1271-1/2 0.1071-5/8 0.08861-3/4 0.07701-7/8 0.0675

2 0.05972-1/8 0.05322-1/4 0.04762-3/8 0.04192-1/2 0.0380

It is virtually impossible to calculate the precise length of wire rope that canbe spooled on a reel or drum. The formula below provides a sufficientlyclose approximation based on uniform rope winding on the reel.

L = (A + D) X A X B X K

L = length of wire rope in fleetA = depth of rope space on reel in inchesB = width of drum between flanges in inchesD = barrel diameter in inchesK = constant for given wire rope diameter

(per table below)H = diameter in reel flanges in inchesX =- clearance

Installation of a wire rope on a plain ( smooth ) face drum requires a great deal of care.The starting position should be at the drumend so that each turn of the rope will wind tightly against the preceding turn (Fig. 26). Here too, close supervision should be main-tained all during installation. This will help make certain that:1) the rope is properly attached to the drum,2) appropriate tension on the rope is maintained as it is wound on the drum,3) each turn is guided as close to the preceding turn as possible, so that there are no gaps between turns,4) and that there are at least two dead turns on the drum when the rope is fully unwound during normal operating cycles.

Loose and uneven winding on a plain- (smooth-) faced drum, can and usually does create excessive wear, crushing and distortionof the rope. The results of such abuse are lower operating performance, and a reduction in the rope's effective strength. Also, foran operation that is sensitive in terms of moving and spotting a load, the operator will encounter control difficulties as the rope willpile up, pull into the pile and fall from the pile to the drum surface. The ensuing shock can break or otherwise damage the rope.

REEL CAPACITY

FLEET ANGLES & DRUMS


MULTIPLYING FACTORROPE CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDED MINIMUM

SIZE OF SHEAVES AND DRUMS

6 X 7 72 4218 X 7 51 336 X 19 S 51 336 X 21 FW 45 306 X 25 FW 39 266 X 36 WS 35 226 X 41 SFW 32 186 X 42 Tiller 21 148 x 19 S 34 218 x 25 FW 32 20

D = Sheave or Drum Tread Diameterd = Nominal Wire Rope Diameter

The proper direction of winding the first layer on a smooth drum can be determined by standing behind the drum and looking alongthe path the rope travels, and then following one of the procedures illustrated in Figure 26. The diagrams show: the correct rela-tionship that should be maintained between the direction of lay of the rope (right or left), the direction of rotation of the drum (over-wind or underwind), winding from left to right or right to left.

Figure 27. After the first layer is wound on a drum, thepoint at which the rope winds back for each turn iscalled the cross-over.

DRUMS—MULTIPLE LAYERSMany installations are designed with requirements for winding more than one layer of wire rope on a drum. Winding multiple lay-ers presents some further problems.

The first layer should wind in a smooth, tight helix which, if the drum is grooved, is already established. The grooves allow theoperator to work off the face of the drum, and permit the minimum number of dead turns.

A smooth drum presents an additional problem, initially, as the wire rope must be wound in such a manner that the first layerwill be smooth and uniform and will provide a firm foundation for the layers of rope that will be wound over it. The first layer of ropeon the smooth drum should be wound with tension sufficient to assure a close helix—each turn being wound as close as possibleto the preceding turn—and most, if not all, of the entire layer being used as dead turns.The first layer then acts as a helical groovewhich will guide the successive layers. Unlike wire ropes operating on groove drums, the first layer should not be unwound from asmooth-faced drum with multiple layers.

After the rope has wound completely across the face of the drum (either smooth or grooved), it is forced up to a second layerat the flange. The rope then winds back across the drum in the opposite direction, Iying in the depression between the turns of therope on the first layer. Advancing across the drum on the second layer, the rope, following the "grooves" formed by the rope on thefirst layer, actually winds back one turn in each revolution of the drum. The rope must then cross two rope "grooves" in order toadvance across the drum for each turn. The point at which this occurs is known as the cross-over. Cross-over is unavoidable onthe second, and all succeeding layers. Figure 27 illustrates the winding of a rope on the second layer from left to right, and fromright to left—the direction is shown by the arrows.

At these cross-over points, the rope is subjected to severe abrasion and crushing as it is pushed over the two rope "grooves"and rides across the crown of the first rope layer. The scrubbing of the rope, as this is happening, can easily be heard.

There is, however, a special drum grooving available that will greatly minimize the damage that can occur at cross-over points.Severe abrasion can also be reduced by applying the rule for the correct rope lay (right- or left-lay) to the second layer rather

than to the first layer. It is for this reason that the first layer of a smooth drum should be wound tight and used as dead turns.

Wire rope is built to transmit power around corners, but it must be guided by sheaves. These sheaves must be properly groovedand of adequate diameter to allow the rope to bend without binding. Drums must also be of adequate diameter to prevent the ropefrom binding internally. Minimum recommended drum and sheave tread diameters are determined by multiplying the factor in thetable below by the nominal rope diameter.

D / d RATIOS

WIRE ROPE DRUMS


ALWAYS STAND INCLEAR VIEWOF YOUR CRANEHOIST ENGINEER.

BE SURE TO STAYA SAFE DISTANCEFROM HOOK,BLOCK OR BOOM.

SPANISHCHARTAVAILABLE

PLEASECALL

CRANE SIGNALS


CODE NO. DIAMETER BREAKING STRENGTH IN LBS. WEIGHT PER LBS/1000 FT.

364ICR 3/64” 270 4.2116ICR 1/16” 480 7.5332ICR 3/32” 920 16.0180ICR 1/8” 1700 28.5532ICR 5/32” 2600 43.0316ICR 3/16” 3700 62.0

7 X 7 GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLEThis is the semiflexible construction mainly specified for aircraft cable in 3/64” to 3/16” sizes. It is strong, long-lasting, ideal for sup-porting weights and for transmitting of mechanical power.

GALVANIZED AND STAINLESS STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLE

7 x 7


364IFR 3/64” 270 4.2116IFR 1/16” 480 7.5332IFR 3/32” 920 16.0180IFR 1/8” 1700 28.5532IFR 5/32” 2600 43.0316IFR 3/16” 3700 62.0

NOTE: Type 304 Standard Type 316 Available.

7 X 7 STAINLESS STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLEThis is the semiflexible construction mainly specified for aircraft cable in 3/64” to 3/16” sizes. It is strong, long-lasting, ideal for sup-porting weights and for transmitting of mechanical power.

7 x 7


332ECR 3/32” 1050 16.0180ECR 1/8” 2000 29.0532ECR 5/32” 2800 45.0316ECR 3/16” 4200 65.0732ECR 7/32” 5600 86.0140ECR 1/4” 7000 110.0516ECR 5/16” 9800 173.0380ECR 3/8” 14,400 243.0

7 X 19 GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLEStandard flexible aircraft and stainless steel cable in 3/32” to 3/8” sizes. Tough construction, resists crushing of heavy loads, usedwhere flexibility and good resistance to wear is required.

7 x 19


332EFR 3/32” 1000 16.0180EFR 1/8” 1760 29.0532EFR 5/32” 2400 45.0316EFR 3/16” 3700 65.0732EFR 7/32” 5000 86.0140EFR 1/4” 6400 110.0516EFR 5/16” 9000 173.0380EFR 3/8” 12,000 243.0


7 X 19 STAINLESS STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLEStandard flexible aircraft and stainless steel cable in 3/32” to 3/8” sizes. Tough construction, resists crushing of heavy loads, usedwhere flexibility and good resistance to wear is required.

7 x 19

LARGER DIAMETERS AVAILABLE IN 6 x 25 AND 6 x 37 CONSTRUCTION


CODE NO. CABLE DIAMETER COATED DIAMETER BREAKING STRENGTH IN LBS. WEIGHT PER LBS/1000 FT.

116IKR332 1/16” 3/32” 480 11.5116IKR180 1/16” 1/8” 480 13.5332IKR180 3/32” 1/8” 920 20.0332IKR316 3/32” 3/16” 920 28.0180IKR316 1/8” 3/16” 1700 39.0

VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLESmall diameter 7 x 7 and 7 x 19 construction wire rope is sometimes referred to as “aircraft cable”. It is not intended for aircraftuse, but designed for industrial and marine applications. When using wire rope clips with plastic coated cable, match clip size touncoated cable diameter (3/16” cable coated to 1/4” takes 3/16” clip.) Strip plastic coating off cable where clips will be positionedfor full holding power.

VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE

7 x 7

7 x 7

7 X 7 GALVANIZED VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE


116IHR332 1/16” 3/32” 480 11.5116IHR180 1/16” 1/8” 480 13.5332IHR180 3/32” 1/8” 920 20.0332IHR316 3/32” 3/16” 920 28.0180IHR316 1/8” 3/16” 1700 39.0


7 X 7 STAINLESS STEEL VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE


332EKR180 3/32” 1/8” 1050 22.0332EKR316 3/32” 3/16” 1050 28.0180EKR316 1/8” 3/16” 2000 39.0316EKR140 3/16” 1/4” 4200 78.0140EKR516 1/4” 5/16” 7000 125.0516EKR380 5/16” 3/8” 9800 196.0380EKR716 3/8” 7/16” 14,400 272.0

7 X 19 GALVANIZED VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE


332EHR180 3/32” 1/8” 1000 22.0332EHR316 3/32” 3/16” 1000 28.0180EHR316 1/8” 3/16” 1760 39.0316EHR140 3/16” 1/4” 3700 78.0140EHR516 1/4” 5/16” 6400 125.0516EHR380 5/16” 3/8” 9000 196.0380EHR716 3/8” 7/16” 12,000 272.0


7 X 19 STAINLESS STEEL VINYL COATED AIRCRAFT CABLE

NYLON COATED, COLORS AND OTHER SIZES AVAILABLE

7 x 19

7 x 19

• • • New Black Powder Coated 1/8" GAC for Theatrical Use • • •


CODE NO. CAPACITY LENGTH WEIGHTC-7 3/16” diameter and smaller 8” 10 oz.C-9 1/4” diameter and smaller 13” 1.5 lbs.C-12 3/8” diameter and smaller 19” 3 lbs.C-16 5/8” diameter and smaller 23” 5 lbs.

PRECISION CABLE CUTTERS

CODE NO. CAPACITY LENGTH WEIGHTSC-1 1/2” diameter and smaller 28” 5 lbs.

TYPE SC-1 ECONOMY CUTTER

CABLE CUTTERS AND HAND SWAGING TOOLS

CODE NO. CAPACITY LENGTH WEIGHT000-WCI 1/32”, 3/64”, 1/16” oval and stop sleeves 9” 12 oz.

SWAGING TOOLS

BENCH MOUNTED SWAGER AND OTHER MODELS & TYPES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE

NO. 000-WCI HAND SWAGERSmall, compact, can be carried in your pocket. Has built in cable cutter. Packaged in plastic pouch.

CODE NO. CAPACITY LENGTH WEIGHT0-3/32SC 3/32” oval and 3/32”, 1/8 stop 20” 4.2 lbs.0-1/8SC 1/8” oval and 5/32”, 3/16”, 7/32” stop 20” 4.2 lbs.0-5/32SC 5/32” oval 20” 4.2 lbs.0-3/16SC 3/16” oval 20” 4.2 lbs.

NO. 0-SC HAND SWAGERSSingle compression die for oval and stop sleeve swaging.

CODE NO. CAPACITY LENGTH WEIGHT0-7/32 7/32” oval 28” 5 lbs.0-1/4 1/4” oval and 1/4”, 3/92”, 5/16” oval 28” 5 lbs.0-9/32 9/32” oval 28” 5 lbs.0-5/16 5/16” oval 28” 5 lbs.

NO. 0 HAND SWAGERSSingle compression die for oval and stop sleeve swaging.

CODE NO. CAPACITY LENGTH WEIGHTSWAGER 1/16”, 3/32”, 1/8”, 5/32”, 3/16” oval

1/16”, 3/32”, 1/8”, 5/32”, 3/16”, 7/32” stop 26” 6.5 lbs.SWAGER-2 5/32", 1/4", 5/16" oval 30" 10 lbs.SWAGER-3 3/8" oval 36" 13.5 lbs.

NO.1-SC HAND SWAGERMulticompression hand swager with cable cutter. Swags a total of 11 sizes plus the ability to cut up to 7/32” diam-eter aircraft quality steel cable. A tool with a dozen functions.


TO FITCABLEDIAMETER ALUMINUM OVAL COPPER OVAL ZINC PLATED COPPER OVAL ALUMINUM STOP COPPER STOP

EYE, LOOP, BALL, STUD AND FORK FITTINGS ARE AVAILABLE

3/64” NICOA364 NICOC364 NICOZ364 STOPA364 STOPC3641/16” NICOA116 NICOC116 NICOZ116 STOPA116 STOPC1163/32” NICOA332 NICOC332 NICOZ332 STOPA332 STOPC3321/8” NICOA180 NICOC180 NICOZ180 STOPA180 STOPC1805/32” NICOA532 NICOC532 NICOZ532 STOPA532 STOPC5323/16” NICOA316 NICOC316 NICOZ316 STOPA316 STOPC3167/32” NICOA732 NICOC732 NICOZ732 STOPA732 STOPC7321/4” NICOA140 NICOC140 NICOZ140 STOPA140 STOPC1409/32” NICOA932 NICOC932 NICOZ932 STOPA932 —5/16” NICOA516 NICOC516 NICOZ516 STOPA516 —3/8” NICOA380 NICOC380 NICOZ380 STOPA380 —7/16” NICOA716 NICOC716 NICOZ716 — —1/2” NICOA120 NICOC120 NICOZ120 — —

Sleeves for eye, lap, and stop sleeve splicing are available in either aluminum or copper in a wide variety of sizes ranging from3/64” to 1/2” inclusive. All oval sleeves (copper or aluminum) are capable of supporting a load 40 to 60 percent of the rated break-ing strength of the cable to which they are attached. Stop sleeves are capable of holding only 1/3 to 1/2 of the rated breakingstrength of the cable to which they are attached if attached properly.

OVAL AND STOP SLEEVES

CABLE ASSEMBLIES

OVAL AND STOP SLEEVES

WEIGHT PERFOR CABLE 100 PCS. DIMENSIONS (REF.)

CODE NO. DIAMETER (LBS.) A (IN.) B (IN.) C (IN.)

AN100-C3 3/64 - 1/16 0.35 0.97 0.68 0.35AN100-C4 3/32 - 1/8 0.45 1.00 0.78 0.34AN100-C5 5/32 0.60 1.14 0.80 0.40AN100-C6 3/16 0.98 1.45 1.03 0.50



AN100-C8 7/32 - 1/4 1.59 1.98 1.47 0.72AN100-C10 5/16 4.76 2.42 1.80 0.90AN100-C12 3/8 6.67 2.93 1.95 1.00

STAINLESS STEEL TYPE AN-100C 304 ALLOY

LIGHT DUTY WIRE ROPE THIMBLES



AN100-3 1/16 - 3/32 0.36 0.97 0.68 0.35AN100-4 3/32 - 1/8 0.49 1.00 0.78 0.34AN100-5 5/32 0.70 1.14 0.80 0.40AN100-6 3/16 1.12 1.45 1.03 0.50



AN100-8 7/32 - 1/4 1.72 1.98 1.47 0.72AN100-10 5/16 4.76 2.42 1.80 0.90AN100-12 3/8 6.67 2.93 1.95 1.00

ZINC PLATED STEEL TYPE AN-100

For Heavy Duty Thimbles See Page 79


TO FIT SIZES 1/4” - 1/2” AND 5/8” - 3/4”

FAST: The cut is made in a matter of seconds. SAFE: All blades retained within the housing at moment of impact. RUGGED: Shock resistant, malleable iron casting and tool steel blades.CLEAN CUTTING: U shaped blades (both top and bottom) help rope keep its original shape. PORTABLE: Newly designed castings cut dead weight without impairing strength of housing.LOWER COST than hydraulic or shear type cutters of equal capacity. QUICK FIELD REPAIRS made using only a hammer and punch. PAINT—All units painted bright “RoadbuildersEquipment” Yellow. Government Spec. Numbers: GGG C 800, Type III, Sizes 1, 2 and 3. Stock #5110-293-1066.

• The ideal tool to grip the wire rope so it can be pulled, tugged, dragged, etc.—notused for overhead lifting.

• General use in wire rope distributor warehouses.

• In the field with construction crews wherever wire rope is used.

• In mines-coal-silver-copper used in conjunction with mining conveyors.

CABLE GRIPS

WIRE ROPE CUTTER

CODE NO. ACCEPTS WIRE SIZE

1604-20L .125 to .501625-20 .28 to .75

NOTE: Larger sizes and different styles available.

CODE NO. SIZE NO. CUTS WEIGHT

MSCUT1 1 5/8” Wire Rope 7 lbs.Small base size


MSCUT2 2 1-1/16” Wire Rope 15-1/2 lbs.Large base size


MSCUT3 3 1-1/2” Wire Rope 28-1/2 lbs.Large base size


GROOVED PLUG ON HEMP-CENTER ROPE

OTHER FITTINGS AVAILABLE

STAINLESS STEEL AND MANYOTHER FITTINGS ALSO AVAILABLE

1. Wire rope passed through sleeve and strands fanned out for insertion of fluted plug.

3. Socket applied showing twisted strands and completed assembly.

The cutaway section of the sleeve indicates the graduated compression grip and the extension of the sleeve byondthe gripping area with a clearance fit. This all important vibration damping zone dissipates the vibration energybefore it reaches the gripping zone, and prolongs rope life.

2. Plug driven in and strands closed to apply socket.

FIELD INSTALLABLE ELECTROLINE FITTINGS

Open Endor Clevis Fig. 600

Eye End Fig. 601

Stud End Fig. 602

Coupling Fig. 603

Turnbuckle Fig. 604

Double EndTurnbuckle Fig. 605

Hook End Fig. 606


AMOUNT OF ROPESTD. PKG. WEIGHT PER ROPE MINIMUM NO. TO TURN BACK *TORQUE

CODE NO. QTY. 100 (LBS.) SIZE (IN.) OF CLIPS IN INCHES IN FT. LBS.

1010015 100 6 1/8 2 3-1/4 4.51010033 100 10 3/16 2 3-3/4 7.51010051 100 19 1/4 2 4-3/4 151010079 100 28 5/16 2 5-1/4 301010097 100 48 3/8 2 6-1/2 451010113 50 78 7/16 2 7 651010131 50 80 1/2 3 11-1/2 651010159 50 109 9/16 3 12 951010177 50 110 5/8 3 12 951010195 25 142 3/4 4 18 1301010211 25 212 7/8 4 19 2251010239 10 252 1 5 26 2251010257 10 283 1-1/8 6 34 2251010275 10 438 1-1/4 7 44 3601010293 10 442 1-3/8 7 44 3601010319 10 544 1-1/2 8 54 3601010337 Bulk 704 1-5/8 8 58 4301010355 Bulk 934 1-3/4 8 61 5901010373 Bulk 1300 2 8 71 7501010391 Bulk 1600 2-1/4 8 73 7501010417 Bulk 1900 2-1/2 9 84 7501010435• Bulk 2300 2-3/4 10 100 7501010453 Bulk 3100 3 10 106 12001010426• Bulk 4000 3-1/2 12 149 1200

*Electro-plated U-Bolt and Nuts • 2-3/4” and 3-1/2” base is made of cast steel. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope,add one additional clip. If a greater number of clips are used than shown in the table, the amount of turnback should be increased proportionately.*The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.

1. Refer to Table I in following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip onebase width from dead end of rope. Apply U-Bolt over dead end of wire rope - live end rests in saddle (Never saddle a deadhorse!) Tighten nuts evenly, alternate from one nut to the other until reaching the recommended torque.

SS-450 (316 Stainless Steel)G-450 (Red U-Bolt)

Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the catalog breaking strength of wire rope. The efficiency ratingof a properly prepared loop or thimble - eye termination for clip sizes 1/8” through 7/8” is 80%, and for sizes 1” through 3-1/2” is90%. The number of clips shown (see Table I) is based upon using RRL or RLL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6 x 37 Class, FC or IWRC;IPS or XIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class is to be used for sizes 1 inch andlarger, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip.

The number of clips shown also applies to rotation - resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS, XIP, sizes 1-1/2 inch and small-er; and to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, sizes 1-3/4 inch and smaller. For other classes of wire rope notmentioned above, we recommend contacting Crosby Engineering at the address or telephone number on the back cover to ensurethe desired efficiency rating. For elevator, personnel hoist, and scaffold applications, refer to ANSI A17.1 and ANSI A10.4. Thesestandards do not recommend U-Bolt style wire rope clip terminations. The style wire rope termination used for any application isthe obligation of the user. For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA 1926.251.

2. When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Tighten nuts evenly, alternatinguntil reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thim-ble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. Proceed to Step 3.ble as possible, turn nuts on second clipfirmly, but do not tighten. Proceed to Step 3.

3. When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally between first two - take up rope slack - tighten nuts oneach U-Bolt evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque.

The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use interlocking turnback eyes with himbles, using the recommendednumber of clips on each eye (See Figure 1). An alternate method is to use twice the number of clips as used for a turnback ter-mination. The rope ends are placed parallel to each other, overlapping by twice the turnback amount shown in the applicationinstructions. The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See Figure 2). Spacing, installation torque, andother instructions still apply.

4. WIRE ROPE SPLICING PROCEDURES:

Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check andretighten nuts to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end terminationshould be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy.

5. IMPORTANT

CROSBY CLIPS—WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

• Failure to read, understand, and followthese instructions may cause death or seri-ous injury.

• Read and understand these instructionsbefore using clips.

• Match the same size clip to the same sizewire rope.

• Prepare wire rope end termination only asinstructed.

• Do not use with plastic coated wire rope.• Apply first load to test the assembly. This

load should be of equal or greater weightthan loads expected in use. Next, check andretighten nuts to recommended torque (SeeTable 1, this page).

WARNING


CROSBY FIST GRIP CLIPS—WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

AMOUNT OF ROPEROPE STD. PKG. WEIGHT PER MINIMUM NO. TO TURN BACK *TORQUE

CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) QTY. 100 (LBS.) OF CLIPS IN INCHES IN FT. LBS.

1010471 3/16 - 1/4 100 23 2 4 301010499 5/16 100 28 2 5 301010514 3/8 50 40 2 5-1/4 451010532 7/16 - 1/2 50 62 2 11 651010550 9/16 - 5/8 50 103 2 13-1/2 1301010578 3/4 25 175 3 16 2251010596 7/8 25 225 3 26 2251010612 1 10 300 3 37 2251010630 1-1/8 10 400 3 41 3601010658 1-1/4 10 400 4 55 3601010676 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 Bulk 700 5 78 500

If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. If a greater number of clips are used than shown in the table, theamount of turnback should be increased proportionately. *The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, andfree of lubrication.

1. Refer to Table I in following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip onebase width from dead end of rope. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching the recommendedtorque.

G-429

Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the catalog breaking strength of wire rope. The efficiency ratingof a properly prepared loop or thimble-eye termination for clip sizes 1/8" through 7/8" is 80%, and for sizes 1" through 3-1/2" is90%.

The number of clips shown (see Table I) is based upon using RRL or RLL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6 x 37 Class, FC or IWRC; IPSor XIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class is to be used for sizes 1 inch and larg-er, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip.

The number of clips shown also applies to rotation - resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS XIP, sizes 1-1/2 inch and small-er; and to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller.

For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contacting Crosby Engineering at the address or tele-phone number on the back cover to ensure the desired efficiency rating. The style of wire rope termination used for any applica-tion is the obligation of the user. For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA 1926.251.

2. When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Tighten nuts evenly, alternatinguntil reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thim-ble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. Proceed to Step 3.

3. When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally between first two - take up rope slack - tighten nuts oneach U-Bolt evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque.

The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use interlocking turnback eyes with thimbles, using the recom-mended number of clips on each eye (See Figure 1). An alternate method is to use twice the number of clips as used for a turn-back termination. The rope ends are placed parallel to each other, overlapping by twice the turnback amount shown in the appli-cation instructions.The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See Figure 2). Spacing, installation torque,and other instructions still apply.

4. WIRE ROPE SPLICING PROCEDURES:

Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check andretighten nuts to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end terminationshould be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy

5. IMPORTANT

• Failure to read, understand, and followthese instructions may cause death or seri-ous injury.

• Read and understand these instructionsbefore using clips.

• Match the same size clip to the same sizewire rope.

• Prepare wire rope end termination only asinstructed.

• Do not use with plastic coated wire rope.• Apply first load to test the assembly. This

load should be of equal or greater weightthan loads expected in use. Next, check andretighten nuts to recommended torque (SeeTable 1, this page).

WARNING


CROSBY FORGED SHACKLES

• Shackles are Quenched and Tempered and can meet DNV impactrequirements of 42 joules at -20C.

• Working Load Limit permanently shown on every shackle.• Forged - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pin. • Capacities 1/3 thru 55 metric tons. • Look for the Red Pin¨. . .the mark of genuine Crosby quality. • Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated

standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Chargedfor proof testing and certification available when requested at the timeof order.

• Hot Dip galvanized or Self-Colored.• Fatigue Rated.

Screw pin anchor shacklesmeet the performancerequirements of FederalSpecification RR-C-271DType IVA, Grade A, Class 2,except for those provisionsrequired of the contractor.

Working Nominal Load Stock No. Weight Dimensions (in.)

Size Limit Each(in.) (t)* G-209 S-209 (lbs.) A B C D E F G H L M P3/16 1/3 1018357 — .06 .38 .25 .88 .19 .60 .56 .98 1.47 .16 1.12 .191/4 1/2 1018375 1018384 .10 .47 .31 1.13 .25 .78 .61 1.28 1.84 .19 1.38 .255/16 3/4 1018393 1018400 .19 .53 .38 1.22 .31 .84 .75 1.47 2.09 .22 1.66 .31 3/8 1 1018419 1018428 .31 .66 .44 1.44 .38 1.03 .91 1.78 2.49 .25 2.03 .38 7/16 1-1/2 1018437 1018446 .38 .75 .50 1.69 .44 1.16 1.06 2.03 2.91 .31 2.38 .44 1/2 2 1018455 1018464 .72 .81 .63 1.88 .50 1.31 1.19 2.31 3.28 .38 2.69 .50 5/8 3-1/4 1018473 1018482 1.37 1.06 .75 2.38 .63 1.69 1.50 2.94 4.19 .44 3.34 .69 3/4 4-3/4 1018491 1018507 2.35 1.25 .88 2.81 .75 2.00 1.81 3.50 4.97 .50 3.97 .81 7/8 6-1/2 1018516 1018525 3.62 1.44 1.00 3.31 .88 2.28 2.09 4.03 5.83 .50 4.50 .97 1 8-1/2 1018534 1018543 5.03 1.69 1.13 3.75 1.00 2.69 2.38 4.69 6.56 .56 5.07 1.06

1-1/8 9-1/2 1018552 1018561 7.41 1.81 1.25 4.25 1.16 2.91 2.69 5.16 7.47 .63 5.59 1.25 1-1/4 12 1018570 1018589 9.50 2.03 1.38 4.69 1.29 3.25 3.00 5.75 8.25 .69 6.16 1.38 1-3/8 13-1/2 1018598 1018605 13.53 2.25 1.50 5.25 1.42 3.63 3.31 6.38 9.16 .75 6.84 1.50 1-1/2 17 1018614 1018623 17.20 2.38 1.63 5.75 1.54 3.88 3.63 6.88 10.00 .81 7.35 1.62 1-3/4 25 1018632 1018641 27.78 2.88 2.00 7.00 1.84 5.00 4.19 8.86 12.34 1.00 9.08 2.25

2 35 1018650 1018669 45.00 3.25 2.25 7.75 2.08 5.75 4.81 9.97 13.68 1.22 10.34 2.40 2-1/2 55 1018678 1018687 85.75 4.13 2.75 10.50 2.71 7.25 5.69 12.87 17.84 1.38 13.00 3.13

G-209 S-209

NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 timesthe Working Load Limit. For Working Load Limit reduction due to side loading applications, see page 75.

Screw Pin Anchor Shackles


CROSBY® BOLT-TYPE SHACKLES

• Working Load Limit permanently shown on every shackle. Capacities1/3 thru 150 metric tons.

• Forged - Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins. • Look for the Red Pin¨. . .the mark of genuine Crosby quality. • Shackles 55 metric tons and smaller can be furnished proof tested

with certificates to designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds,or other certification.

• Certification must be requested at time of order.• Shackles 85 metric tons and larger can be provided as follows.• Non Destructive Tested• Serialized Pin and Bow• Material Certification (Chemical) Certification must be requested at

time of order.• Hot Dip galvanized or Self-Colored.• Fatigue Rated.

BoltType Anchor shackles withthin head bolt - nut with cotterpin. Meets the performancerequirements of FederalSpecifications RR-C-271D typeIVA, Grade A Class 3, exceptfor those provisions requiredof the contrractor.

Working Nominal Load Stock No. Weight Dimensions (in.)

Size Limit Each(in.) (t)* G-2130 S-2130 (lbs.) A B C D E F H L N 3/16 1/3‡ 1019464 — .06 .38 .25 .88 .19 .60 .56 1.47 .98 .191/4 1/2 1019466 — .11 .47 .31 1.13 .25 .78 .61 1.84 1.28 .255/16 3/4 1019468 — .22 .53 .38 1.22 .31 .84 .75 2.09 1.47 .31 3/8 1 1019470 — .33 .66 .44 1.44 .38 1.03 .91 2.49 1.78 .38 7/16 1-1/2 1019471 — .49 .75 .50 1.69 .44 1.16 1.06 2.91 2.03 .44 1/2 2 1019472 1019481 .79 .81 .63 1.88 .50 1.31 1.19 3.28 2.31 .50 5/8 3-1/4 1019490 1019506 1.68 1.06 .75 2.38 .63 1.69 1.50 4.19 2.94 .69 3/4 4-3/4 1019515 1019524 2.72 1.25 .88 2.81 .75 2.00 1.81 4.97 3.50 .81 7/8 6-1/2 1019533 1019542 3.95 1.44 1.00 3.31 .88 2.28 2.09 5.83 1.03 .97 1 8-1/2 1019551 1019560 5.66 1.69 1.13 3.75 1.00 2.69 2.38 6.56 4.69 1.06

1-1/8 9-1/2 1019579 1019588 8.27 1.81 1.25 4.25 1.13 2.91 2.69 7.47 5.16 1.25 1-1/4 12 1019597 1019604 11.71 2.03 1.38 4.69 1.25 3.25 3.00 8.25 5.75 1.38 1-3/8 13-1/2 1019613 1019622 15.83 2.25 1.50 5.25 1.38 3.63 3.31 9.16 6.38 1.50 1-1/2 17 1019631 1019640 20.80 2.38 1.63 5.75 1.50 3.88 3.63 10.00 6.88 1.62 1-3/4 25 1019659 1019668 33.91 2.88 2.00 7.00 1.75 5.00 4.19 12.34 8.86 2.25

2 35 1019677 1019686 52.25 3.25 2.25 7.75 2.00 5.75 4.81 13.68 9.97 2.40 2-1/2 55 1019695 1019702 98.25 4.13 2.75 10.50 2.62 7.25 5.69 17.84 12.87 3.13

G-2130 S-2130

NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. ForWorking Load Limit reduction due to side loading applications, see page 75.† Individually Proof Tested with certification.‡ Furnished in Anchor style only. Furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handles.

Bolt Type Anchor Shackles


ROUND PIN SHACKLEScan be used in tie down, towing, suspension or lifting applications where the load is strictly applied in-line.

SCREW PIN SHACKLEScan be used in any application where a round pin shackle is used. In addition, screw pin shackles can be used for applicationsinvolving side-loading circumstances. Reduced working load limits are required for side-loading applications. While in service, donot allow the screw pin to be rotated by a live line, such as a choker application.

BOLT-TYPE SHACKLEScan be used in any applications where round pin or screw pin shackles are used. In addition, they are recommended for perma-nent or long term installations and where the load may slide on the shackle pin causing the pin to rotate.

QUICK-CHECK™ INFORMATIONAll Crosby Shackles, except for G-2160’s incorporate markings forged into the product which address an easy QUIC-CHECK™feature. Angle indicators are forged into the shackle bow at 45° angles from vertical. These are utilized to quickly check the approx-imate angle of a two-legged hitch or quickly check the angle of a single leg hitch when the shackle pin is secured and the pull ofthe load is off vertical or side loaded, thus requiring a reduction in the working load limit of the shackle.

CROSBY® SHACKLES—APPLICATION INFORMATION

G/S-213 G/S-215

SS-209 G-209A

G/S-209 G/S-210

G/S-2130 G/S-2150

G/S-2140

G-2130

G/S-2160

CODE NO. SIZE RANGE

G/S-213 3/16” (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2” (55 Tons) Round Pin Anchor ShackleG/S-215 3/16” (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2” (55 Tons) Round Pin Chain Shackle

CODE NO. SIZE RANGE

SS-209 3/16” (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2” (55 Tons) Stainless Steel ShackleG-209A 3/16” (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2” (55 Tons) Alloy ShacklesG/S-209 3/16” (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2” (55 Tons) Screw Pin Anchor ShackleG/S-210 3/16” (1/3 ton) to 2-1/2” (55 Tons) Screw Pin Chain Shackle

CODE NO. SIZE RANGE

G/S-2130 3/16” (1/3 ton) to 4” (150 Tons) Safety Anchor ShackleG/S-2150 3/16” (1/3 ton) to 4” (150 Tons) Bolt Type Chain ShackleG/S-2140 3/16” (30 ton) to 2-1/2” (400 Tons) Alloy Safety Anchor ShackleG/S-2160 3/16” (75 ton) to 2-1/2” (1000 Tons) Wide Body Shackle

G - GalvanizedS - Painted


Angle loads must be applied inthe plane of the bow.

Side Loading Reduction ChartFor Screw Pin and Bolt Type Shackles Only †

Angle of Side Loadfrom Vertical In-Line of Shackle Adjusted Working Load Limit

0˚ In-Line* 100% of Rated working Load Limit45˚ from In-Line* 70% of Rated Working Load Limit90˚ from In-Line* 50% of Rated Working Load Limit

*In-Line load is applied perpendicular to pin.†DO NOT SIDE LOAD ROUND PIN SHACKLES

CROSBY® SHACKLES SAFETY INFORMATION

Copyright © 2003 The Crosby Group, Inc. All rights reserved

Never Exceed 120˚ includedangle. Use bolt Type and ScrewPin Shackles ONLY.

Shackles symmetrically loadedwith two leg slings having amaximum included angle of120˚ can be utilized to fullworking Load Limit.


SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION ON PAGE 80. WARNING

CROSBY 320N HOIST HOOKS

• Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which addresstwo (2) QUIC-CHECK® features.

• Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just belowthe shank or eye and the other on the hook up, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK® measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed,thus indicating abuse or overload.

• To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch orhalf-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement doesnot meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possibledamage.

• Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowedbetween two (2) sling legs in the hook. these indicators also provide theopportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs.

Working Load HookLimit• (Tons) ID Dimensions (In.)

S-320C Carbon S-320A Alloy Code* C D F G J K M N O Q T AA3/4 1 D 3.34 2.83 1.25 .73 .90 .63 .63 .36 .89 .75 .87 1.501 1-1/2 F 3.81 3.11 1.38 .84 .93 .71 .71 .42 .91 .91 .98 2.00

1-1/2 2 G 4.14 3.53 1.50 1.00 1.00 .88 .88 .55 1.00 1.13 1.03 3.002 3 H 4.69 3.97 1.63 1.13 1.13 .94 .94 .58 1.09 1.25 1.16 2.003 5** I 5.77 4.81 2.00 1.44 1.47 1.31 1.31 .72 1.36 1.56 1.53 2.505 7 J 7.37 6.27 2.50 1.81 1.75 1.66 1.66 .90 1.61 2.00 1.96 3.00

7-1/2 11 K 9.07 7.45 3.00 2.25 2.29 1.88 1.83 1.11 2.08 2.44 2.47 4.0010 15 L 10.08 8.30 3.25 2.59 2.50 2.19 1.94 1.27 2.27 2.84 2.62 4.0015 22 N 12.53 10.30 4.25 3.00 3.30 2.69 2.38 1.56 3.02 3.50 2.83 5.0020 30 O 14.06 13.62 5.00 3.62 4.00 3.00 3.00 1.75 3.25 3.50 3.44 6.5025 37 P 18.19 14.06 5.38 4.56 4.25 4.00 3.19 2.00 3.00 4.50 3.88 7.0030 45 S 20.12 15.44 6.00 5.06 4.75 4.50 3.25 2.18 3.38 4.94 4.75 8.0040 60 T 23.72 18.50 7.00 6.00 5.75 5.50 3.91 2.53 4.12 5.69 5.69 10.00

*Eye Hooks (3/4 TC-22TA), Proof load is 2.5 times working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20T - 60TA), Proof Load is 2 times working Load Limit. All carbon hooks-average straightening loads (ultimateload) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 1 ton through 22 tons-average straightening load (ultimate load) is 5 times working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 30 tons through 60 tons-average straightening load (ultimate load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit.

CROSBY EYE HOIST HOOKS

S-320 & S-320NEYE HOOKS


CROSBY S-3322 SWIVEL HOOK

✓ Capacities:2, 3, 5, 7, 11 & 15 metrictons

✓ 4 to 1 Design Factor

✓ Contains patented QUIC-CHECK® markings forgedinto the product whichaddress two QUIC-CHECK®

features:

✓ Forged alloy hook & bail• Quenched & Tempered

✓ Replacement latches available• Heavy duty stamped latch

interlocks with hook tip.

• High cycle, long life spring

• When secured with proper cotter pin through the

hole in the tip of hook, meets the intent of OSHARule 1926.550(g) for personnel hoisting

✓ Low profile hook tip designed to utilize Crosby S-4320 or PL-N integrated latch.

CROSBY S-3322SWIVEL HOOK

New Anti-FrictionBearing DesignAllows Hook ToRotate FreelyUnder Load

S-3322 Swivel Hook Specifications

Working S-4320 PL-NLoad S-3322 Hook Weight Latch LatchLimit Stock ID Each Stock Stock(t) * No. Code (lbs.) No. No.2 1028605 G 2.5 1096421 –3 1028614 H 3.8 1096468 –5 1028623 I 7.0 1096515 10920007 1028632 J 14.0 1096562 109200111 1028641 K 22.3 1096609 109200215 1028650 L 37.8 1096657 1092003

Working Load Hook Dimensions

Limit ID (In.)

(t)* Code A B C D F G H J K L M O R S AA2 G 3.00 1.50 1.75 3.59 1.50 1.00 1.16 1.06 .88 7.64 .88 1.06 6.01 .63 2.003 H 3.50 1.56 2.00 4.00 1.62 1.13 1.31 .1.19 .94 8.60 .94 1.16 6.72 .75 2.005 I 4.00 1.56 2.25 4.84 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.50 1.31 10.32 1.13 1.41 8.00 .88 2.507 J 5.00 1.94 2.75 6.27 2.50 1.81 2.06 1.78 1.66 12.84 1.44 1.69 9.90 1.13 3.0011 K 5.62 2.05 3.12 7.54 3.00 2.25 2.63 2.14 1.88 15.24 1.63 2.22 11.74 1.25 4.0015 L 7.12 3.62 4.10 8.33 3.25 2.59 2.94 2.62 2.19 18.64 1.94 2.41 14.41 1.50 4.00

Deformation Indicators&

Angle Indicators

*NOTE: Designed with a 4 to 1 design factor. Proof Load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit.

1 thru 30 Ton Models Availablein the old style S-322A

NEW


HOOK SIZE (TONS) WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. CARBON ALLOY EA. (LBS.) A B C D E

1096325 3/4 1 .03 .94 .50 .20 .15 1.441096374 1 1-1/2 .04 1.00 .54 .22 .17 1.561096421 1-1/2 2 .04 1.09 .63 .23 .17 1.661096468 2 3 .06 1.21 .66 .28 .17 1.911096515 3 5** .10 1.53 .83 .35 .20 2.311096562 5 7 .15 1.88 1.04 .44 .20 2.881096609 7-1/2 11 .28 2.38 1.25 .53 .27 3.441096657 10 15 .33 2.62 1.35 .59 .27 3.811096704 15 22 .84 3.44 1.66 .66 .39 5.18

**New 5 ton Alloy was previous 4-1/2 ton.

NEW STYLE S-4320 FOR 320N HOOKSLatch kits shipped unassembled and individually packaged with instructions.

PL LATCH KIT HOOK SIZE (TONS) WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. CARBON ALLOY EA. (LBS.) A B C D E F

1093711 3 4-1/2 .54 2.57 2.34 1.94 .56 1.13 2.001093712 5 7 .66 3.00 2.34 2.00 .63 1.38 2.221093713 7-1/2 11 1.00 3.63 2.77 2.38 .63 1.63 2.381093714 10 15 1.25 4.00 3.22 2.69 .63 1.88 3.381093715 15 22 2.96 5.31 4.00 2.91 .84 2.38 3.441093716 20 30 4.05 6.00 4.44 3.19 1.06 2.88 4.251093717 25 37 8.673 7.00 6.63 4.06 2.24 4.50 6.121093718 30 45 10.00 6.75 7.00 4.03 2.24 4.75 6.381093719 40 60 14.30 8.00 7.66 4.38 3.46 5.50 7.251093720 50 75 27.00 9.88 8.19 5.13 3.38 6.50 8.881093721 — 100-150 33.25 10.88 11.06 6.38 3.38 7.50 10.001093723 — 200 45.00 11.88 11.19 6.38 3.38 8.75 11.251093724 — 300 55.00 12.50 12.19 8.00 3.38 9.75 13.00

Patented in USA and Canada.NOTE: The PL Latch will not work on 320N Hooks.

POSITIVE LOCKING FLAPPER LATCHPatented in U.S.A. and Canada. Heavy duty latch with easy operating features. Hot Dip galvanized. Flapper lever indicates lockedor unlocked position. Assembly instructions included with easy latch. For additional dimensional data on eye or shank hooks referto pages 79 through 85 in this section. Meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) (when secured with the bolt, nut and pin) forlifting personnel.

HOOK SIZE (TONS) WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. CARBON ALLOY BRONZE EA. (LBS.) A B C D

1090027 3/4 1 .5 .02 .38 .16 1.44 .591090045 1 1-1/2 .6 .02 .38 .16 1.60 .591090063 1-1/2 - 2 2 - 3 1.0 - 1.4 .03 .47 .19 1.84 .821090081 3 4-1.2 2.0 .06 .56 .17 2.41 1.001090107 5 7 3.5 .11 .58 .20 2.97 1.211090125 7-1.2 - 10 11 - 15 5.0 - 6.5 .17 .59 .27 3.66 1.501090143 15 22 10.0 .39 .83 .39 4.94 1.901090161 20 30 — .63 .94 .52 5.88 2.561090189 25 - 30 37 - 45 — 1.12 2.19 .39 6.50 3.841090205 40 60 — 1.77 3.31 .52 7.88 4.12

OLD STYLE SS-4055 CROSBY LATCH KIT FOR 320C HOOKSStainless steel construction with cadmium plated steel nuts. Shipped packaged and unassembled. Instructions included for easyfield assembly. Specify latch kit stock number. Specify capacity of hook to which latch will be assembled. Specify hook material(carbon or alloy).

HOOK LATCHES


ROPE WEIGHT PER DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. DIA. (IN.) 100 (LBS.) A B C D E F G H

1037256 1/8 3.50 1.94 1.31 1.06 .69 .25 .16 .05 .131037274 3/16 3.50 1.94 1.31 1.06 .69 .31 .22 .05 .131037292 1/4 3.50 1.94 1.31 1.06 .69 .38 .28 .05 .131037318 5/16 4.00 2.13 1.50 1.25 .81 .44 .34 .05 .131037336 3/8 6.70 2.38 1.63 1.47 .94 .53 .41 .06 .161037354 1/2 12.50 2.75 1.88 1.75 1.13 .69 .53 .08 .191037372 5/8 34.50 3.50 2.25 2.38 1.38 .91 .66 .13 .341037390 3/4 47.10 3.75 2.50 2.69 1.63 1.08 .78 .14 .341037416 7/8 84.60 5.00 3.50 3.19 1.88 1.27 .94 .16 .441037434 1 97.50 5.69 4.25 3.75 2.50 1.39 1.06 .16 .411037452 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 175.00 6.25 4.50 4.31 2.75 1.75 1.31 .22 .50

G-411 STANDARD WIRE ROPE THIMBLESRecommended for light duty service. Hot Dip galvanized steel. G-411 meets the performance requirements of Federal SpecificationFF-T-276b Type II, except for those provisions required of the contractor.

G-414 SS-414 DIMENSIONS (IN.)GALV. STAINLESS ROPE WEIGHT PERCODE NO. CODE NO. DIA. (IN.) 100 (LBS.) A B C D E F G H

1037639 1037960 1/4 6.50 2.19 1.63 1.50 .88 .41 .28 .06 .231037657 1037988 5/16 11.80 2.50 1.88 1.81 1.06 .50 .34 .08 .281037675 1038004 3/8 21.60 2.88 2.13 2.13 1.13 .63 .41 .11 .341037693 — 7/16 34.70 3.25 2.38 2.38 1.25 .721 .47 .13 .381037719 1038022 1/2 51.00 3.63 2.75 2.75 1.50 .81 .53 .14 .411037737 — 9/16 51.00 3.63 2.75 2.69 1.50 .88 .59 .14 .411037755 1038040 5/8 75.70 4.25 3.25 3.13 1.75 .97 .66 .16 .501037773 1038068 3/4 158.10 5.00 3.75 3.81 2.00 1.22 .78 .22 .661037791 — 7/8 177.80 5.50 4.25 4.25 2.25 1.38 .94 .22 .751037817 — 1 313.90 6.13 4.50 4.94 2.50 1.56 1.06 .25 .881037835 — 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 400.00 7.00 5.13 5.88 2.88 1.81 1.31 .25 1.131037853 — 1-1/4 - 1-3/8 811.00 9.06 6.50 6.81 3.50 2.19 1.44 .38 1.131037871 — 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 1294.80 9.00 6.25 7.13 3.50 2.56 1.56 .50 1.131037899 — 1-5/8 1700.00 11.25 8.00 8.13 4.00 2.72 1.72 .50 1.381037915 — 1-3/4 1775.00 12.19 9.00 8.50 4.50 2.84 1.84 .50 1.311037933 — 1-7/8 - 2 2775.00 15.13 12.00 10.38 6.00 3.09 2.09 .50 1.501037951 — 2-1/4 3950.00 17.13 14.00 11.88 7.00 3.63 2.38 .63 1.63

G-414 AND SS-414 EXTRA HEAVY WIRE ROPE THIMBLESA rugged rope thimble recommended for heavy duty service. Available in Hot Dip galvanized or Stainless Steel. G-414 meets theperformance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type III, except for those provisions required of the contractor. SS-414 sizes available in stainless steel type 304.

WIRE ROPE THIMBLES

SIZE OF DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LATCH NECK “N” THROAT “T”

SL-A A 9/16 - 5/8” 1-1/16 - 1-1/8SL-B B 3/4 - 13/16 1-1/4SL-C C 7/8 - 1 1-3/8 - 1-1/2SL-D D 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 1-3/4 - 1-7/8SL-E E 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 2-1/16SL-F F 1-5/8 - 1-11/16 2-1/4SL-G G 1-3/4 - 1-13/16 2-1/2

Installed cost is much less than the cost of labor alone in machining a conventional safety hook. Can be installed on any hook inminutes with only simple tools.

SPECIAL LATCHES TO FIT ANY HOOK

SIZE OF DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LATCH NECK “N” THROAT “T”

SL-H H 1-7/8 - 2 3SL-J J 2-1/16 - 2-1/8 3-3/8SL-K K 2-3/16 - 2-1/4 3-1/2SL-L L 2-5/16 - 2-3/8 3-3/4SL-M M 2-7/16 - 2-3/4 4SL-O O 3 - 3-1/4 4-1/2


IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION—READ AND FOLLOW

• Loads may disengage from hook if properprocedures are not followed.

• A falling load may cause serious injury ordeath.

• See OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) for personnelhoisting by cranes or derricks. A Crosby 319,320, or 322 hook with a PL Latch attached(when secured with bolt, nut and pin) may beused for lifting personnel. A Crosby S-320NHook with a S-4320 Latch attached (whensecured with cotter pin or bolt, nut and pin)may be used for lifting personnel.

• Threads may corrode and/or strip and dropthe load.

• Hook must always support the load.The loadmust never be supported by the latch.

• Never apply more force than the hook'sassigned Working Load Limit (WLL) rating.

• Read and understand these instructionsbefore using hook.

• A visual periodic inspection for cracks, nicks, wear, gouges and deformation as part of a comprehensive documented inspectionprogram, should be conducted by trained personnel in compliance with the schedule in ANSI B30. 10.

• For hooks used in frequent load cycles or pulsating loads, the hook and threads should be periodically inspected by MagneticParticle or Dye Penetrant. (Note: Some disassembly may be required.)

• Never use a hook whose throat opening has been increased, or whose tip has been bent more than 10 degrees out of planefrom the hook body, or is in any other way distorted or bent. Note: A latch will not work properly on a hook with a bent orworn tip.

• Never use a hook that is worn beyond the limits shown in Figure 1.

• Remove from service any hook with a crack, nick, or gouge. Hooks with a crack, nick, or gouge shall be repaired by grindinglengthwise, following the contour of the hook, provided that the reduced dimension is within the limits shown in Figure 1.

• Never repair, alter, rework, or reshape a hook by welding, heating, burning, or bending.

• Never side load, back load, or tip load a hook. (See Figure 2.)

• Eye hooks, shank hooks and swivel hooks are designed to be used with wire rope or chain. Efficiency of assembly may bereduced when used with synthetic mate-rial.

• Do not swivel the S-322 swivel hookwhile it is supporting a load.

• The use of a latch may be mandatory byregulations or safety codes; e.g., OSHA,MSHA, ANSI/ASME B30, Insurance,etc.. (Note: When using latches, seeinstructions in "Understanding: TheCrosby Group Warnings" for furtherinformation.)

• Always make sure the hook supports theload. (See Figure 3). The latch must never support the load (See Figure 4).

• When placing two (2) sling legs in hook, make sure the angle from the vertical to the outermost leg is not greater than 45degrees, and the included angle between the legs does not exceed 90 degrees* (See Figure 5).

• See ANSI/ASME B30.10 "Hooks" for additional information.

*For angles greater than 90 degrees, or more than two (2) legs, a master link or bolt type anchor shackle should be used to attachthe legs of the sling to the hook.

CROSBY HOIST HOOK WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

S-319 S-320

S-320N S-322

FIGURE 2

FIGURE 1

FIGURE 3 FIGURE 4 FIGURE 5


WORKING LOAD WEIGHTCODE NO. SIZE (IN.) LIMIT* (LBS.) EACH (LBS.)


WORKING LOAD WIRE ROPE WEIGHTCODE NO. LIMIT* METRIC TONS TYPE SIZE (IN.) LBS. EACH

297011 3-S-1 3 1/2 9.81297020 3-S-2 3 1/2 9.63297039 3-S-3 3 1/2 9.12297048 3-S-4 3 1/2 9.00297057 3-S-5 3 1/2 8.50297066 3-S-6 3 1/2 9.32297217 5-S-1 5 5/8 15.51297226 5-S-2 5 5/8 13.69297235 5-S-3 5 5/8 13.50297244 5-S-4 5 5/8 12.33297253 5-S-5 5 5/8 11.30297262 5-S-6 5 5/8 14.24297413 8-1/2-S-1 8-1/2 3/4 29.42297422 8-1/2-S-2 8-1/2 3/4 26.16297431 8-1/2-S-3 8-1/2 3/4 24.90297440 8-1/2-S-4 8-1/2 3/4 29.00297459 8-1/2-S-5 8-1/2 3/4 29.25297468 8-1/2-S-6 8-1/2 3/4 32.00297618 10-S-1 10 7/8 46.75297627 10-S-2 10 7/8 45.75297636 10-S-3 10 7/8 43.50297645 10-S-4 10 7/8 44.00297654 10-S-5 10 7/8 42.00297663 10-S-6 10 7/8 45.50

WORKING LOAD WIRE ROPE WEIGHTCODE NO. LIMIT* METRIC TONS TYPE SIZE (IN.) LBS. EACH

297814 15-S-1 15 1 73.75297823 15-S-2 15 1 62.75297832 15-S-3 15 1 61.00297841 15-S-4 15 1 61.00297850 15-S-5 15 1 49.00297869 15-S-6 15 1 63.00298118 25-S-1 25 — 140.00298127 25-S-2 25 — 140.00298136 25-S-3 25 — 135.00298145 25-S-4 25 — 135.00298154 25-S-5 25 — 130.00298163 25-S-6 25 — 135.00298216 35-S-1 35 — 220.00298225 35-S-2 35 — 155.00298234 35-S-3 35 — 150.00298243 35-S-4 35 — 150.00298252 35-S-5 35 — 145.00298261 35-S-6 35 — 215.00298314 45-S-1 45 — 251.00298323 45-S-2 45 — 235.00298332 45-S-3 45 — 225.00298341 45-S-4 45 — 225.00298350 45-S-5 45 — 215.00298369 45-S-6 45 — 270.00

TIMKEN BEARING EQUIPPED SWIVELS

1016019 1/4 850 .211016037 5/16 1250 .391016055 3/8 2250 .711016073 1/2 3600 1.321016091 5/8 5200 2.49

1016117 3/4 7200 4.021016135 7/8 10000 6.251016153 1 12500 8.951016188 1-1/4 18000 16.371016215 1-1/2 45200 45.79



1016395 1/4 850 .211016411 5/16 1250 .341016439 3/8 2250 .661016457 1/2 3600 1.341016475 5/8 5200 2.48

1016493 3/4 7200 3.881016518 7/8 10000 5.871016536 1 12500 9.841016572 1-1/4 18000 15.751016590 1-1/2 45200 54.75

Hot dip galvanized. Quenched and Tempered. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Spec. RR-C-271D, Type VII, Class2, except for those provisions required of the contractor. NOTE: Ultimate Load is 5 times the Safe Working Load.

Load Rated®. All hooks furnished with latches assembled. All jaws complete with bolts, nuts and cotter pins. Sealed for pressurelubrication. Cadmium plated through 15 ton sizes. Larger capacities available through 45 tons. NOTE: Individually Proof Tested totwice the Safe Working Load. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Safe Working Load. Also available in wedge socket type.

G-402 REGULAR SWIVEL

Hot dip galvanized. Quenched and Tempered. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Spec. RR-C-271D, Type VII, Class3, except for those provisions required of the contractor. NOTE: Ultimate Load is 5 times the Safe Working Load.

G-403 JAW END SWIVEL

CROSBY SWIVELS

S-1JAW & HOOK

S-2JAW & JAW

S-3JAW & EYE

S-4EYE & JAW

S-5EYE & EYE

S-6EYE & HOOK

Note: NOT INTENDED TO SWIVEL UNDER LOAD.

Note: NOT INTENDED TO SWIVEL UNDER LOAD.


WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) EA. (LBS.) A B C D E F G H I AA

1016001 .45 1/8 .7 .88 .25 .25 .38 .41 4.25 2.88 .88 .75 1.501016010 .75 1/4 .9 1.31 .38 .31 .44 .56 5.38 3.19 .97 .84 1.501016025 1.5 3/8 2.3 1.63 .50 .50 .69 .78 6.25 4.09 1.13 1.13 1.501016026 3.0 1/2 6.5 2.00 .75 .75 .94 1.19 8.63 4.94 1.06 1.44 2.501016040 5.0 5/8 12.9 2.50 .88 1.00 1.13 1.53 10.69 6.50 1.81 1.81 3.001016045 8.5 3/4 26.4 3.00 1.19 1.56 1.34 2.09 13.69 8.69 1.91 2.59 4.001016056 10 7/8 53.0 4.00 1.50 1.75 1.75 3.50 17.75 11.00 2.75 3.00 5.001016064 15 1 53.0 4.00 1.50 1.75 1.75 3.50 17.75 11.00 2.75 3.00 5.001016075 25 1-1/4 97.0 5.00 2.00 2.00 2.38 3.69 20.88 13.63 3.38 3.63 6.501016082 35 1-1/2 140.0 5.00 2.00 2.00 2.38 3.69 24.00 14.06 3.00 4.56 7.00

AS-1 JAW AND HOOKUltimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) EA. (LBS.) A B C D E F G H

1016103 .45 1/8 .4 .88 2.38 3.13 .38 .25 .25 .19 .411016114 .75 1/4 .9 1.31 3.56 4.44 .44 .31 .38 .22 .561016122 1.5 3/8 2.0 1.63 4.06 5.44 .69 .50 .50 .28 .781016131 3.0 1/2 4.9 2.00 6.25 8.13 .94 .75 .75 .38 1.191016139 5.0 5/8 9.6 2.50 7.75 10.63 1.13 1.00 .88 .53 1.531016148 8.5 3/4 15.8 3.00 9.63 12.31 1.34 1.56 1.19 .56 2.091016157 10 7/8 40.0 4.00 14.00 17.50 1.75 1.75 1.50 .81 3.501016166 15 1 40.0 4.00 14.00 17.50 1.75 1.75 1.50 .81 3.501016175 25 1-1/4 78.0 5.00 15.94 20.69 2.38 2.00 2.03 1.13 3.691016184 35 1-1/2 78.0 5.00 15.94 20.69 2.38 2.00 2.03 1.13 3.69

AS-2 JAW & JAWUltimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE EA. DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) (LBS.) A B C D E F G H I J K L

1016205 .45 1/8 .3 .88 2.50 3.25 .25 .19 .25 .38 .41 .25 .25 .38 .841016216 .75 1/4 .9 1.31 3.69 4.56 .31 .22 .38 .44 .56 .31 .38 .44 .881016224 1.5 3/8 1.9 1.63 4.19 5.44 .50 .28 .50 .69 .78 .50 .66 .63 1.381016232 3.0 1/2 4.6 2.00 6.19 8.13 .75 .38 .75 .94 1.19 .75 .91 1.00 2.001016243 5.0 5/8 9.1 2.50 7.88 10.19 1.00 .53 .88 1.13 1.50 1.00 1.25 1.19 2.631016250 8.5 3/4 15.6 3.00 9.50 12.25 1.56 .56 1.25 1.34 2.09 1.25 1.41 1.50 3.131016259 10 7/8 39.0 4.00 13.75 17.31 1.75 .81 1.50 1.75 3.50 2.00 1.63 1.81 4.691016268 15 1 40.0 4.00 13.44 17.31 1.75 .81 1.50 1.75 3.50 2.00 2.00 2.13 4.691016277 25 1-1/4 78.0 5.00 16.00 20.75 2.00 1.13 2.00 2.38 3.69 2.25 3.31 2.38 5.251016286 35 1-1/2 78.0 5.00 16.00 20.75 2.00 1.13 2.00 2.38 3.69 2.25 2.31 2.38 5.25

AS-3 JAW & EYEUltimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

Wide range of products available. Capacity: .45 through 35 tons. Wire Rope Sizes: 1/8” through 1-1/2”. Models: 7 standard config-urations. Angular contact bearings maximize efficiency, reliability and service life of swivel and extend the life of the wire rope.Designed for high rotation speed: Lower torque required to initiate rotation. Individually Proof Tested to 2 times the Working LoadLimit with certification. Hook models utilize genuine Crosby hooks which are forged alloy steel, Quenched and Tempered and con-tain the patented QUIC-CHECK™ markings. Design Factor of 5 to 1. Entire swivel is Zinc plated to resist corrosion.

CROSBY® ANGULAR CONTACT BEARING SWIVELS


CROSBY® ANGULAR CONTACT BEARING SWIVELS

WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE EA. DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) (LBS.) A B C D E F G H I J K L

1016306 .45 1/8 .3 .88 2.50 3.25 .25 .19 .25 .38 .41 .25 .25 .38 .811016314 .75 1/4 .9 1.31 3.63 4.56 .31 .22 .38 .44 .56 .31 .38 .44 .881016325 1.5 3/8 1.9 1.63 4.19 5.50 .50 .28 .50 .69 .78 .50 .66 .63 1.341016332 3.0 1/2 4.6 2.00 6.19 8.13 .75 .38 .75 .94 1.19 .75 .91 1.00 2.001016343 5.0 5/8 9.1 2.50 7.88 10.19 1.00 .53 .88 1.13 1.44 1.00 1.25 1.19 2.631016352 8.5 3/4 15.7 3.00 9.44 12.25 1.56 .56 1.19 1.34 2.09 1.25 1.41 1.50 3.131016361 10 7/8 39.0 4.00 14.13 17.75 1.75 .81 1.50 1.75 3.50 1.72 1.66 1.81 4.691016370 15 1 40.0 4.00 13.81 17.75 1.75 .81 1.50 1.75 3.50 2.00 2.03 2.13 4.691016375 25 1-1/4 75.0 5.00 15.94 20.75 2.00 1.13 2.31 2.38 3.69 2.25 2.31 2.38 5.251016379 35 1-1/2 75.0 5.00 15.94 20.75 2.00 1.13 2.31 2.38 3.69 2.25 2.31 2.38 5.25

AS-4 EYE & JAWUltimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) EA. (LBS.) A B C D E F G

1016409 .45 1/8 .3 .88 2.63 3.38 .38 .25 .25 .811016418 .75 1/4 .9 1.31 3.75 4.63 .44 .31 .38 .881016427 1.5 3/8 1.8 1.63 4.31 5.56 .63 .50 .66 1.341016436 3.0 1/2 4.3 2.00 6.13 8.13 1.00 .75 .91 2.001016445 5.0 5/8 8.6 2.50 7.75 10.63 1.19 1.00 1.25 2.631016454 8.5 3/4 15.4 3.00 9.31 12.31 1.50 1.25 1.41 3.131016463 10 7/8 37.0 4.00 13.88 17.50 1.81 1.72 1.63 4.691016472 15 1 39.0 4.00 13.25 17.50 2.13 2.00 2.13 4.691016481 25 1-1/4 72.0 5.00 16.00 20.75 2.38 2.25 2.31 5.251016490 35 1-1/2 72.0 5.00 18.00 20.75 2.38 2.25 2.31 5.25

AS-5 EYE & EYEUltimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.)EA. (LBS.) A B C D E F G H AA

1016502 .45 1/8 .7 .88 4.31 2.88 .88 .25 .81 .25 .75 1.501016513 .75 1/4 1.5 1.31 5.50 3.19 .97 .38 .88 .31 .84 1.501016520 1.5 3/8 2.9 1.63 6.13 4.09 1.13 .66 1.34 .50 1.13 1.501016529 3.0 1/2 6.2 2.00 8.56 4.94 1.06 .91 2.00 .75 1.55 2.501016538 5.0 5/8 12.4 2.50 10.75 6.50 1.81 1.25 2.63 1.00 1.81 3.001016547 8.5 3/4 23.5 3.00 13.56 8.69 1.90 1.40 3.13 1.25 2.59 4.001016556 10 7/8 52.0 4.00 17.88 11.00 2.75 1.66 4.69 1.72 3.00 5.001016565 15 1 53.0 4.00 17.44 11.00 2.75 2.03 4.69 2.00 3.00 5.001016574 25 1-1/4 94.0 5.00 20.88 13.63 3.38 2.34 5.25 2.25 3.63 6.501016583 35 1-1/2 138.0 5.00 24.00 14.06 3.00 2.34 5.25 2.25 4.63 7.00

AS-6 EYE & HOOKUltimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

WORKING LOAD WIRE LINE DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LIMIT (TONS) SIZE (IN.) EA. (LBS.) A B C D E F G

1016604 .45 1/8 .4 .88 2.38 3.13 .38 .25 .31 .401016611 .75 1/4 1.1 1.31 3.56 4.44 .44 .31 .38 .561016622 1.5 3/8 1.8 1.63 4.06 5.19 .56 .50 .44 .811016631 3.0 1/2 3.8 2.00 5.44 7.06 .81 .75 .63 .941016640 5.0 5/8 8.0 2.50 7.75 10.06 1.13 1.00 .88 1.561016649 8.5 3/4 14.5 3.00 9.88 12.38 1.25 1.31 1.00 2.131016652 10 7/8 40.0 4.00 13.13 16.75 1.75 1.75 1.50 3.251016658 15 1 40.0 4.00 13.13 16.75 1.75 1.75 1.50 3.251016662 25 1-1/4 84.0 5.00 15.94 20.75 2.38 2.00 2.00 3.691016667 35 1-1/2 84.0 5.00 15.94 20.75 2.38 2.00 2.00 3.69

AS-7 BULLET STYLE JAW & JAWUltimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.


SINGLE WORKING WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)PART ROPE LOAD EACH

CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) LIMIT (LBS.) (LBS.) A B C D E F G H L P R

1028042 3/8 2500 0.77 2.06 1.13 .63 2.41 .63 .38 .84 .91 4.28 2.59 .631028060 1/2 3300 1.19 2.25 1.31 .75 2.97 .78 .50 .97 1.06 4.97 3.09 .751028088 5/8 5000 2.89 3.06 1.63 .75 3.56 .94 .56 1.13 1.31 6.38 3.88 1.001028122 3/4 8000 2.95 3.38 2.13 1.00 4.25 1.16 .63 1.44 1.63 7.66 4.56 1.135108710 7/8 - 1 20,680 11.5 4.50 1.25 2.00 .88 9.32 1.505108705 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 31,960 30 5.63 2.13 1.75 1.25 13.1 1.75

A-350 SLIDING CHOKER HOOKSForged Alloy Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. When ordering, EYE diameter “C”should be specified.

WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN.)HOOK LOAD WEIGHT

CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) LIMIT (LBS.) EACH (LBS.) A B C D E F L R

1023056 7/16 750 .23 .25 .75 .75 .44 2.25 .75 3.94 3.251023074 9/16 1000 .52 .34 1.12 .81 .56 2.69 .88 4.75 3.84

G-3315 SNAP HOOKSForged Carbon Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Pressed steel latches and stainless steel springs, bolts and nuts. For replacementlatch kit, order Code No. 9900299. Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.

S-3316 WORKING WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. LOAD EACH

S.C. LIMIT (LBS.) (LBS.) A B C D H L O P R T

1023029 1/2 1.25 1.31 .76 .56 3.19 .38 6.12 .97 2.25 4.59 .811023047 1 2.61 1.56 1.00 .69 4.09 .44 7.69 1.12 2.84 5.81 1.19

S-3316 REPLACEMENT HOOKEasily attached to any chain and electric hoist with welded link load chain, roller chain or wire rope with suitable end fitting. Swiveljaw is forged. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

CODE NO. CODE NO. WORKING WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)PER PAIR PER PAIR LOAD LIMIT EACH I.D. O.D. OVERALL WIDTHG-377 GALV. S-377 S.C. PER PAIR (TONS) PER PAIR (LBS.) OF EYE OF EYE LENGTH OF LIP

1028239 1028248 1 3.56 1.56 2.81 5.00 2.88

G-377 AND S-377 BARREL HOOKSForged Carbon Steel. Galvanized. Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D, Type V, Class 6,except for those provisions required of the contractor. Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.

WORKING WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN.)LOAD LIMIT LOAD LIMIT WEIGHT OPENING RADIUS ATAT TIP OF AT BOTTOM OF EACH I.D. OVERALL AT TOP OF BOTTOM OF

CODE NO. HOOK (TONS) HOOK (TONS) (LBS.) OF EYE LENGTH HOOK HOOK

1028024 2 7-1/2 6.42 1.38 9.69 2.81 .625

A-378 SORTING HOOKForged Alloy Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Deep straight throat permits efficient handling of flat plates or large cylindricalshapes.The long tapered point allows easy grab in rings, pear links, eye bolts or lifting holes.. Ultimate Load is 5 times the WorkingLoad Limit.

SPECIAL HOOKS


WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN.) DIA. HOLECHAIN LOAD WEIGHT TO ACCEPT

CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) LIMIT (LBS.) EACH (LBS.) A B C D E LINK

1014397 1/4 3250 .24 .31 2.06 1.69 .78 .78 .501014413 3/8 6600 .58 .45 2.72 2.31 1.06 1.09 .661014431 1/2 11250 1.20 .58 3.34 3.16 1.28 1.41 .881014459 5/8 16500 2.42 .78 3.91 3.94 1.56 1.69 1.061014477 3/4 23000 2.89 .89 4.84 4.44 1.97 2.00 1.191014495 7/8 28750 6.08 1.00 5.81 5.31 2.38 2.12 1.381014510 1 38750 7.03 1.08 6.48 6.07 2.84 2.55 1.471014538 1-1/4 57500 13.20 1.38 8.48 7.65 3.77 3.77 1.73

A-336 LOK-A-LOY® 6 CONNECTING LINKIndividually proof tested. Forged alloy steel. Quenched and tempered. Easy to assemble. Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working LoadLimit. Wider openings than G-80 Links.

WORKING WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)CHAIN LOAD EACH

CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) LIMIT (LBS.) (LBS.) A B C D E F G H L N P R

1013021 1/4 2600 .38 .50 .75 .50 .31 .38 .75 1.00 .81 2.81 1.38 1.66 1.501013049 5/16 - 3/8 5400 .81 .56 1.00 .63 .44 .47 1.00 1.19 1.00 3.53 1.75 2.25 1.911013067 7/16 7000 1.25 .69 1.13 .69 .56 .59 1.09 1.31 1.19 4.06 2.00 2.50 2.191013085 1/2 9200 1.56 .81 1.25 .75 .63 .66 1.25 1.44 1.31 4.53 2.25 2.75 2.47

S-247 DOUBLE CLEVIS LINKDesigned for linking all popular sizes of Crosby Spectrum 3® and Spectrum 4® chain to rings, end links, eye hooks, pad eyes, trac-tor eyebolts, etc. All pins Alloy Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Body is forged and heat treated carbon steel. Features quick andeasy assembly. Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.

WEIGHT PER DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. SIZE NO. 100 (LBS.) B C D E G H L

1090722 0 2.80 .25 .19 .63 .31 .63 .09 .751090740 1 6.50 .38 .25 .88 .41 .88 .13 1.031090768 1-1/2 10.40 .63 .25 1.00 .44 1.13 .16 1.311090786 2 21.10 .75 .38 1.06 .50 1.50 .19 1.631090802 4 52.20 1.00 .56 1.44 .78 2.13 .22 2.341090820 5 82.50 1.25 .69 1.75 .81 2.63 .25 2.75

S-264 PAD EYESForged Steel. Quenched and tempered. Forged from 1035 Carbon Steel. Excellent welding qualities. Widely used on farm machin-ery, trucks, steel hulled marine vessels and material handling equipment. Reference American Welding Society specifications forproper welding procedures. S-264 meets the requirements of Military Specification MS-51930A.

WORKING DIMENSIONS (IN.)STOCK STD. LOAD WEIGHT

SIZE SIZE TAP LIMIT EACHCODE NO. NO. (IN.) S SIZE (LBS.) (LBS.) A C D E F J M T

1090438 1 .25 1/4 520 .09 1.25 .75 1.06 .66 .50 .69 .25 1.691090474 2 .31 3/8 1250 .17 1.63 1.00 1.25 .75 .56 .81 .38 2.061090517 3A .38 1/2 2250 .28 2.00 1.25 1.50 1.00 .81 1.00 .50 2.501090535 4 .50 5/8 3600 .60 2.50 1.50 2.00 1.19 1.00 1.31 .63 3.191090553 5 .63 3/4 5200 1.00 3.00 1.75 2.38 1.38 1.13 1.50 .75 3.881090571 6 .75 7/8 7200 1.65 3.50 2.00 2.63 1.63 1.31 1.88 .88 4.311090599 7 .88 1 10000 2.69 4.00 2.25 3.06 1.88 1.56 2.13 1.00 5.001090633 8 1.00 1-1/4 15500 3.87 4.50 2.50 3.50 1.94 1.88 2.38 1.25 5.751090651 9 1.13 1-3/8 18500 5.00 5.00 2.75 3.75 2.00 2.00 2.56 1.38 6.251090679 10 1.25 1-1/2 22500 6.78 5.63 3.13 4.00 2.38 2.25 3.00 1.50 6.751090697 11 1.50 2 40000 14.60 7.00 4.00 6.25 4.00 3.38 4.00 2.00 10.00

G-400 EYE NUTSForged Steel. Quenched and tempered. Hot Dip galvanized. Tapped with standard UNC class 2 threads after galvanizing. UltimateLoad is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Rating based on standard tap size.

COUPLING LINKS • PAD EYES • EYE NUTS

SHANK WORKING WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)DIA. & LOAD PER

LENGTH LIMIT 100CODE NO. (IN.) (LBS.) (LBS.) A B C D E F G H

1043230 1/4 x 2 650 8.20 .25 .50 1 00 .25 1.50 2.00 3.06 .561043258 1/4 x 4 650 11.70 .25 .50 1.00 .25 2.50 4.00 5.06 .561043276 5/16 x 2-1/4 1200 13.30 .31 .62 1.25 .31 1.50 2.25 3.56 .691043294 5/16 x 4-1/4 1200 25.00 .31 .62 1.25 .31 2.50 4.25 5.56 .691043310 3/8 x 2-1/2 1200 25.00 .31 .62 1.25 .31 2.50 4.25 5.56 .691043338 3/8 x 4-1/2 1550 23.30 .38 .75 1.50 .38 1.50 2.50 4.12 .881043356 3/8 x 6 1550 29.50 .38 .75 1.50 .38 2.50 4.50 6.12 .881043374 1/2 x 3-1/4 1550 35.20 .38 .75 1.50 .38 2.50 6.00 7.62 .881043392 1/2 x 6 2600 50.30 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 1.50 3.25 5.38 1.121043418 1/2 x 8 2600 66.10 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 6.00 8.12 1.121043436 1/2 x 10 2600 82.00 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 8.00 10.12 1.121043454 1/2 x 12 2600 88.00 .50 1 00 2.00 .50 3.00 10.00 12.12 1.121043472 5/8 x 4 2600 114.20 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 12.00 14.12 1.121043490 5/8 x 6 5200 103.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 2.00 4.00 6.69 1.441043515 5/8 x 8 5200 118.20 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 6.00 8.69 1.441043533 5/8 x 10 5200 135.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 8.00 10.69 1.441043551 5/8 x 12 5200 153.60 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 10.00 12.69 1.441043579 3/4 x 4-1/2 5200 167.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 4.00 12.00 14.69 1.441043597 3/4 x 6 7200 168.60 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 2.00 14.50 7.69 1.691043613 3/4 x 8 7200 184.50 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 16.00 9.19 1.691043631 3/4 x 10 7200 207.90 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 18.00 11.19 1.691043659 3/4 x 12 7200 235.00 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 10.00 13.19 1.691043677 3/4 x 15 7200 257.50 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 4.00 12.00 15.19 1.691043695 7/8 x 5 7200 298.00 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 5.00 15.00 18.19 1.691043711 7/8 x 8 10600 270.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 2.50 5.00 8.75 2.001043739 7/8 x 12 10600 308.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 4.00 8.00 11.75 2.001043757 1 x 6 10600 400.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 4.00 12.00 15.75 2.001043775 1 x 9 13300 421.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 3.00 6.00 10.31 2.311043793 1 x 12 13300 468.50 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 4.00 9.00 13.31 2.311043819 1 x 18 13300 540.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1 00 4.00 12.00 22.31 2.311043837 1-1/4 x 8 13300 650.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1 00 7.00 18.00 22.31 2.311043855 1-1/4 x 12 21000 750.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 4.00 8.00 13.38 2.881043873 1-1/4 x 20 21000 900.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 4.00 12.00 17.38 2.88

G-291 REGULAR NUT EYE BOLTRecommended for straight line pull. All Bolts Hot Dip galvanized after threading (UNC). Furnished with standard Hot Dip galva-nized hex nuts. Forged Steel. Quenched and Tempered. Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles.Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Working Load Limit shown is for in-line pull.

SHANK WORKING WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)DIA. & LOAD PER

LENGTH LIMIT 100CODE NO. (IN.) (LBS.) (LBS.) A B C D E F G H J

1045014 1/4 x 2 650 6.60 .25 .50 .88 .19 1.50 2.00 2.94 .50 .471045032 1/4 x 4 650 9.10 .25 .50 .88 .19 2.50 4.00 4.94 .50 .471045050 5/16 x 2-1/4 1200 12.50 .31 .62 1.12 .25 1.50 2.25 3.50 .69 .561045078 5/16 x 4-1/4 1200 18.80 .31 .62 1.12 .25 2.50 4.25 5.50 .69 .561045096 3/8 x 2-1/2 1550 21.40 .38 .75 1.38 .31 1.50 2.50 3.97 .78 .661045112 3/8 x 4-1/2 1550 25.30 .38 .75 1.38 .31 2.50 4.50 5.97 .78 .661045130 1/2 x 3-1/4 2600 142.60 .50 1.00 1.75 .38 1.50 3.25 5.12 1.00 .911045158 1/2 x 6 2600 56.80 .50 1.00 1.75 .38 3.00 6.00 7.88 1.00 .911045176 5/8 x 4 5200 168.60 .62 1.25 2.25 .50 2.00 4.00 6.44 1.31 1.121045194 5/8 x 6 5200 102.40 .62 1.25 2.25 .50 3.00 6.00 8.44 1.31 1.121045210 3/4 x 4-1/2 7200 144.50 .75 1.50 2.75 .62 2.00 4.50 7.44 1.56 1.381045238 3/4 x 6 7200 167.50 .75 1.50 2.75 .62 3.00 6.00 8.94 1.56 1.381045256 7/8 x 5 10600 225.00 .88 1.75 3.25 .75 2.50 5.00 8.46 1.84 1.561045292 1 x 6 13300 366.30 1.00 2.00 3.75 .88 3.00 6.00 9.97 2.09 1.811045318 1 x 9 13300 422.50 1.00 2.00 3.75 .88 4.00 9.00 12.97 2.09 1.811045336 1-1/4 x 8 21000 650.00 1.25 2.50 4.50 1.00 4.00 8.00 12.72 2.47 2.281045354 1-1/4 x 12 21000 795.00 1.25 2.50 4.50 1.00 4.00 12.00 16.72 2.47 2.281045372 1-1/2 x 15 24000 1425.00 1.50 3.00 5.50 1.25 6.00 15.00 20.75 3.00 2.75

G-277 SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLTSForged Steel. All bolts Hot Dip galvanized after threading (UNC). Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized, heavy hex nuts.Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. WorkingLoad Limit shown is for in-line pull.

FORGED EYE BOLTS


1043230 1/4 x 2 650 8.20 .25 .50 1.00 .25 1.50 2.00 3.06 .561043258 1/4 x 4 650 11.70 .25 .50 1.00 .25 2.50 4.00 5.06 .561043276 5/16 x 2-1/4 1200 13.30 .31 .62 1.25 .31 1.50 2.25 3.56 .691043294 5/16 x 4-1/4 1200 25.00 .31 .62 1.25 .31 2.50 4.25 5.56 .691043310 3/8 x 2-1/2 1550 23.30 .38 .75 1.50 .38 1.50 2.50 4.12 .881043338 3/8 x 4-1/2 1550 29.50 .38 .75 1.50 .38 2.50 4.50 6.12 .881043356 3/8 x 6 1550 35.20 .38 .75 1.50 .38 2.50 6.00 7.62 .881043374 1/2 x 3-1/4 2600 50.30 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 1.50 3.25 5.38 1.121043392 1/2 x 6 2600 66.10 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 6.00 8.12 1.121043418 1/2 x 8 2600 82.00 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 8.00 10.12 1.121043436 1/2 x 10 2600 88.00 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 10.00 12.12 1.121043454 1/2 x 12 2600 114.20 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 12.00 14.12 1.121043472 5/8 x 4 5200 103.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 2.00 4.00 6.69 1.441043490 5/8 x 6 5200 118.20 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 6.00 8.69 1.441043515 5/8 x 8 5200 135.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 8.00 10.69 1.441043533 5/8 x 10 5200 153.60 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 10.00 12.69 1.441043551 5/8 x 12 5200 167.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 4.00 12.00 14.69 1.441043579 3/4 x 4-1/2 7200 168.60 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 2.00 14.50 7.69 1.691043597 3/4 x 6 7200 184.50 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 16.00 9.19 1.691043613 3/4 x 8 7200 207.90 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 18.00 11.19 1.691043631 3/4 x 10 7200 235.00 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 10.00 13.19 1.691043659 3/4 x 12 7200 257.50 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 4.00 12.00 15.19 1.691043677 3/4 x 15 7200 298.00 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 5.00 15.00 18.19 1.691043695 7/8 x 5 10600 270.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 2.50 5.00 8.75 2.001043711 7/8 x 8 10600 308.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 4.00 8.00 11.75 2.001043739 7/8 x 12 10600 400.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 4.00 12.00 15.75 2.001043757 1 x 6 13300 41.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 3.00 6.00 10.31 2.311043775 1 x 9 13300 4688.50 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 4.00 9.00 13.31 2.311043793 1 x 12 13300 540.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 4.00 12.00 22.31 2.311043819 1 x 18 13300 650.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.0 7.00 18.00 22.31 2.311043837 1-1/4 x 8 21000 750.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 4.00 8.00 13.38 2.881043855 1-1/4 x 12 21000 900.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 4.00 12.00 17.38 2.881043873 1-1/4 x 20 21000 1210.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 6.00 20.00 25.38 2.88


THREAD SIZE SHANK I.D. O.D. APPROX. WT. RATEDCODE NO. UNC-2A A LENGTH EYE EYE PER 100 PCS. CAPACITY

MEB140 1/4 - 20 1 1-3/16 5 650MEB516 5/16 - 18 1-1/8 7/8 1-7/16 9.6 1,200MEB380 3/8 - 16 1-1/4 1 1-11/16 16 1,550MEB716 7/16 - 14 1-3/8 1-3/32 1-13/16 24.2 2,000MEB120 1/2 - 13 1-1/2 1-3/16 2-1/8 34.8 2,600MEB916 9/16 - 12 1-3/4 1-3/8 2-9/16 47 3,200MEB580 5/8 - 11 1-3/4 1-3/8 2-9/16 67 5,200MEB340 3/4 - 10 2 1-1/2 2-13/16 100 7,200MEB780 7/8 - 9 2-1/4 1-11/16 3-3/16 163 10,600MEB100 1 - 8 2-1/2 1-13/16 3-9/16 222 13,300MEB118 1-1/8 - 7 2-3/4 2 4-1/16 340 17,000MEB114 1-1/4 - 7 3 2-3/16 4-7/16 444 21,000MEB112 1-1/2 - 6 3-1/2 2-1/2 5-3/16 736 24,000MEB134 1-3/4 - 5 3-3/4 2-7/8 6 1,135 32,000MEB200 2- - 4-1/2 4 3-1/4 6-7/8 1,670 40,000

NOTE: Proof tested in accordance with ASTM A489 and Federal Spec. ANSI B18.15. Traceability and Mechanicaltest values are available with each shipment.

SAE SHOULDER PATTERN

SHOULDER PATTERN MAX LOAD LBS.THREAD SIZE STRAIGHT 45° PULL 90° PULL

NC2A PULL X Y Z

1/4 - 20 650 162 1305/16 - 18 1,200 300 2403/8 - 16 1,550 387 3107/16 - 14 2,000 500 4001/2 - 13 2,600 650 5209/16 - 20 3,200 800 6405/8 - 11 5,200 1,300 1,0403/4 - 10 7,200 1,800 1,4407/8 - 9 10,600 2,650 2,1201 - 8 13,300 3,325 2,660

1-1/8 - 7 17,000 4,250 3,4001-1/4 - 7 21,000 5,250 4,2001-1/2 - 6 24,000 6,000 4,8001-3/4 - 5 32,000 8,000 6,4002 - 4-1/2 40,000 10,000 8,000

NOTE: Plain pattern also available.

Angular lifts should be avoided whenever possible. Eye Bolts up to 2-1/2” diameter also available. Stainless Steel Eye Bolts alsoavailable. Charts assume that shoulder is securely seated against the load or anchor.

Forged carbon steel. Self colored. Please include stock number and size when ordering.Galvanized Eye Bolts available on request. Metric sizes also available.

MACHINERY EYE BOLTS

SAFE WORKING LOADS

EXAMPLE:A 1/2” eye bolt in a straight pull has the same strength,

2,600 lbs., as the 1” eye bolt at a 90° pull.

3/4


TABLE 1 (IN-LINE LOAD)SIZE (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.)

INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SAFETY:

1/4 6505/16 1,2003/8 1,5501/2 2,6005/8 5,2003/4 7,2007/8 10,6001 13,300

1-1/4 2 ,0001-1/2 24,000

• Always inspect eye bolt before use.• Never use eye bolt that shows signs of wear or damage.• Never use eye bolt if eye or shank is bent or elongated.• Always be sure threads on shank and receiving holes are clean.• Never machine, grind, or cut eye bolt.

ASSEMBLY SAFETY:• Never exceed load limits specified in Table 1.• Never use regular nut eye bolts for angular lifts.• Always use shoulder nut eye bolts (or machinery eye bolts) for angular lifts.• For angular lifts, adjust working load as follows:

• Never undercut eye bolt to seat shoulder against the load.• Always countersink receiving hole or use washers to seat shoulder.• Always screw eye bolt down completely for proper seating.• Always tighten nuts securely against the load.

SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLTINSTALLATION FOR ANGULAR LOADING

FORGED EYE BOLT APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

• Loads may slip or fall if proper Hoist Ring assembly and lifting proceduresare not used.

• A falling load may cause serious injury or death.• Use only genuine Crosby parts as replacements.• Read, understand and follow all instructions, diagrams and chart information

before using swivel hoist ring assembly.

WARNING

DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD

45 degrees 30% of rated working load60 degrees 25% of rated working load

IN - LINE

• The threaded shank must protrude through the loadsufficiently to allow full engagement of the nut.

• Thickness of spacersmust exceed thisdistance betweenthe bottom of theload and the lastthread of the eyebolt.

• If the eye bolt protrudes so far through the load that the nutcannot be tightened securely against the load, use properlysized washers to take up the excess space BETWEEN THENUT AND THE LOAD.

• Place washers or spacers between nut and load so that whenthe nut is tightened securely, the shoulder is secured flushagainst the load surface.

Regular Nut Eye BoltG-291

Shoulder Nut Eye BoltG-277

Machinery Eye BoltS-279


These eye bolts are primarily intended to be installed into tapped holes.

1. After the loads on the eye bolts have been calculated, select the proper size eye bolt for the job.

For angular lifts, reduce working load as follows:

2. Drill and tap the load to the correct sizes to a minimum depth of one-half the eye bolt size beyond the shank length of themachinery eye bolt.

3. Thread the eye bolt into the load until the shoulder is flush and securely tightened against the load.

4. If the plane of the machinery eye bolt is not aligned with the sling line, estimate the amount of unthreading rotation necessaryto align the plane of the eye properly.

5. Remove the machinery eye bolt from the load and add shims (washers) of proper thickness to adjust the angle of the planeof the eye to match the sling line. Use Table II to estimate the required shim thickness for the amount of unthreading rotationrequired.

OPERATING SAFETY

1/4 .01255/16 .01393/8 .01561/2 .01925/8 .02273/4 .02507/8 .02781 .0312

1-1/4 .03571-1/2 .0417

• Always stand clear of load.

• Always lift load with steady, even pull - do not jerk.

• Always apply load to eye bolt in the plane of the eye - not at an angle.

• Never exceed the capacity of the eye bolt-see Table I.

• When using lifting slings of two or more legs, make sure the loads in the legs are calculated using the angle from the horizontalto the leg and properly size the shoulder nut or machinery eye bolt for the angular load.

TABLE IIEYE BOLT SHIM THICKNESS REQUIRED TO

SIZE—INCHES CHANGE ROTATION 90° - INCHES

145 degrees 30% of rated working load90 degrees 25% of rated working load

DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD

REGULAR NUT & SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLT INSTALLATION FOR IN-LINE LOADING

MACHINERY EYE BOLT INSTALLATION FOR IN-LINE AND ANGULAR LOADING


See what happens when heavy sideloads are applied to a conventional eye-bolt.

The same load applied to an AmericanSafety Engineered Hoist Ring is trans-lated into a primary tension load at thescrew and normal to the screw axis.

The high tension loads are well withinthe designed safety limits of thestressed hoist ring.

PIVOT180º

SWIVEL HOIST RINGS

Other Styles, Metric, Stainless and Special Length Available

Breaking Strength is 5 Times the Rated Load


HOIST RING APPLICATION ASSEMBLY SAFETY• Use swivel hoist ring only with a ferrous metal (steel, iron) or soft metal (i.e., aluminum) loads (work piece). Do not leave threaded

end of hoist ring in aluminum loads for long time periods due to corrosion.

• After determining the loads on each hoist ring, select the proper size hoist ring using the Working Load Limit ratings in Table 1 forUNC threads and Table 2 for Metric threads.

• Drill and tap the work piece to the correct size to a minimum depth of one-half the threaded shank diameter plus the threaded shanklength.See rated load limit and bolt torque requirements imprinted on top of the swivel trunnion. (See Table 1 and/or Table 2)

• Install hoist ring to recommended torque with a torque wrench making sure the bushing flange meets the load (work piece) surface.

• Never use spacers between bushing flange and mounting surface.

• Always select proper load rated lifting device for use with Swivel Hoist Ring.

• Attach lifting device ensuring free fit to hoist ring bail (lifting ring). (Fig. 1)

• Apply partial load and check proper rotation and alignment.There should be no interference between load (work piece) and hoistring bail .(Fig. 2)

• Special Note: When a Hoist Ring is installed with a retention nut, the nut must have full thread engagement and must meet oneof the following standards to develop the Working Load Limit (WLL).

1. ASTM A-563 (A) Grade D Hex Thick(B) Grade DH Standard Hex

2. SAE Grade 8— Standard Hex

HOIST RING INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE• Always inspect hoist ring before use.

• Regularly inspect hoist ring parts. (Fig. 3)

• Never use hoist ring that shows signs of corrosion, wear or damage.

• Never use hoist ring if bail is bent or elongated.

• Always be sure threads on shank and receiving holes are clean, not damaged, and fit properly.

• Always check with torque wrench before using an already installed hoist ring.

• Always make sure there are no spacers (washers) used between bushing flange and the mounting surface. Remove any spacers(washers) and retorque before use.

• Always ensure free movement of bail. The bail should pivot 180° and swivel 360°. (Fig. 4)

• Always be sure total work piece surface is in contact with hoist ring bushing mating surface. Drilled and tapped hole must be 90°to load (work piece) surface.

OPERATING SAFETYNever exceed the capacity of the swivel hoist ring, see Table 1 for UNC threads and Table 2 for Metric threads. When using liftingslings of two or more legs, make sure the forces in the legs are calculated using the angle from the vertical to the leg and selectthe proper size swivel hoist ring to allow for the angular forces. (Note: Sling angles will de-rate sling members [chain, rope, or web-bing] but will not de-rate swivel hoist ring capacity.)

CROSBY SWIVEL HOIST RING WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

U.S. Patented 5,352,056

Figure 1

Figure 2

Figure 3

Figure 4

• Loads may slip or fall if proper Hoist Ring assembly and lifting proceduresare not used.

• A falling load may cause serious injury or death.• Use only genuine Crosby parts as replacements.• Read, understand and follow all instructions, diagrams and chart information

before using swivel hoist ring assembly.

WARNING


THREAD WORKING WEIGHTDIAMETER LOAD EACH

CODE NO. & TAKE UP (IN.) LIMIT (LBS.) (LBS.)

1030636 1/4 x 4 400 .291030654 5/16 x 4-1/2 700 .491030672 3/8 x 6 1000 .781030690 1/2 x 6 1500 1.611030716 1/2 x 9 1500 1.851030734 1/2 x 12 1500 2.261030752 5/8 x 6 2250 2.701030770 5/8 x 9 2250 3.131030798 5/8 x 12 2250 3.781030814 3/4 x 6 3000 3.891030832 3/4 x 9 3000 4.611030850 3/4 x 12 3000 5.831030878 3/4 x 18 3000 6.331030896 7/8 x 12 4000 8.101030912 7/8 x 18 4000 9.951030930 1 x 6 5000 9.331030958 1 x 12 5000 11.931030976 1 x 18 5000 14.001030994 1 x 24 5000 17.251031010 1-1/4 x 12 6500 19.001031038 1-1/4 x 18 6500 23.001031056 1-1/4 x 24 6500 24.001031074 1-1/2 x 12 7500 27.501031092 1-1/2 x 18 7500 31.001031118 1-1/2 x 24 7500 37.50

HG-225 HOOK AND EYEMeets the performance requirements of FederalSpecifications FF-T-791b, Type 1 Form 1 - Class 6,except for those provisions required of the contractor.



1031877 1/4 x 4 500 .301031895 5/16 x 4-1/2 800 .501031911 3/8 x 6 1200 .801031939 1/2 x 6 2200 1.511031957 1/2 x 9 2200 1.711031975 1/2 x 12 2200 2.081031993 5/8 x 6 3500 2.351032019 5/8 x 9 3500 3.171032037 5/8 x 12 3500 3.611032055 3/4 x 6 5200 4.001032073 3/4 x 9 5200 4.751032091 3/4 x 12 5200 5.931032117 3/4 x 18 5200 7.001032135 7/8 x 12 7200 8.361032153 7/8 x 18 7200 9.751032171 1 x 6 10000 8.921032199 2 x 12 10000 11.201032215 1 x 18 10000 13.301032233 1 x 24 10000 17.001032251 1-1/4 x 12 15200 19.421032279 1-1/4 x 18 15200 24.181032297 1-1/4 x 24 15200 28.501032313 1-1/2 x 12 21400 28.991032331 1-1/2 x 18 21400 35.001032359 1-1/2 x 24 21400 39.181032395 1-3/4 x 18 28000 53.751032411 1-3/4 x 24 28000 60.681032439 2 x 24 37000 89.001032457 2-1/2 x 24 60000 150.001032475 2-3/4 x 24 75000 183.00

HG-227 JAW AND EYEMeets the performance requirements of FederalSpecifications FF-T-791b, Type 1 Form 1 - Class 8,except for those provisions required of the contractor.



1030011 1/4 x 4 400 .301030039 5/16 x 4-1/2 700 .471030057 3/8 x 6 1000 .781030075 1/2 x 6 1500 1.601030093 1/2 x 9 1500 1.831030119 1/2 x 12 1500 2.281030137 5/8 x 6 2250 2.751030155 5/8 x 9 2250 3.381030173 5/8 x 12 2250 3.501030191 3/4 x 6 3000 3.891030217 3/4 x 9 3000 5.281030235 3/4 x 12 3000 5.431030253 3/4 x 18 3000 8.121030271 7/8 x 12 4000 8.101030299 7/8 x 18 4000 9.951030315 1 x 6 5000 9.331030333 1 x 12 5000 11.931030351 1 x 18 5000 14.001030379 1 x 24 5000 17.251030397 1-1/4 x 12 6500 20.581030413 1-1/4 x 18 6500 23.001030431 1-1/4 x 24 6500 27.001030459 1-1/2 x 12 7500 27.501030477 1-1/2 x 18 7500 31.001030495 1-1/2 x 24 7500 37.50

HG-223 HOOK AND HOOKMeets the performance requirements of FederalSpecifications FF-T-791b, Type 1 Form 1 - Class 5,except for those provisions required of the contractor.

FORGED TURNBUCKLES

Note: TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.

Dimensions See Page 94





HG-228 JAW AND JAWMeets the performance requirements of FederalSpecifications FF-T-791b, Type 1 Form 1 - Class 7,except for those provisions required of the contractor.

251 STUB 2510 BODYDIAMETER END WT. ONLY WT.

CODE NO. & TAKE UP (IN.) LBS. EA. LBS. EA.

SE1404 1/4 x 4 .28 .15SE51645 5/16 x 4-1/2 .39 .19SE3806 3/8 x 6 .71 .29SE1206 1/2 x 6 1.4 .6SE1209 1/2 x 9 1.63 .68SE12012 1/2 x 12 1.9 .85SE5806 5/8 x 6 2.13 .9SE5809 5/8 x 9 2.63 1.18SE58012 5/8 x 12 3.08 1.43SE3406 3/4 x 6 3.09 1.19SE3409 3/4 x 9 3.76 1.56SE34012 3/4 x 12 4.68 2.08SE34018 3/4 x 18 5.74 2.64SE7806 7/8 x 6 4.78 1.73SE78012 7/8 x 12 6.35 2.7SE78018 7/8 x 18 8.3 3.8SE1006 1 x 6 6.33 2.48SE10012 1 x 12 8.93 3.93SE10018 1 x 18 11.33 5.28SE10024 1 x 24 14.53 7.38SE11806 1-1/8 x 6 8.88 3.98SE11406 1-1/4 x 6 10.18 3.78SE114012 1-1/4 x 12 13.6 5.4SE114018 1-1/4 x 18 18.15 8.25SE114024 1-1/4 x 24 21.87 10.17SE13806 1-3/8 x 6 13.87 5.97SE11206 1-1/2 x 6 15.09 5.69SE112012 1-1/2 x 12 20.44 8.44SE112018 1-1/2 x 18 26.16 11.56SE112024 1-1/2 x 24 31.69 13.69SE13406 1-3/4 x 6 21.73 8.13SE2006 2 x 6 31.48 12.88SE20024 2 x 24 60.3 27.5SE21206 2-1/2 x 6 62. 29.75SE21224 2-1/2 x 24 110. 54.SE23424 2-3/4 x 24 128. 54.

*Normalized

G-2510 S-2510 BODY ONLY

S-251 STUB ENDTHREAD WORKING WEIGHTDIAMETER LOAD EACH



HG-226 EYE AND EYEMeets the performance requirements of FederalSpecifications FF-T-791b, Type 1 Form 1 - Class 4,except for those provisions required of the contractor.

FORGED TURNBUCKLES

Note: TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.

Dimensions See Page 94


HOOK DIMENSIONS IN INCHES SAFE WORKINGA B C D E LOAD LBS.

1/4 1/4 13/32 29/64 1-21/32 4005/16 5/16 1/2 1/2 1-31/32 7003/8 3/8 39/64 9/16 2-23/64 1,0001/2 1/2 25/32 21/32 2-15/16 1,5005/8 5/8 1 27/32 3-11/16 2,2503/4 3/4 1-13/64 63/64 4-33/64 3,0007/8 7/8 1-3/8 1-1/8 5-3/16 4,0001 1 1-17/32 1-1/4 5-27/32 5,000

1-1/4 1-1/4 1-13/16 1-1/2 7-7/32 5,0001-1/2 1-5/16 1-3/4 1-7/8 8-11/32 7,500

EYE DIMENSIONS IN INCHES SAFE WORKINGA B C D E LOAD LBS.

1/4 11/32 7/32 25/32 1-25/32 5005/16 7/16 9/32 15/16 2-3/16 8003/8 17/32 11/32 1-1/8 2-9/16 1,2001/2 23/32 7/16 1-7/16 3-7/32 2,2005/8 7/8 1/2 1-3/4 3-7/8 3,5003/4 1 5/8 2-1/8 4-11/16 5,2007/8 1-1/4 3/4 2-3/8 5-1/4 7,2001 1-7/16 7/8 3 6-3/8 10,000

1-1/4 1-13/16 1-1/8 3-9/16 7-3/4 15,2001-1/2 2-1/8 1-1/4 4-1/8 8-5/8 21,4001-3/4 2-3/8 1-1/2 4-11/16 10 28,000

2 2-11/16 1-3/4 5-3/4 12-1/8 37,0002-1/2 3-1/8 2 6-1/2 13-9/16 60,0002-3/4 3-1/4 2-1/4 7 15 75,000

JAW DIMENSIONS IN INCHES SAFE WORKINGA B C D E F G H LOAD LBS.

1/4 5/8 1/4 13/32 9/32 1/2 1-5/8 5/8 5005/16 7/8 1/4 15/32 9/32 1/2 2 11/16 8003/8 7/8 5/16 1/2 5/16 19/32 2-3/16 13/16 1,2001/2 1-1/16 3/8 5/8 13/32 3/4 2-3/4 1 2,2005/8 1-5/16 1/2 3/4 1/2 1-1/32 3-1/2 1-5/16 3,5003/4 1-1/2 5/8 15/16 9/16 1-9/32 4-1/8 1-5/8 5,2007/8 1-3/4 3/4 1-1/8 11/16 1-15/32 4-27/32 1-7/8 7,2001 2-1/16 7/8 1-3/16 25/32 1-21/32 5-17/32 2-1/8 10,000

1-1/4 2-13/16 1-1/8 1-3/4 1 2-3/32 2-3/16 2-5/8 15,2001-1/2 2-13/16 1-3/8 2-1/16 1-1/16 2-15/32 7-7/8 3-1/8 21,4001-3/4 3-3/8 1-5/8 2-3/8 1-1/4 2-29/32 9-3/8 3-1/2 28,000

2 3-11/16 2 2-1/2 1-9/16 3-17/32 10-7/8 4-3/16 37,0002-1/2 4-7/16 2-1/4 2-7/8 1-9/16 4-5/8 13-11/32 5-5/8 60,0002-3/4 4-3/16 2-3/4 3-1/2 1-5/8 5-3/8 15 6-1/8 75,000

STUB END DIMENSIONS IN INCHES SAFE WORKINGA R S T U W LOAD LBS.

1/4 4 4-3/4 3/8 2-5/8 10 5005/16 4-1/2 5-7/16 15/32 2-21/32 10-3/4 8003/8 6 7-1/8 9/16 4-7/16 16 1,2001/2 6 7-1/2 3/4 4-1/4 16 2,2005/8 6 7-7/8 15/16 4-1/16 16 3,5003/4 6 8-1/4 1-1/8 4-3/8 17 5,2007/8 6 8-5/8 1-5/16 4-11/16 18 7,2001 6 9 1-1/2 5 19 10,000

1-1/8 6 9-1/8 1-9/16 4-15/16 19 12,4001-1/4 6 9-1/8 1-9/16 5-7/16 20 15,2001-3/8 6 9-3/4 1-7/8 5-3/8 20-1/2 18,0001-1/2 6 9-3/4 1-7/8 5-3/8 20-1/2 21,4001-5/8 6 10-3/8 2-3/16 5-5/16 21 25,0001-3/4 6 10-3/8 2-3/16 5-13/16 22 28,000

2 6 11 2-1/2 6 23 37,0002-1/2 6 13-1/2 3-3/4 6-1/4 26 60,000

HOOKDIMENSIONS AND STRENGTH

EYEDIMENSIONS AND STRENGTH

JAWDIMENSIONS AND STRENGTH

STUB END TURNBUCKLESDIMENSIONS AND STRENGTH

Proof Load twice Safe Working Load. Ultimate Load five times Safe Working Load.

Dimension “W” figuredwith stubs screwed inas shown. Todetermine overalllength of longertakeup turnbuckles,add the difference intakeup.

TURNBUCKLE ENGINEERING DATA


STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE AND CHAIN

TYPE 316 STAINLESSHARDWARE • BLOCKS • SWIVELS • CHAIN

WIRE ROPE • SLINGS & ASSEMBLIES

CALL US FOR ALL YOUR STAINLESS NEEDS


SAFE WORKING DIMENSIONSDIAMETER LOAD. SINGLE INSIDE WEIGHT

CODE NO. STOCK (IN.) PULL POUNDS DIAMETER (IN.) LBS. EACH B C

1013780 7/8 7200 4 2.70 4.00 5.751013806 7/8 5600 5-1/2 3.40 5.50 7.251013824 1 10800 4 3.50 4.00 6.001013842 1-1/8 10400 6 6.50 6.00 8.251013860 1-1/4 17000 5 7.00 5.00 7.501013888 1-3/8 19000 6 10.63 6.00 8.75

Ultimate Load is 6 times the Working Load Limit.

S-643 WELDLESS RINGMeets Federal Specification RR-C271b Type VI. Minimum Ultimate Load is 6 times the Safe Working Load.

DIAMETER WORKING LOAD WEIGHT INSIDE INSIDECODE NO. SIZE (IN.) LIMIT *(LBS.) EACH (LBS.) WIDTH (IN.) LENGTH (IN.)

1014262 1/2 4920 .82 2.50 5.001014280 5/8 6600 1.52 3.00 6.001014306 3/4 10320 2.07 2.75 5.501014324 1 24360 4.85 3.50 7.001014342 1-1/4 35160 9.57 4.38 8.751014360 1-1/2 47880 16.22 5.25 10.501014388 1-3/4 62520 25.22 6.00 12.001014404 2 97680 37.04 7.00 14.001014422 2-1/4** 119400 54.10 8.00 16.001014468 2-1/2** 147300 67.75 8.00 16.001014440 2-3/4** 178200 87.70 9.50 16.001014486 3** 228000 115.00 9.00 18.001014501 3-1/4** 262200 145.00 10.00 20.001014529 3-1/2** 279000 200.00 12.00 24.001015051 3-3/4** 336000 198.00 10.00 20.001015060 4** 373000 228.00 10.00 20.001015067 4-1/4** 354000 302.00 12.00 24.001015079 4-1/2** 360000 342.00 14.00 28.001015088 4-3/4** 389000 436.00 14.00 28.001015094 5** 395000 516.00 15.00 30.00* Based on Single leg sling. Minimum Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit.

** Welded Master Link.

A-342 WELDLESS ALLOY MASTER LINKMinimum Ultimate Load is 6 times the Safe Working Load. *Welded Master Link.

LINKS AND RINGS

B

C

For More Oblong Master LinksSee page 40


STOCK SIZE WORKING LOAD WEIGHT DIMENSIONS (IN.)CODE NO. (A) IN. LIMIT (LBS.)* EACH (LBS.) B C D E F

1013575 1/2 4920 .55 1.50 1.00 4.00 3.00 .501013584 5/8 6600 1.10 1.88 1.25 5.00 3.75 .631013595 3/4 10320 1.76 2.25 1.50 6.00 4.50 .751013604 7/8** 17340 2.82 2.63 1.75 7.00 5.25 .881013613 1 24360 4.22 3.00 2.00 8.00 6.00 1.001013622 1-1/8** 29760 6.25 3.13 2.25 8.75 6.75 1.131013631 1-1/4** 35160 8.25 3.75 2.50 10.00 7.50 1.251013640 1-3/8** 41520 11.25 4.13 2.75 11.00 8.25 1.381013649 1-1/2** 47880 14.25 4.50 3.00 12.00 9.00 1.501013658 1-5/8** 55200 18.50 4.88 3.25 13.00 9.75 1.631013667 1-3/4** 62520 22.50 5.25 3.50 14.00 10.50 1.751013676 1-7/8** 80100 29.00 5.63 3.75 15.00 11.25 1.881013685 2** 97680 34.00 6.00 4.00 16.00 12.00 2.001013694 2-1/4** 119400 48.00 6.75 4.50 18.00 13.50 2.251013703 2-1/2** 147300 66.00 7.50 5.00 20.00 15.00 2.501013712 2-3/4** 178200 88.00 8.25 5.50 22.00 16.50 2.757013721 3** 228000 114.00 9.00 6.00 24.00 18.00 3.001013730 3-1/4** 262200 146.00 9.75 6.50 26.00 19.50 3.251013739 3-1/2** 279000 181.00 10.50 7.00 28.00 21.00 3.501013748 4** 373000 271.00 12.00 8.00 32.00 24.00 4.00

*Based on single leg slings. Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times Working Load Limit.**Welded Master Link.

A-341 ALLOY PEAR SHAPED LINKSAlloy steel. Quenched and tempered. Individually proof tested at 2 times Working Load Limit with certification. Proof Test certifica-tion shipped with each link. Sizes 1/2”, 5/8”, 3/4”, and 1” are drop forged.

LINKS AND RINGS

GALVANIZED SAFE WORKINGG-341 DIAMETER LOAD. SINGLE INSIDE INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE WIDTH WEIGHTCODE NO. STOCK (IN.) PULL POUNDS LENGTH (IN.) SMALL END LARGE END LBS. EACH

1013897 3/8 1600 2-1/4 3/4 1-1/2 .251013913 1/2 2900 3 1 2 .551013931 5/8 4200 3-3/4 1-1/4 2-1/2 1.101013959 3/4 6000 4-1/2 1-1/2 3 1.951013977 7/8 8300 5-1/4 1-3/4 3-1/2 2.781013995 1 10800 6 2 4 4.301014011 1-1/4 16750 7-3/4 2-1/2 5 8.501014039 1-3/8 20500 8-1/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 12.04

PAINTED SAFE WORKINGS-341 DIAMETER LOAD. SINGLE INSIDE INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE WIDTH WEIGHTCODE NO. STOCK (IN.) PULL POUNDS LENGTH (IN.) SMALL END LARGE END LBS. EACH

1013904 3/8 1600 2-1/4 3/4 1-1/2 .251013922 1/2 2900 3 1 2 .551013940 5/8 4200 3-3/4 1-1/4 2-1/2 1.101013968 3/4 6000 4-1/2 1-1/2 3 1.951013986 7/8 8300 5-1/4 1-3/4 3-1/2 2.781014002 1 10800 6 2 4 4.301014020 1-1/4 16750 7-3/4 2-1/2 5 8.501014048 1-3/8 20500 8-1/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 12.04

S-341 AND G-341 WELDLESS SLING LINKSSelf colored or hot dip galvanized. Forged from special bar quality carbon and alloy steels. Weldless. Minimum Ultimate Load is 6times the Safe Working Load.


S-421T S-421TW S-421T S-421TWCOMPLETE WEDGE ONLY WIRE ROPE COMPLETE WEDGE ONLYCODE NO. CODE NO. SIZE (IN.) EACH (LBS.) EACH (LBS.)

WIRE ROPE DIMENSIONS (IN.)DIA. (IN.) A B C D G H J K L P R S T U V

1035000 1035555 3/8 2.18 .501035009 1035564 1/2 6.15 1.051035018 1035573 5/8 9.70 1.791035027 1035582 3/4 14.50 2.601035036 1035591 7/8 21.50 4.021035045 1035600 1 30.75 5.371035054 1035609 1-1/8 45.30 7.841040448 1040607 **1-1/4 57.50 6.81

*Terminator Assembly includes Socket, Wedge, Pin, and Wire Rope Clip.**1-1/4” not available in TERMINATOR™ style.

S-421T — THE TERMINATOR™U.S. patent 5,553, 360 and foreign equivalents. Basket is cast steel. Individually magnetic particleinspected. Pin diameter and jaw opening allows wedge and socket to be used in conjunction with openswage and spelter sockets. Secures the tail or “dead end” of the wire rope to the wedge, thus eliminatesloss or “Punch out” of the wedge. Eliminates the need for an extra piece of rope, and is easily installed.The TERMINATOR™ wedge eliminates the potential breaking off of the tail due to fatigue.The tail, whichis secured by the base of the clip and the wedge, is left undeformed and available for reuse. IncorporatesCrosby’s patented QUIC-CHECK™ “Go” and “No-Go” features cast into the wedge.The proper size ropeis determined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope should pass thru the “Go” hole in hewedge. 2. The wire rope should NOT pass thru the “No-Go” hole in the wedge. Utilizes standard CrosbyRed-U-Bolt wire rope clip. Generates a minimum efficiency of 80% based on the catalog breakingstrength of the wire rope. Standard S-421 wedge socket can be retrofitted with the new style TERMINA-TOR™ wedge. Available with Bolt, Nut, and Cotter Pin.

WEDGE SOCKETS

3/8 5.63 2.77 .81 .81 1.38 3.12 7.38 1.60 .88 1.56 .44 2.13 .44 1.25 1.381/2 6.81 3.55 1.00 1.00 1.62 3.85 8.75 1.21 1.06 1.94 .50 2.44 .53 1.75 1.885/8 8.16 4.36 1.25 1.19 2.12 4.58 10.34 1.64 1.22 2.25 .56 3.13 .69 2.00 2.193/4 9.78 4.81 1.50 1.38 2.44 5.37 12.03 2.17 1.40 2.62 .66 3.63 .78 2.34 2.567/8 11.16 4.65 1.75 1.63 2.69 6.28 14.00 2.22 1.66 3.12 .75 4.19 .88 2.69 2.941 12.75 5.08 2.00 2.00 2.56 7.02 15.86 2.71 2.00 3.75 .88 4.63 1.03 2.88 3.281-1/8 14.38 5.51 2.25 2.25 3.31 7.76 17.70 2.50 2.25 4.25 1.00 5.38 1.19 3.13 3.561-1/4 16.00 7.94 2.50 2.50 3.56 N/A N/A 3.39 2.50 4.75 1.12 5.81 1.31 3.38 3.81


WIDTH PIN TO THICK-OVERALL NET TOTAL PIN BETWEEN PIN TO END OF NESSLENGTH LENGTH THICKNESS DIA. EARS OBSTR. FITTING OF EAR

CODE NO. WIRE ROPE SIZE WT. A B E P Q R S V

WS-4380 3/8 3 6.500 5.375 2.625 1 1 1.750 1.125 .375WS-4716 7/16 3 6.500 5.375 2.625 1 1 1.937 1.125 .375WS-4120 1/2 3 6.500 5.375 2.625 1 1 1.937 1.125 .375WS-5120 1/2 8.5 8.750 7.250 3.500 1.250 1.375 2.437 1.500 .625WS-5916 9/16 8.5 8.750 7.250 3.500 1.250 1.375 2.812 1.500 .625WS-5580 5/8 8.5 8.750 7.250 3.500 1.250 1.375 2.750 1.500 .625WS-6580 5/8 9 8.812 7.312 3.500 1.250 1.500 2.500 1.500 .562WS-8A580 5/8 17 11.250 9.125 4.125 1.625 1.750 3.187 2.125 1WS-6340 3/4 9 8.812 7.312 3.500 1.250 1.500 1.780 1.500 .562WS-8A340 3/4 17 11.250 9.125 4.125 1.625 1.750 2.844 2.125 1WS-7780 7/8 15 11 9.500 3.500 1.250 1.312 2.937 1.500 .625WS-8780 7/8 16 11.375 9.500 4.125 1.625 1.750 2.875 1.875 .750WS-7100 1 14.5 11 9.500 3.500 1.250 1.315 2.875 1.500 .725WS-8100 1 16 11.375 9.500 4.125 1.625 1.750 2.500 1.875 .750WS-10118 1-1/8 45 15.437 13.250 4.125 1.625 1.750 3.062 2.187 .750WS-11118 1-1/8 55 16 13.500 5.500 2.500 2.500 4.500 2.500 .812WS-10114 1-1/4 45 15.437 13.250 4.125 1.625 1.750 3.125 2.187 .750WS-11114 1-1/4 55 16 13.500 5.500 2.500 2.500 4.250 2.500 .812FS-26112 1-1/2 99 18.375 15 6.875 3 2.625 4.187 3.375 1.250

OPEN WEDGE SOCKET

SEE SAFETYINFORMATION

KEY TO OPEN WEDGE SOCKET MODEL NUMBERS

WS 6 3/4”

Wedge Socket Body Number Wire RopeWedge Size

TO ORDER PLEASE SPECIFY:Model NumberExact Rope SizeNOTE: This product may be ordered complete or any component part.See order key below.

EXAMPLES:“WS-8-7/8 INCH “WS-6-3/4 OPEN WEDGE “7/8-INCH WEDGE

OPEN WEDGE SOCKET SOCKET LESS PIN ONLY FOR WS-7COMPLETE” AND COTTERS” SOCKET BODY”

*Tail LengthStandard 6 to 8 strand wire rope. A minimum of 6 rope diameters,but not less than 6”. (i.e.- For 1” rope: Tail Length = 1” x 6 = 6”)

Rotation Resistant Wire RopeA minimum of 20 rope diameters, but not less than 6”. (i.e. - For 1”rope: Tail Length = 1” x 20 = 20”)

PAGE 100

OPEN WEDGE SOCKETS 3/8 TO 1-1/2 INCH WIRE ROPE SIZES


*TAIL LENGTHSTANDARD ROTATION

6 TO 8 STRAND RESISTANTWIRE ROPE WIRE ROPE

S-421T “TERMINATOR”™

A minimum of 6 A minimum of 20rope diameters, rope diameters,but not less than 6” but not less than 6”

TABLE 1

Rope Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4Clip Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4

*Torque Ft./Lbs. 45 65 65 95 95 130 225 225 225 360*The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.

Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loadsexpected in use. Efficiency rating of the Wedge Socket termination is based upon the catalog breaking strength of Wire Rope. Theefficiency of a properly assembled Wedge Socket is 80%. During use, do not strike the dead end section with any other elementsof the rigging. (Called two blocking).

Extended wedge socket assembly U.S. patent No. 5,553,360. NOTE: Existing Crosby S-421 Wedge Sockets can be retrofitted withthe New Terminator Wedge. New QUIC CHECK™ “Go” and “No-Go” features cast into wedge. The proper size wire rope is deter-mined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope shall pass thru the “go” hole in the wedge. 2. The wire rope shall NOTpass thru the “No-Go” hole in the wedge.

INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SAFETYAlways inspect socket, wedge and pin before using. Do not use part showing cracks. Do not use modified or substitute parts. Repairminor nicks or gouges to socket or pin by lightly grinding until surfaces are smooth. Do not reduce original dimension more than10%. Do not repair by welding. Inspect permanent assemblies annually, or more often in severe operating conditions.

ASSEMBLY SAFETYUse only with standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope of designated size. For intermediate size rope, use next larger size socket. For exam-ple: When using 9/16” diameter wire rope use a 5/8” size Wedge Socket Assembly. Welding of the tail on standard wire rope is notrecommended. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 6 rope diameters but not less than 6” (Figure 1). To usewith Rotation Resistant wire rope (special wire rope constructions with 8 or more outer strands) ensure that the dead end is weld-ed, braized or seized before inserting the wire rope into the wedge socket to prevent core slippage or loss of rope lay.The tail lengthof the dead end should be a minimum of 20 rope diameters but not less than 6”: (See Figure 1). Properly match socket, wedgeand clip (See Table 1) to wire rope size. Align live end of rope, with center line of pin. (See Figure 1). Secure dead end section ofrope. (See Figure 1). Tighten nuts on clip to recommended torque. (Table 1) Do not attach dead end to live end or install wedgebackwards. (See Figure 2). Use a hammer to seat Wedge and Rope as deep into socket as possible before applying first load.

OPERATING SAFETY

• Loads may slip or fall if the Wedge Socket is not properly installed.• A falling load may cause serious injury or death.• Read and understand these instructions before installing the Wedge Socket.• Do not side load the Wedge Socket.• Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket. This

load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use.

WARNING

WEDGE SOCKET WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS


MIDGET—HOOK OR EYE2 Ton capacity. 3.5 to 1 Design Factor. 3 inch diameter.

ONE SHEAVE—HOOK, SHACKLE, EYE OR TAILBOARD (no fitting)3 through 30 ton capacities. 4 to 1 design factor. 4 through 24 inch diameters.

TOP DEADEND—HOOK OR SHACKLE3 through 22 ton capacities. 4 to 1 design factor. 4 through 14 inch diameters.

TWO SHEAVE—HOOK OR SHACKLE8 through 22 ton capacities. 4 to 1 design factor. 4 through 14 inch diameters.

SNATCH BLOCKS BY GUNNEBO JOHNSON

418 STANDARD

Ultimate Load is 4 times the Safe Working Load. * Fitted with 1-1/4” I.D. Swivel Eye. ** Available in Bronze Bushed only. ***May befurnished for other wire rope sizes on special order. Sizes up to 30 tons.

CROSBY SNATCH BLOCKS

Midget with Eye 1 Sheave with Hook 1 Sheave Tailboard

2 Sheave with Shackle Top Deadend with Hook

SHEAVE SIZE SAFE WORKING STANDARD WIRE ROPE CENTER PIN WEIGHTCODE NO. INCHES LOAD* TONS INCHES DIAMETER INCHES POUNDS EACH

108038 **3 2 3/8 3/4 3108065 **4-1/2 4 1/2 1 11108127 6 8 3/4 1-1/2 26108225 8 8 3/4 1-1/2 33108323 10 8 3/4 1-1/2 41108421 12 8 3/4 1-1/2 48108528 14 8 3/4 1-1/2 55108608 16 12 7/8 2-1/2 130108644 18 15 1 2-3/4 150

419 STANDARDSHEAVE SIZE SAFE WORKING STANDARD WIRE ROPE CENTER PIN WEIGHT

CODE NO. INCHES LOAD* TONS INCHES DIAMETER INCHES POUNDS EACH

109037 **3 2 3/8 3/4 ***3109064 **4-1/2 4 1/2 1 12109126 6 8 3/4 1-1/2 27109224 8 8 3/4 1-1/2 34109322 10 8 3/4 1-1/2 42109420 12 8 3/4 1-1/2 49109527 14 8 3/4 1-1/2 56109607 16 12 7/8 2-1/2 135109643 18 15 1 2-3/4 155

404 STANDARDSHEAVE SIZE SAFE WORKING STANDARD WIRE ROPE CENTER PIN WEIGHT

CODE NO. INCHES LOAD* TONS INCHES DIAMETER INCHES POUNDS EACH

102016 **3 2 3/8 3/4 3102025 **4-1/2 4 1/2 1 6102098 6 8 3/4 1-1/2 15102169 8 8 3/4 1-1/2 21102230 10 8 3/4 1-1/2 29102301 12 8 3/4 1-1/2 36

PLEASE CALL FORDETAILS ON THESE ORANY OTHER BLOCKS

STOCKED IN OURWAREHOUSE

STOCKED IN OURWAREHOUSE

For Details Go to Our Websitewww.bairstow.com

The Crosby Catalog Linkor The Johnson Block Link


OVERHAUL BALLS BY GUNNEBO JOHNSONTypes 4, 6 – Midget Non-Swiveling Overhaul BallsAmong our more economical models, these small but husky units are ideal for lighttonnage applications which demand top performance and downfall speed. Availableare 3 and 5-ton capacities with weights ranging from 36 to 49 pounds. Wedge sock-ets for the Type 6 are multi-purpose. Each has the flexibility of being used with morethan one size wire rope through a simple change in wedge size.

Types 4, 6, 7 – Midget Swiveling Overhaul BallsJohnson Blocks midget models OB-3JEM-28-4, OB-3JEM-28-6, and OB-3JJM-28-7have an advantage in size as well as capability. They are unusually short in over-alllength, the basic eye-top unit being only 13-7/16 inches. Other units in this low profileseries include jaw types and the versatile wedge socket types.

Type 3 – Bottom Swivel Overhaul BallsThe first overall ball ever offered by Johnson Blocks, the Type 3 is still widely used.The reason again, exceptional compactness. With wedge socket and swivel almostcompletely enclosed within the ball and pin assembly, it is 25 to 30 percent shorter inover-all length then competition makes. It also offers the advantage of an openwedge socket that can be adapted to two or more sizes or wire rope, just by chang-ing out the wedge.

Type 3 bottom swivel overhaul balls are available in capacities of 3 to 30 tons;weights, or from 54 through 1,290 pounds. When ordering, always specify the wirerope size to be used. Options include choice of light duty hook latches or heavy dutyflapper latches.

Type 4, 5, 6, 7 – Top Swivel Overall BallsThe advantage of the top swivel overhaul ball lies in the ability of its upper fitting andattached wire rope to move independent of its ball and lower fitting.

Johnson Blocks introduced its first top swivel balls in 1966 in response to requestsfor units with more accessible upper fittings. From these have evolved the broad lineof precision assemblies which this company now manufactures. In all, our offeringconsists of some 138 models with weights ranging from 37 through 1,478 pounds;capacities, from 3-3/4 through 30 tons. Interchangeable wedge sockets are standardon the Type 6, while light duty hook latches or heavy duty flapper latches are avail-able on all models at the buyer's option.

Overhaul Balls and PinsBall and pin assemblies are obtainable as replacement parts for Johnson Blocksoverhaul balls or, as add-on/conversion kits for Johnson Blocks swivels. Ranging inweight from 37 to 1,161 pounds, these units consist of cast iron ball, steel pin, andthe necessary nuts and cotters.

Split Overhaul BallsJohnson Blocks split balls present a convenient and effective way to add overhaulweight directly to the wire rope. Made up of two cast iron halves which clamp to theline by means of bolts, these units are designed to fit 1/2 and 5/8 inch rope (50pound weight) and 5/8, 3/4 and 7/8-inch rope (100-pound weight).

GUNNEBO OVERHAUL BALLSSTOCKED IN OUR WAREHOUSE

See our websitewww.bairstow.com

For detailsgo to

Johnson BlockLink


SHORTY 3 TONS 5 TONS 10-15 TONS 20-25 TONS 20-25 TONS 35-45 TONS 50-70 TONS 75-110 TONS 115-165 TONS 200-350 TONS“J” HOOK S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L. S.W.L.

LATCH -1,2 SHVS -3 OR MORE (HOOK (HOOKS (HOOKS (HOOKSOPTIONS 30 TONS SHVS 1002 1105, 107 1012,1013 1014,1015

S.W.L. ONLY) ONLY) ONLY) ONLY)

LIGHTDUTY 5626 5622 5503 5551 5533LATCHHEAVYDUTY 3292 3214 3190 4940 3506 4941 4943 4944 4946 BAR TYPE

LATCH IS STANDARD)

3 through 350 ton capacities. 4 to 1 design factor (unless otherwise indicated). 1 through 8 sheaves. 10 through 30 inch diameters.Bronze bushed, roller bearing and tapered roller bearing sheaves. Individual channel bearing lubrication through center pin. Flamehardened grooves on sheaves sizes 16 inches and larger. Dual action (swing-swivel) roller thrust bearing hooks, forged and castalloy steel. Fully protective side plates. Center plate/tie bolt containment of wire rope.Total block disassembly capability.Wide rangeof options including: Light duty hook latch kits, 3 through 30 tons. Heavy duty flapper latch kits, 3 through 165 tons. Cast alloy steelduplex hooks, 25 through 350 tons. Locking devices, all models. Reeving guides, all models. Sheave shrouds, all models. For com-plete range of options, see general catalog and current price list.

KEY TO J-BLOCK MODEL NUMBERS

J 20 Q 12 B T BSHORTY SAFE NUMBER SHEAVE SHEAVE HOOK— CHEEK

“J” CRANE WORKING OF SHEAVES: SIZE BEARING: THRUST WEIGHTS:BLOCK LIMIT—TONS S = 1 —NOM. O.D. B = BRONZE BEARING A = NO WTS.

D = 2 BUSHED AB == MED. WTS.T = 3 R = ROLLER B = STD. WTS.Q = 4 BEARING C = X-HEAVY

QN = 5 T = TAPERED WTS.SX = 6 ROLLERSV = 7 BEARING

OCT = 8

SHORTY “J” CRANE BLOCKS BY GUNNEBO JOHNSON

703 605

332/352 Double 333/353 Triple 334/354 Quad

A BETTER HOOK BLOCKStandard from 10 to 24 inch and 1 to 5 sheaves. Weighted and with capacities to 165 tons.

A BETTER CONSTRUCTION BLOCKWidest range available. Highest quality obtainable. Capacities to 90 tons.

McKISSICK BLOCKS “A BETTER BLOCK FOR EVERY PURPOSE”


For detailsgo to

Johnson Block Link


For details go to Crosby Catalog Link


Unique upset roll forging process provides a thicker groove section for extra strength. Stepped Hubs are precisely centered andmechanically locked in place. Wireline grooves on sheave diameters of 14” and larger are flame hardened for extra wear resist-ance. All sheaves have solid steel webs with holes for easy handling. Sheave weights can be made heavier or lighter than shownto fit your specific application. Sheaves available in sizes from 3” to 72”, and wireline sizes from 1/4” to 3”. For more informationask for our special brochure describing the complete roll forging process.

McKissick sheaves come in a variety of sizes to suit your specific applications. Check the tables for the size, bearing style and price that best fits your application. For applications that requireunique specifications Crosby can make minor modifications to many of the sheaves listed at a reasonable charge.We can also custom design and manufacture sheaves to your exact require-ments. Contact Crosby Sales to order McKissick sheaves and include the stock number and quantity. For special requirements or custom designed sheaves, furnish the following importantinformation: wireline size, shaft diameter, weight requirements, hub diameter, bore finished, nominal outside diameter, hub width, rim width, nominal tread diameter, other special require-ments.

ROLL FORGED SHEAVE FEATURES

Slow line speed, moderate load and moderate use,Maximum Bearing Pressure (BP): 450 PSIMaximum Velocity at Bearing (BV): 1200 FPMMaximum Pressure Velocity Factor (PV): 55000

Formula for BP = Line Pull x Angle Factor (See Page 215)Shaft Size x Hub Width (see example).

BRONZE BUSHING

Very slow line speed, very infrequent use, low load.PLAIN BORE

Faster line speeds, more frequent use, greater load.

Example:

Using a 14 in. sheave (917191) with a 4600 lb. line pull and a 80 degree angle between lines, determine maximumallowable line speed.

BP = 4600 lbs. x 1.53 ÷ 1.50 x 1.62 = 2896 PSI(Line Pull) (Angle Factor) (Shaft Size) (Hub Width)

BV = 55000 ÷ 2896 = 19FPM(PV Factor) (BP)

ROLLER BEARING

WIRE ROPE SHEAVES

TO ORDER:Call us with desired Width,Diameter, Bore, Bearing Typeand Wire Rope Size to get aquote on price andavailability.


For details go to CrosbyCatalog Link


SHEAVE QUOTE / ORDER FORM

Copy this form and then fax or email it to us with your specs.

Bairstow Lifting Products Co.1785 Ellsworth Ind. Dr.

Atlanta, GA 30318Phone 404-351-2600

800-241-8990Fax 404-355-2046

web [email protected]


CODE NO. CABLE SIZE B S.W.L. WT. (lbs.)

SWIVEL EYE SINGLE SHEAVE BLOCK


SWIVEL EYE DOUBLE SHEAVE BLOCK


01558 3/16 1-1/2 420 .302058 3/16 2 480 .502558 1/4 2-1/2 550 .803058 1/4 3 640 1.003058-5/16 5/16 3 640 1.003558 5/16 3-1/2 1240 2.303558-3/8 3/8 3-1/2 1240 2.3

SINGLE SHEAVE BLOCKCODE NO. CABLE SIZE B S.W.L. WT. (lbs.)

01558-2 3/16 1-1/2 525 .502058-2 3/16 2 600 102558-2 1/4 2-1/2 685 203058-2 1/4 3 800 2.503058-2-5/16 5/16 3 800 2.503558-2 5/16 3-1/2 1550 403558-2-3/8 3/8 3-1/2 1550 4

DOUBLE SHEAVE BLOCK


01568 3/16 1-1/2 420 .502068 3/16 2 480 .702568 1/4 2-1/2 550 1.003068 1/4 3 640 1.403068-5/16 5/16 3 640 1.403568 5/16 3-1/2 1240 3.103568-3/8 3/8 3-1/2 1240 3.1

FIXED EYE SINGLE SHEAVE BLOCK


01568-2 3/16 1-1/2 525 102068-2 3/16 2 600 1.502568-2 1/4 2-1/2 685 203068-2 1/4 3 800 2.503068-2-5/16 5/16 3 800 2.503568-2 5/16 3-1/2 1550 503568-2-3/8 3/8 3-1/2 1550 5

FIXED EYE DOUBLE SHEAVE BLOCK


SWIVEL HOOKSINGLE SHEAVE BLOCK


SWIVEL HOOKDOUBLE SHEAVE BLOCK


1-1/2” - 3-1/2” SHEAVES WITHBRONZE BUSHINGS

DECK BLOCKSSTRAP BLOCKS3-SHEAVE BLOCKSREMOVABLE PIN BLOCKSBLOCKS W/THREADED BOLT4”, 5”, 6” SHEAVES

AVAILABLE ON REQUEST

Dimensions in inches are approximate.

SMALL WIRE ROPE BLOCKS

01578-SL 3/16 1-1/2 525 .502078-SL 3/16 2 600 .702578-SL 1/4 2-1/2 685 1.003078-SL 1/4 3 800 1.403078-5/16-SL 5/16 3 800 1.403578-SL 5/16 3-1/2 1550 3.103578-3/8-SL 3/8 3-1/2 1550 3.10478-SL 3/8 4 1700 3.805078-SL 3/8 5 1850 5.3

01578-2-SL 3/16 1-1/2 525 102078-2-SL 3/16 2 600 1.502578-2-SL 1/4 2-1/2 685 203078-2-SL 1/4 3 800 2.503078-2-5/16-SL 5/16 3 800 2.503578-2-SL 5/16 3-1/2 1550 503578-2-3/8-SL 3/8 3-1/2 1550 50478-2-SL 3/8 4 1700 6.50578-2-SL 3/8 5 1850 9.3

00158 3/16 1-1/2 420 .200208 3/16 2 480 .300258 1/4 2-1/2 550 .500308 1/4 3 640 .800308-5/16 5/16 3 640 .800358 5/16 3-1/2 1240 1.300358-3/8 3/8 3-1/2 1240 1.300408 3/8 4 1700 1.800508 3/8 5 1850 2.9

01548 3/16 1-1/2 525 .502048 3/16 2 600 .702548 1/4 2-1/2 685 1.003048 1/4 3 800 1.403048-5/16 5/16 3 800 1.403548 5/16 3-1/2 1550 3.103548-3/8 3/8 3-1/2 1550 3.10448 3/8 4 1700 3.60548 3/8 5 1850 5.2

01548-2 3/16 1-1/2 525 102048-2 3/16 2 600 1.502548-2 1/4 2-1/2 685 203048-2 1/4 3 800 2.503048-2-5/16 5/16 3 800 2.503548-2 5/16 3-1/2 1550 503548-2-3/8 3/8 3-1/2 1550 50448-2 3/8 4 1700 6.30548-2 3/8 5 1850 9.1

SnatchBlock

Style onRequest

B Dimension is Sheave Diameter


SINGLE SHEAVE DOUBLE SHEAVE TRIPLE SHEAVE21 C 21 B 21 R 22 C 22 B 22 R 23 B 23 R

BLOCK SIZE STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO. STOCK NO.(IN.) FITTING GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV. GALV.

3 HS 602217 603813 603617 602618 604616 604411 605410 —4 HS 602235 603831 603635 602636 604634 604439 605438 6052325 HS 602253 603859 603653 602654 604652 604457 605456 —6 HS 602271 603877 603671 602672 604670 604475 605474 6052788 HS 602315 603911 603715 602716 604714 — 605517 6053123 N — 606419 — — 606810 — 607212 —4 N — 606437 606231 — 606838 606632 607230 6070345 N — 606455 — — 606856 606650 607258 —6 N — 606473 — — 606874 606678 607276 6070708 N — 606516 — — 606918 — 607310 —3 S — 610011 — — 611617 — 613214 —4 S — 610039 — — 611635 — 613232 —5 S — 610057 — — 611653 — 613250 —6 S — 610075 — — 611671 611476 613278 —8 S — 610119 — — 611715 611519 613312 —

Bearing Code: C - Common, R - Roller, B - Bronze Self Lubricating.

SHEAVE DIAMETER (IN.) WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (LBS.) WEIGHT EACH (LBS.)BLOCK SIZE OUTSIDE RIM CENTER PIN MANILA ROPE 21 22 23 21 22 23

(IN.) DIAM. THICKNESS DIAM. SIZE (IN.) SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE SINGLE DOUBLE TRIPLE

3 1.75 .50 .38 3/8 500 800 1200 1.00 1.75 2.504 2.25 .63 .38 1/2 1000 1400 1800 1.75 3.00 4.005 3.00 .75 .38 5/8 1200 1800 2400 3.25 5.60 6.506 3.50 1.00 .50 3/4 1800 2500 3200 5.00 8.50 11.508 4.75 1.13 .63 7/8 - 1 2800 3800 4800 9.00 14.00 21.50

*Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.NOTE: We furnish beckets on all blocks. For Reeving information, see page 107.

STOCK NO. SHEAVE SIZE (IN.) MANILA WORKING WEIGHTBLOCK T-350-C T-350-R T-350-B OUTSIDE RIM BEARING ROPE LIMIT* EACH

SIZE (IN.) FITTING PAINTED PAINTED PAINTED DIAMETER THICKNESS DIAMETER SIZE (IN.) (LBS.) (LBS.)

8 T 710001 710207 710403 8.00 1.25 .75 7/8 1000 9.010 T 710029 710225 710421 10.00 1.25 .88 1 1000 9.812 T 710047 710243 710449 12.00 1.38 .88 1 1000 12.714 T 710065 710261 710467 14.00 1.50 1.00 1 1000 20.0

*Ultimate Load is 3 times the Working Load Limit.Bearing Code: C - Common Iron, R - Roller, B - Self Lubricating Bronze Bushed

WOOD SHELL BLOCKS WITH STEEL FRAME

GIN BLOCK FOR ROOFERS AND CONTRACTORS

FIBER ROPE BLOCKS

HS-21B SINGLE(AVAILABLE IN N & S)

N-22-B DOUBLE(AVAILABLE IN HS & S)

S-23-B TRIPLE(AVAILABLE IN HS & N)

T-350-C


Tackle Block and Sheave AssemblyWarning, Use &

Maintenance Information_______________________

Definitions________________________STATIC LOAD – The load resulting from a constantly applied force orload.WORKING LOAD LIMIT – The maximum mass or force which the prod-uct is authorized to support in general service when the pull is applied in-line, unless noted otherwise, with respect to the center line of the product.this term is used interchangeably with the following terms.

1. WLL2. Rated Load Value3. SWL4. Safe Working Load5. Resultant Safe Working Load

WORKING LOAD – The maximum mass or force which the product isauthorized to support in a particular service.PROOF LOAD – The average force applied in the performance of a prooftest; the average force to which a product may be subjected before defor-mation occurs.PROOF TEST – A test applied to a product solely to determine non con-forming material or manufacturing defects.ULTIMATE LOAD – The average load or force at which the product fails,or no longer supports the load.SHOCK LOAD – A force that results from the rapid application of a force(such as impacting and/or jerking) or rapid movement of a static load. Ashock load significantly adds to the static load.DESIGN (SAFETY) FACTOR – An industry term denoting a product’s the-oretical reserve capability; usually computed by dividing the catalogUltimate Load by the Working Load Limit. Generally expressed for blocksas a ratio of 4 to 1.TACKLE BLOCK – An assembly consisting of a sheave(s), side plates,and generally an end fitting (hook, shackle, etc.) that is used for lifting,lowering, or applying tension.SHEAVE / SHEAVE BEARING ASSEMBLY – Purchased by O.E.M. orend user to be used in their block or lifting system design.

WARNING• A potential hazard exists when lifting or dragging heavy loads

with tackle block assemblies.• Failure to design and use tackle block systems properly may

cause a load to slip or fall – the result could be serious injuryor death.

• Failure to design lifting system with appropriate sheaveassembly material for the intended application may cause pre-mature sheave, bearing or wire rope wear and ultimate failure– the result could be serious injury or death.

• A tackle block system should be rigged by a qualified personas defined by ANSI/ASME B.30.

• Instruct workers to keep hands and body away from blocksheaves and swivels – and away from “pinch points” whererope touches block parts or loads.

• Do not side load tackle blocks.• See OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) for personnel hoisting by cranes

and derricks, and OSHA Directive CPL 2-1.29 — InterimInspection Procedures During Communication TowerConstruction Activities. Only a Crosby or McKissick Hook witha PL latch attached and secured with a bolt, nut and cotter pin(or toggle pin) or a PL-N latch attached and secured with tog-gle pin; or a Crosby hook with an S-4320 latch attached andsecured with cotter pin or bolt, nut and pin; or a Crosby SHUR-LOC® Hook in the locked position may be used for any per-sonnel hoisting. A hook with a Crosby SS-4055 latch attachedshall NOT be used for personnel lifting.

• Instruct workers to be alert and to wear proper safety gear inareas where loads are moved or supported with tackle blocksystems.

• Use only genuine Crosby parts as replacement.• Read, understand, and follow these instructions to select, use

and maintain tackle block systems.

General Cautions or Warnings___________________________Ratings shown in Crosby Group literature are applicable only to new or

“in as new” products.Working Load Limit ratings indicate the greatest force or load a product

can carry under usual environmental conditions. shock loading andextraordinary conditions must be taken into account when selecting prod-ucts for use in tackle block systems. Working Load Limit ratings are basedon all sheaves of tackle block system being utilized. If all sheaves are notutilized, balance must be maintained, and the working Load Limit must bereduced proportionally to prevent overloading sheave components.Changes from full sheave reeving arrangement should be only at the rec-ommendaiton of a qualifie dperson, and incorporate good rigging prac-tices.

In general, the products displayed in Crosby Group literature are usedas parts of a system being employed to accomplish a task. Therefore, wecan only recommend within the working Load Limits, or other stated limi-tations, the use of products for this purpose.

The Working Load Limit or Design (Safety) Factor of each Crosby prod-uct may be affected by wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, deformation,intentional alteration, and other use conditions. Regular inspection mustbe conducted to determine whether use can be continued at the catalogassigned WLL, a reduced WLL, a reduced Design (Safety) Factor, or with-drawn from service.

Crosby Group products generally are intended for tension or pull. Sideloading must be avoided, as it exerts additional force or loading which theproduct is not designed to accommodate.

Always make sure the hook supports the load.The latch must never sup-port the load.

Welding of load supporting parts or products can be hazardous.Knowledge of materials, heat treatment, and welding procedures are nec-essary for proper welding. Crosby Group should be consulted for infor-mation.

Fitting Maintenance________________________Fittings, including hooks, overhaul balls, shackles, links, etc., may

become worn and disfigured with use, corrosion, and abuse resulting innicks, gouges, worn threads and bearings, sharp corners which may pro-duce additional stress conditions and reduce system load capacity.

Grinding is the recommended procedure to restore smooth surfaces.The maximum allowance for reduction of a product’s original dimensiondue to wear or repair before removal from service is:

1. Any single direction - No more than 10% of original dimension;2. Two directions - No more than 5% of each dimension.

For detailed instructions on specific products, see the application andwarning information for that product. Any greater reduction may necessi-tate a reduced Working Load Limit.

Any crack or deformation in a fitting is sufficient cause to withdraw theproduct from service.


SHEAVE BEARING APPLICATION INFORMATION

Tackle Blocks must be regularly inspected, lubricated, and maintained for peak efficiency and extended usefulness. Their properuse and maintenance is equal in importance to other mechanical equipment. The frequency of inspection and lubrication isdependent upon frequency and periods of use, environmental conditions, and the user's good judgment.

Inspection: As a minimum, the following points should be considered:1. Wear on pins or axles, rope grooves, side plates, bushing or bearings, and fittings. (See Fitting Maintenance.) Excessive wear

may be a cause to replace parts or remove block from service.2. Deformation in side plates, pins and axles, fitting attachment points, trunnions, etc. Deformation can be caused by abusive

service and / or overload and may be a cause to remove block from service.3. Misalignment or wobble in sheaves.4. Security of nuts, bolts, and other locking methods, especially after reassembly following a tear down inspection. Original secur-

ing method should be used; e.g., staking, set screw, cotter pin, cap screw.5. Pins retained by snap rings should be checked for missing or loose rings.6. Sheave pin nuts should be checked for proper positioning. Pins for tapered roller bearings should be tightened to remove all

end play during sheave rotation. Pins for bronze bushings and straight roller bearings should have a running clearance of .031inch per sheave of end play and should be adjusted accordingly.

7. Hook or shackle to swivel case clearance is set at .031 to .062 at the factory. Increased clearance can result from componentwear. Clearance exceed ing .12 to.18 should necessitate disassembly and further inspection.

8. Deformation or corrosion of hook and nut threads.9. Surface condition and deformation of hook (See Fitting Maintenance and ANSI B30.10.)10. Welded side plates for weld corrosion or weld cracking.11. Hook latch for deformation, proper fit and operation.

Lubrication: The frequency of lubrication depends upon frequency and period of product use as well as environmental conditions,which are contingent upon the user's good judgment. Assuming normal product use, the following schedule is suggested whenusing lithium-base grease of a medium consistency.

Sheave BearingsTapered Roller Bearings—Every 40 hours of continuous operation or every 30 days of intermittent operation.Roller Bearings—Every 24 hours of continuous operation or every 14 days of intermittent operation.Bronze Bushings—(Not Self Lubricated)—Every 8 hours of continuous operation or every 14 days of intermittent operation.

Hook BearingsAnti Friction—Every 14 days for frequent swiveling; every 45 days for infrequent swiveling.Bronze Thrust Bushing or No Bearing—Every 16 hours for frequent swiveling; every 21 days for infrequent swiveling.Tackle Block Maintenance also depends upon proper block selection (see "Loads on Blocks"), proper reeving (see "The

Reeving of Tackle Blocks"), consideration of shock loads, side loading, and other adverse conditions.

BRONZE BUSHINGS—Bronze Bushings are used primarily for sheave applications using slow line speed, moderate load, and moderate use.The per-

formance capability of a bearing is related to the bearing pressure and the bearing surface velocity by a relationship known as truePV (Maximum Pressure - Velocity Factor). The material properties of the Bronze Bushings furnished as standard in Crosby cata-log sheaves are:

(BP) Maximum Bearing Pressure :4500 PSI(BV) Maximum Velocity at Bearing :1200 FPM(PV) Maximum Pressure Velocity Factor :55000

(It should be noted that due to material property relations, the maximum BP times the maximum BV is NOT equal to the maximumPV.)

Formula for Calculating Bearing Pressure:BP = Line Pull x Angle Factor

Shaft Size x Hub WidthNote: Angle factor Multipliers listed on page 19

Formula for Calculating Bearing Velocity:BV = PV

BP

Formula for Calculating Line Speed:Line Speed = BV (Tread Diameter + Rope Diameter)

Shaft Diameter

TACKLE BLOCK MAINTENANCE


ANGLE FACTOR MULTIPLIERSANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR

0° 2.00 100° 1.2910° 1.99 110° 1.1520° 1.97 120° 1.0030° 1.93 130° .8440° 1.87 135° .7645° 1.84 140° .6850° 1.81 150° .5260° 1.73 160° .3570° 1.64 170° .1780° 1.53 180° .0090° 1.41 — —

The Working Load Limit (WLL) for Crosby Group blocks indicates the maximum load that should be exerted on the block and itsconnecting fitting.

This total load value may be different from the weight being lifted or pulled by a hoisting or hauling system. It is necessary todetermine the total load being imposed on each block in the system to properly determine the rated capacity block to be used.

A single sheave block used to change load line direction can be subjected to total loads greatly different from the weight beinglifted or pulled. The total load value varies with the angle between the incoming and departing lines to the block.

The following chart indicates the factor to be multiplied by the line pull to obtain the total load on the block.

Example A(Calculations for determining total load value on single line

system.)A gin pole truck lifting 1,000 Ibs.

There is no mechanical advantage to a single part load line system, so winch line pull is equal to 1,000 Ibs. or the weight beinglifted.

To determine total load on snatch block A: A = 1,000 Ibs. x 1.81 = 1,810 Ibs.(line pull) (factor 50° angle)

To determine total load on toggle block, B: B = 1,000 Ibs. x .76 = 760 Ibs.(line pull) (factor 135° angle)

Calculations can be made to find the maximum allowable line speed for a given total sheave load. If the required line speed isgreater than the maximum allowable line speed calculated, then increase the shaft size and/or the hub width and recalculate.Continue the process until the maximum allowable line speed is equal to or exceeds the required line speed.

ExampleUsing a 14 in. sheave (Stock # 917191; refer to wire rope sheave section of 950 General Catalog for dimensions) with a 4600 lb. Iine pull and an 80° angle between lines determine maximum allowable line speed.

BP = (4600 lb. x 1.53) —: (1. 50 x 1.62) = 2896 PSI(line pull) (angle factor) (Shaft Size) (Hub Width)

BV = 55000 —: 2896 = 19 FPM ALLOWABLE(PV Factor) (BP)

Line Speed = 19 x (12 + .75) —: 1.50 = 161.5 FPM ALLOWABLE(BV) (Tread Dia + Rope Size) (Shaft Dia.)

If the application required a line speed equal to 200 FPM, then another calculation would be necessary. Trying another 14 in.sheave (stock # 4104828) under the same loading conditions, the results are as follows:

BP = (4600 Ibs. x 1.53) —: (2.75 x 2.31) = 1108 PSIBV = 55000 —: 1108 = 50 FPMLine Speed = 50 x (12.25 + .75)—: 2.75 = 236 FPM ALLOWABLE

COMMON (PLAIN) BORE—Very slow line speed, very infrequent use, low load.ROLLER BEARING—Faster line speeds, more frequent use, greater load. Refer to manufacturer's rating.

LOADS ON BLOCKS



THE REEVING OFTACKLE BLOCKSIn reeving of tackle blocks, there are manymethods. The method discussed below isreferred to as "Right Angle" reeving.Please consult your rigging manual forother methods of reeving.

RIGHT ANGLE REEVINGIn reeving a pair of tackle blocks, one ofwhich has more than two sheaves, thehoisting rope should lead from one of thecenter sheaves of the upper block to pre-vent toppling and avoid injury to the rope.The two blocks should be placed so thatthe sheaves in the upper block are at rightangles to those in the lower one, as shown in the following illustrations.

Start reeving with the becket or dead end of the rope. Use a shackle block as the upper one of a pair and a hook blockas the lower one as seen below.

Sheaves in a set of blocks revolve at different rates of speed. Those nearest the lead line revolve at the highest rate ofspeed and wear out more rapidly.

All sheaves should be kept well lubricated when in operation to reduce friction and wear.

Example B (Calculation for determining total load value for mechanical advantage system.)

Hoisting system lifting 1,000 Ibs. using a traveling block.The mechanical advantage of traveling block C is 2.00 because two (2) parts of load line support the 1,000 lb. weight. (To

determine single line pull for various bearing efficiency see "How to Figure Line Parts" page 109).To Determine Line Pull:Line Pull = 1000 Ibs. —: 2.00 = 500 Ibs.

To determine total load on traveling blockC = 500lbs. x 2.0 = 1,000 lbs.

(line pull) (Factor 0° angle)

To determine total load on stationary block D:D = 500 Ibs. x 1.87 + 500 Ibs. = 1,435 Ibs.

(line pull) (Factor 40° angle) (dead end load)

To determine total load on block E:E = 500 Ibs. x .84 = 420 Ibs.


To determine total load on block F:F = 500 Ibs. x 1.41 = 705 Ibs.


"Right Angle" Reeving Diagram



CHART ONE (1)ANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR

RATIO A STRENGTH EFFICIENCY COMPARED TO CATALOG STRENGTH IN %

40 9530 9320 9115 8910 868 836 794 752 651 50

SHEAVE SIZE AND WIRE ROPE STRENGTH

0° 2.0 70° 1.64 140° .68010° 1.98 80° 1.53 150° .52020° 1.97 90° 1.41 160° .35030° 1.93 100° 1.29 170° .17040° 1.87 110° 1.150 180° .00050° 1.81 120° 1.00060° 1.73 130° .840

L x A = S L = Load in lbs. A = Angle factor S = Stress in lbs.SAMPLE: By using a 500 lb. weight, the stress exerted on the eye would be 1,000 lbs.

L x A = S500 lbs. x 2.0 = 1,000 lbs.

See Chart 1 Below for Angle Factors

Strength EfficiencyBending wire rope reduces its strength. To account for the effect of bend radius on wire rope strength when selecting a sheave,use the table below.

RATIO B RELATIVE FATIGUE BENDING LIFE

30 10.025 6.620 3.818 2.916 2.114 1.512 1.1

Fatigue LifeRepeated bending and straightening of wire rope causes a cyclic change of stress called “fatiguing.” Bend radius affects wire ropefatigue life. A comparison of the relative effect of sheave diameter on wire rope fatigue life can be determined as shown below:

STRESS FORMULA

TACKLE BLOCK INFORMATION


WIRE ROPE FACTOR A—WIRE ROPE WEIGHTSIZE (INCHES) LBS. PER FT., 6 X 19 IWRC

3/8 .267/16 .351/2 .469/16 .595/8 .723/4 1.047/8 1.421 1.85

1-1/8 2.341-1/4 2.89

FACTOR B—OVERHAUL FACTORSNUMBER OF ROLLER BEARING BRONZE BUSHEDLINE PARTS SHEAVES SHEAVES

1 1.03 1.052 2.07 2.143 3.15 3.284 4.25 4.485 5.38 5.726 6.54 7.037 7.73 8.398 8.94 9.809 10.20 11.3010 11.50 12.80

RATIO A RATIO B NUMBERBRONZE BUSHED ANTI-FRICTION OF LINE

SHEAVES BEARING SHEAVES PARTS

.96 .98 11.87 1.94 22.75 2.88 33.59 3.81 44.39 4.71 55.16 5.60 65.90 6.47 76.60 7.32 87.27 8.16 97.91 8.98 108.52 9.79 119.11 10.60 129.68 11.40 13

10.20 12.10 1410.70 12.90 1511.20 13.60 1611.70 14.30 1712.20 15.00 1812.60 15.70 1913.00 16.40 20

HOW TO DETERMINEOVERHAULING WEIGHTS

To help figure the number of parts of line to be used fora given load, or the line pull required for a given load,(For example use reeving diagram on page 20. Onlynumbered lines shall be used in the calculation). Thefollowing ratio table is provided with examples of how touse it.

Ratio A or B = Total Load to be LiftedSingle Line Pull (Ibs.)

After calculating Ratio A or B, consult table to determine number ofparts of line.

Examples• To find the number of parts of line needed when weight of load

and single line pull are known, and using Bronze Bushed Sheaves.

Ratio A = 72,180 Ibs. (load to be lifted) = 9.068,000 Ibs. (single line pull) (Ratio A)

Refer to ratio 9.06 in table or number nearest to it, then check col-umn under heading "Number of Line Parts" = 12 parts of line to beused for this load.

• To find the single line pull needed when weight of load and numberof parts of line are known, and using anti-friction bearing sheaves.

Single Line Pull = 68,000 Ibs.(load to be lifted) = 9290 lbs.7.32 (Ratio B of 8 part line)

9,290 Ibs. single line pull required to lift this load on 8 parts of line.

• To find the lift capacity when the parts of line and single line pullare known, and using anti-friction bearing sheaves.

10,000 Ibs. (single line pull) x 4.71 (ratio B of 5 parts of line)

= 47,100 Ibs. (Lift Capacity) 10,000 Ibs. single line pull with 5 parts of line will accommodate47,1001bs. Iift capacity.

The Formula is:Required Block Weight = [(Boom Length x Factor A) + Drum Friction] x Factor B

ExampleTo determine the required block or overhaul weight using 5 parts of7/8" diameter wire rope, a 50 ft. boom and roller bearing sheaves:

Required Block Weight =[(50 ft. x 1.42) + 50 lbs.] x 5.38 = 651 lbs.

(Boom length) Factor A (Drum Friction) (Factor B)

To determine the weight of the block or overhaul ball that is required tofree fall the block, the following information is needed: size of wire rope,number of line parts, type of sheave bearing, length of crane boom,and drum friction (use 50 pounds, unless other information is avail-able).

HOW TO FIGURE LINE PARTS

TACKLE BLOCK INFORMATION


CODE NO. CHAIN WORKING LOAD INSIDE INSIDE WEIGHT PERBLACK SIZE LIMIT (LBS.) DIA. WIDTH LENGTH 100 FT. (LBS.)

140G80 1/4” 3,500 .28 .39 .83 74380G80 3/8” 7,100 .39 .55 1.2 151120G80 1/2” 12,000 .51 .71 1.5 253580G80 5/8” 18,100 .63 .87 1.9 382340G80 3/4” 28,300 .75 1.0 2.2 524780G80 7/8” 34,200 .87 1.2 2.6 738100G80 1” 47,700 1.0 1.4 3.1 996114G80 1-1/4” 72,300 1.26 1.7 3.8 1575

NOTE: Grade 100 also available

G-80 ALLOY SLING CHAINTested and rated for overhead lifting.

CODE NO. CHAIN WORKING LOAD INSIDE INSIDE WEIGHT PERBLACK SIZE LIMIT (LBS.) DIA. WIDTH LENGTH 100 FT. (LBS.)

140G43 1/4” 2,600 .281 .48 1.01 71516G43 5/16” 3,900 .327 .50 1.11 98380G43 3/8” 5,400 .390 .62 1.24 144120G43 1/2” 9,200 .531 .82 1.51 278580G43 5/8” 11,500 .656 1.01 1.88 422340G43 3/4” 16,200 .781 1.13 2.13 606780G43 7/8” 22,500 .875 1.38 2.52 769100G43 1” 26,500 1.00 1.51 2.77 1069

G-43 STANDARD TIE DOWN CHAIN HIGH TESTNot for overhead lifting. Available in Zinc Plated and Hot Galvanized.

CODE NO. CHAIN WORKING LOAD INSIDE INSIDE WEIGHT PERGOLD SIZE LIMIT (LBS.) DIA. WIDTH LENGTH 100 FT. (LBS.)

140G70 1/4” 3,150 .281 .48 .84 74516G70 5/16” 4,700 .327 .47 .99 100380G70 3/8” 6,600 .406 .54 1.15 156120G70 1/2” 11,300 .531 .73 1.45 259

NOTE: G-70 Transport Chain has a gold dichromate finish.

G-70 PREMIUM TIE DOWN CHAINNot for overhead lifting.

CODE NO. CODE NO. CODE NO. CHAIN WORKING LOAD INSIDE INSIDE WEIGHT PERBRIGHT ZINC PLATED HOT GALV. SIZE LIMIT (LBS.) DIA. (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) LENGTH (IN.) 100 FT. (LBS.)

316S30 316Z30 316G30 3/16” 800 .218 .41 .96 38140S30 140Z30 140G30 1/4” 1300 .276 .48 1.01 98516S30 516Z30 516G30 5/16” 1900 .327 .50 1.11 144380S30 380Z30 380G30 3/8” 2650 .390 .62 1.24 278120S30 120Z30 120G30 1/2” 4500 .531 .82 1.51 422580S30 580Z30 580G30 5/8” 6900 .656 1.01 1.88 628340S30 340Z30 340G30 3/4” 10,600 .787 1.13 2.13 1069

G-30 PROOF COIL GENERAL PURPOSE CHAINNot for overhead lifting.

WELDED CHAIN GRADE 30, 43, 70, 80


TRADE SIZE ACTUAL MATERIAL DIAMETER MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DIAMETERINCHES MM INCHES MM AT WORN PORTION OF LINK

SYSTEMS 3 AND 43/16 5 .218 5.53 .1711/4 7 .281 7.14 .2345/16 8 .343 8.71 .2653/8 10 .406 10.31 .2967/16 11 .468 11.89 .3431/2 13 .531 13.49 .3905/8 16 .656 16.66 .4843/4 20 .781 19.84 .5937/8 22 .906 23.01 .7031 25 1.031 26.19 .8281-1/4 32 1.281 32.54 1.031

SYSTEM 71/4 7 .281 7.14 .2345/16 8 .343 8.71 .2653/8 10 .394 10.00 .2967/16 11 .468 11.89 .3431/2 13 .512 13.00 .390

SYSTEM 87/32 5 .218 5.53 .1729/32 7 .281 7.14 .2345/16 8 .315 8.00 .2503/8 10 .394 10.00 .2961/2 13 .512 13.00 .3915/8 16 .630 16.00 .4843/4 20 .787 20.00 .5947/8 22 .881 22.40 .7031 25 1.000 25.40 .8131-1/4 32 1.250 31.75 1.000

MINIMUM ALLOWABLE DIAMETER CHART

WASHBURN NEAREST CHAIN NUMBERAND MOEN FRACTIONS DECIMALS WELDLESS WELDED

WIRE OF AN OF AN EQUIV. DOUBLE LOCKGAUGE INCH INCH IN MM LOOP LINK JACK COIL MACHINE

No. 20 1/32 .034 0.88 — — No. 20 — —No. 18 3/64 .047 1.20 No. 7 — No. 18 — —No. 17 3/64 .054 1.37 No. 6 — — — —No. 16 1/16 .062 1.59 No. 5 — No. 16 — —No. 15 5/64 .072 1.83 No. 4 No. 4 — — —No. 14 5/64 .080 2.03 No. 3 No. 3 No. 14 — —No. 13 3/32 .091 2.32 No. 2 No. 2 — — —No. 12 7/64 .105 2.68 No. 1 No. 1 No. 12 — —No. 11 1/8 .120 3.06 No. 1/0 No. 1/0 — No. 4 No. 4No. 10 9/64 .135 3.43 No. 2/0 No. 2/0 No. 10 No. 3 No. 3No. 9 5/32 .148 2.77 No. 3/0 NO. 3/0 — No. 2 No.2No. 8 5/32 .162 4.12 No. 4/0 No. 4/0 No. 8 No. 1 No. 1No. 7 11/64 .177 4.50 No. 5/0 No. 5/0 — No. 1/0 No. 1/0No. 6 3/16 .192 4.88 No. 6/0 No. 6/0 No. 6 No. 2/0 No. 2/0No. 5 13/64 .207 5.26 No. 7/0 No. 7/0 No. 5 No. 3/0 No. 3/0

– 7/32 .218 5.56 — — — — —No. 4 15/64 .225 5.72 No. 8/0 — — No. 4/0 No. 4/0

— 1/4 .250 6.35 — — — No. 5/0 No. 5/0— 9/32 .281 7.14 — — — No. 6/0 No. 6/0— 5/16 .312 7.94 — — — No. 7/0 No. 7/0— 11/32 .343 8.73 — — — — No. 8/0— 3/8 .375 9.52 — — — — No. 9/0— 13/32 .406 10.32 — — — — No. 10/0— 7/16 .437 11.11 — — — — No. 11/0— 15/32 .468 11.91 — — — — No. 12/0— 17/32 .531 13.49 — — — — No. 14/0

COMPARATIVE TABLE OF WIRE SIZES AND CHAIN SIZES

Campbell welded chain products are designed and builtfor rugged lasting service. As with any quality productcertain precautions and standards of treatment shouldbe observed. Follow the suggestions listed below andthe serviceable life may be extended considerablybeyond the normal life of the chain. Campbell engineersshould be consulted when heat treated chain is used atunusual temperatures (under -20°F) [-29°C] or over350°F [1 77°C] or where special applications arerequired.

Instructions Regarding Attachments: Where attach-ments, such as hooks or rings, are designed for usewith chain in sustaining loads, care should be taken toselect the type, grade and size recommended.Attachments shall have a rated capacity (working loadlimit) at least equal to that of the steel chain with whichthey are used; if not, the assembly shall be rated to thecapacity of the weakest component.

Cautions: The terms "working load limit" and "prooftest" contain no implication of what load the chain willwithstand if either of the above factors are changed.NEVER EXCEED THE WORKING LOAD LIMIT OFCHAIN even when chain is new and the load is uni-formly applied. Manufacturer denies any liability fordamage which may result from use in excess of work-ing load limit. Any abuse or misuse of the product maylessen the load the product will withstand. Some exam-ples of such changes and abuses are as follows:

Twisting.Disfigurement.Deterioration of the product by strain, usage or

corrosion.Shock loading.Use for a purpose other than that for which the

particular product was intended.Use to carry a load in excess of working load limit.

Purchasers will please note that all the "cautions" aboveset forth apply not only to the use of the chain, but alsoto the use of attachments thereon.

OTHER ATTACHMENTSAVAILABLE UPON

REQUEST

CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF CHAIN


HOOK SIZE 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4

Code No. Clear Finish M204H M205H M206H M207H M208H M210H M212H

Code No. Zinc Plated M204HZ M205HZ M206HZ M207HZ M208HZ M210HZ M212HZ

Rated Working Load (lbs.) 2,600 3,900 5,400 7,200 9,200 13,000 20,200

Weight per 100 lbs. 28 55 80 132 170 305 610

Code No. Clear Finish M304H M305H M306H M307H M308H M310H

Code No. Zinc Plated M304HZ M305HZ M306HZ M307HZ M308HZ M310HZ

Rated Working Load (lbs.) 2,600 3,900 5,400 7,200 9,200 13,000

Weight per 100 lbs. 45 60 100 150 190 380

Code No. Clear Finish M804L M805L M806L M807L M808L M810L M812

Code No. Zinc Plated M804ZL M805ZL M806ZL M807ZL M808ZL M810ZL M812Z

Rated Working Load (lbs.) 2,600 3,900 5,400 7,200 9,200 13,000 20,200

Weight per 100 lbs. 40 65 100 150 200 400 700

Code No. Clear Finish M904L M905L M906L M907L M908L M910

Code No. Zinc Plated M904ZL M905ZL M906ZL M907ZL M908ZL M910Z


Weight per 100 lbs. 50 75 125 200 280 500

Code No. Clear Finish M804A M805A M806A M807A* M808A M810A


Weight per 100 lbs. 40 65 100 150 200 400

*Grade 63

Not recommended for overhead lifting in sling application.

Code No. Clear Finish M904A M905A M906A M907A M908A M910A


Weight per 100 lbs. 50 75 125 200 280 500

Not recommended for overhead lifting in sling application.

Code No. Zinc Plated M605 M605 M606 M608 M608 M610

Standard Package 10 10 10 5 5 5

Rated Working Load (lbs.) 4700 4700 6600 11,300 11,300 18,000

Weight per 100 lbs. 3.5 3.5 4.5 5.0 5.0 8.5

G-43EYE GRABHOOK

G-43EYE SLIPHOOK

G-43CLEVISGRAB HOOK

G-43CLEVISSLIP HOOK

G-80ALLOY CLEVISGRAB HOOK

G-63ALLOYCLEVISSLIP HOOK

DOUBLECLEVISLINK

D81901 1/8 20 1-9/64 25/64 13/64 3 220D81001 3/16 20 1-1/2 1/2 1/4 4-1/2 616D81101 1/4 20 1-3/4 9/16 9/32 8 880D81201 5/16 20 2-5/16 11/16 3/8 17 1,540D81301 3/8 10 2-7/16 3/4 7/16 23 1,980D81501 1/2 10 3-3/16 15/16 19/32 51 3.300

QUICKLINKS—ZINCPLATED

NOTE: NO ITEMS ON THIS PAGE ARE RECOMMENDED FOR OVERHEAD LIFTING.

CHAIN HOOKS & ACCESSORIES

INSIDE INSIDE SIDE WEIGHT WORKINGSIZE STD. LENGTH WIDTH OPENING PER EACH LOAD LIMIT

CODE NO. (IN.) PKG. (IN.) (IN.) (IN.) (LBS.) (LBS.)


Size 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4

Size 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1

BRIGHT CODE NO. ZINC PLATED CODE NO. Size QTY. PER CARTON WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.)

Code No. Self Colored D50090 D50190 D40290 D50390 D50490 D50590 D50690 51790Code No. Zinc Plated D50091 D50191 D50291 D50391 D50491 D50591 D50691 51791Weight per 100 lbs. 3 6 10 18 26 38 78 128

Applications: As temporary repair link, use one size larger than G-30 chain with which it is to be used.Not for Lifting or Tie Down use.

COLD SHUTS—NO. 1 PLAIN

Code No.Clear Finish M613 M614 M615 M616 M617 M618 M620 M622 M624 M626Code No. Electro Galv. M613G M614G M615G M616G M617G M618G M620G M622G M624G M626GRated Working Load (lbs.) 800 1,300 1,900 2,650 3,500 4,500 6,900 9,750 12,800 14,000Weight per 100 lbs. 3 8 12 20 29 42 75 116 175 240

For use on G-30 chain only. Not for Lifting or Tie Down Use.

CONNECTING LINKS

— 653612 1/8 x 3/4 100 3-1/8653180 653618 3/16 x 1 100 3-1/4653211 653621 7/32 x 1-1/4 50 4-3/4653251 653625 1/4 x 1-1/4 50 6-3/4653253 653626 1/4 x 1-1/2 50 7-1/4653255 653627 1/4 x 2 50 9-2/4653281 653628 9/32 x 1-1/4 50 8-1/4653312 653631 5/16 x 1-1/2 50 13653315 653632 5/16 x 2 50 17653373 653633 3/8 x 1-5/8 50 23653375 653638 3/8 x 2 50 26653506 653650 1/2 x 2-1/2 25 53

Applications: A temporary repair link for light applications. Not for Lifting or Tie Down use.

REPAIR LINKS / LAP LINK

BRIGHT CODE NO. ZINC PLATED CODE NO. NO. MATERIAL SIZE INSIDE LENGTH (IN.) WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.)

687120 687420 20 .080 27/32 5/16687121 687421 21 .080 11/16 1/4687140 687440 40 .134 1-1/16 1687160 687460 60 .192 1-13/16 3-1/2687161 687461 61 .204 1-5/8 3-7/8687162 687462 62* .175 1-3/8 2-1/2687172 687472 72* .225 1-1/2 4-3/4687180 687480 80 .250 1-13/16 6-1/2687181 687481 81 .250 2-1/2 8— 687484 84* .250 1-25/32 6-1/4687190 687490 100 .312 2-1/4 11-3/4687192 687492 120 .375 2-3/8 19-1/2

Packed 50 pieces per carton. *See Figure 2 for these sizes only.Appliations: Used to attach accessories to chain. Light duty only. Not for Lifting or Tie Down use.

“S” HOOKS

CHAIN HOOKS & ACCESSORIES

Diameter 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2

Length Overall 2-1/8 2-1/2 3-1/8 4 4-3/4 5-1/2 6-3/8Snap opening 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1Working Load Lt. 100 140 280 400 500 600 700Wgt. per 100 4 7 15 30 43 60 80

N0. 2450 SPRING HOOKS Plated formed steel

Diameter 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 1/2

Length Overall 2-1/8 2-1/2 3-1/8 4 4-3/4 5-1/2 6-3/8Snap opening 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 1Working Load Lt. 100 140 280 400 500 600 700Wgt. per 100 4 7 15 30 43 60 80

N0. 2451 SPRING HOOKS with RINGED EYE Plated formed ste

N0. 2450

N0. 2451


WELDED CHAIN

TWIST LINKCODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET DIAMETER WIRE LINK DIMENSIONS LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING

TRADE HOT FRACTIONAL DECIMAL INSIDE INSIDE PER 100 FT. LOAD LIMIT*NO. BRIGHT ZINC PLATED GALVANIZED INCHES INCHES LENGTH (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) FOOT POUNDS POUNDS

4 620709 620809 — 1/8 .120 1-3/32 15/64 11 10 1953 620711 620811 — 9/64 .135 1-9/64 15/64 10-1/2 13 2402 620713 620813 — 5/32 .148 1-9/64 17/64 10-1/2 16 295

1/0 620717 620817 620617 11/64 .177 1-15/64 19/64 9-3/4 24 4152/0 620719 620819 620619 3/16 .192 1-15/64 21/64 9-3/4 29 4954/0 620621 620821 620621 7/32 .218 1-3/8 11/32 8-3/4 36 6355/0 620725 620825 620625 1/4 .250 1-15/32 3/8 8-1/8 48 835

STRAIGHT LINKCODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET DIAMETER WIRE LINK DIMENSIONS LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING


4 620209 620309 — 1/8 .120 1-9/64 15/64 10-1/2 10 2053 620211 620311 — 9/64 .135 1-11/64 15/64 10-1/4 13 2552 620213 620313 — 5/32 .148 1-11/64 9/32 10-1/4 15 310

1/0 620217 620317 620117 11/64 .177 1-15/64 5/16 9-3/4 23 4402/0 620219 620319 620119 3/16 .192 1-19/64 11/32 9-1/4 27 5204/0 620221 620321 620121 7/32 .218 1-13/32 3/8 8-1/2 35 6705/0 620225 620325 620125 1/4 .250 1-33/64 7/16 7-7/8 46 880

TWIST LINK COIL CHAIN

STRAIGHT LINK COIL CHAIN

CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET SIZE INSIDE INSIDE LINKS WEIGHT PERTRADE ZINC MATERIAL LENGTH WIDTH PER 100 FT.

NO. BRIGHT PLATED INCHES INCHES INCHES FOOT POUNDS

2/0 623219 623459 3/16 7/8 15/32 13-5/8 334/0 623221 623461 7/32 7/8 15/32 13-5/8 43

PASSING LINK CHAIN

*CAUTION: Working Load Limits should not be exceeded. All data approximate and subject to variation.NOTE: The grades of chain on this page are not intended for use as sling or lifting chains. For overhead lifting use CM Herc-Alloy 800 Chain Slings.

SOME TYPES AND SIZES ARE AVAILABLE VINYL COATED IN WHITE OR YELLOW

TWIST LINKCODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET DIAMETER WIRE LINK DIMENSIONS LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING


4 621709 621809 — 1/8 .120 33/64 5/32 23-1/2 13 2053 621711 621811 — 9/64 .135 9/16 11/64 21-1/2 16 2552 621713 621813 — 5/32 .148 37/64 15/64 21 20 310

1/0 621717 621817 621617 11/64 .177 11/16 17/64 17-1/2 29 4402/0 621719 621819 621619 3/16 .192 23/32 19/64 16-1/2 34 5204/0 621621 621821 621621 7/32 .218 55.64 11/32 14 43 6705/0 621725 621825 621625 1/4 .250 1 3/8 12 57 880

TWIST LINK MACHINE CHAIN

STRAIGHT LINKCODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET DIAMETER WIRE LINK DIMENSIONS LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING


4 621209 621309 — 1/8 .120 35/64 7/32 22 12 2153 621211 621311 — 9/64 .135 19/32 7/32 20 15 2702 621213 621313 — 5/32 .148 19/32 1/4 20 19 325

1/0 621217 621317 621117 11/64 .177 47/64 5/16 16-1/2 27 4652/0 621219 621319 621119 3/16 .192 25/32 23/64 15-1/4 32 5454/0 621221 621321 621121 7/32 .218 29/32 25/64 13-1/4 41 7005/0 621225 621325 621125 1/4 .250 1-1/16 7/16 11-1/4 54 925

STRAIGHT LINK MACHINE CHAIN


WELDLESS CHAIN

CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET MATERIAL INSIDE LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOADTRADE HOT DIAMETER LENGTH PER 100 FT. LIMIT*

SIZE BRIGHT ZINC PLATED GALVANIZED INCHES INCHES FOOT POUNDS POUNDS

5 680150 680450 680350 .062 .92 13 3-1/2 554 680151 680451 680351 .072 1.00 12 4-1/2 703 680152 680452 680352 .080 1.09 11 5-3/4 902 680153 680453 680353 .092 1.33 9 7-1/2 1151 680154 680454 680354 .105 1.50 8 10 155

1/0 680155 680455 680355 .120 1.71 7 13 2002/0 680156 680456 680356 .135 1.71 7 17 2553/0 680157 680457 680357 .148 2.18 5.5 20 3054/0 680158 680458 680358 .162 2.18 5.5 23 3658/0 680159 680459 680359 .225 2.90 4.1 48 705

DOUBLE LOOP CHAIN

CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET MATERIAL INSIDE LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOADTRADE HOT DIAMETER LENGTH PER 100 FT. LIMIT*

SIZE BRIGHT ZINC PLATED GALVANIZED INCHES INCHES FOOT POUNDS POUNDS

2 681150 681450 681350 .092 1.08 11.1 9 1551/0 681151 681451 681351 .120 1.29 9.3 16 2652/0 681152 681452 681352 .135 1.48 8.1 23 3403/0 681153 681453 681353 .148 1.63 7.4 26 4054/0 681154 681454 681354 .162 1.80 6.7 29 4855/0 681155 681455 — .177 2.15 5.6 34 580

SINGLE LOOP CHAIN

CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET MATERIAL INSIDE LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOADTRADE BRASS DIAMETER LENGTH PER 100 FT. LIMIT* POUNDS

SIZE BRIGHT ZINC PLATED (BRIGHT) INCHES INCHES FOOT POUNDS STEEL BRASS

18 684151 684451 684751 .047 .39 31 1-3/4 5 416 684152 684452 684752 .062 .48 25 2-3/4 11 814 684153 684453 684753 .080 .63 19 5 16 1112 684154 684454 684754 .105 .75 16 8-1/2 29 2010 684155 684455 684755 .135 .92 13 13 48 348 684156 684456 684756 .162 1.09 11 20 60 426 684157 684457 684757 .192 1.26 9.5 26 95 66

SINGLE JACK CHAIN

CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET STOCK INSIDE LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOADTRADE COPPER THICKNESS LENGTH PER 100 FT. LIMIT*

SIZE BRIGHT ZINC PLATED PLATED INCHES INCHES FOOT POUNDS POUNDS

8 683151 683451 683551 .035 .57 21 4 7525 683152 683452 683552 .042 .57 21 5 9530 683153 683453 683553 .028 .57 21 5-1/2 8035 683154 683454 683554 .035 .57 21 7 10540 683156 683456 683556 .042 .55 22 8 15045 683157 683457 683557 .050 .55 22 9-1/2 17550 683158 683458 683558 .062 .62 19.5 13 225

SASH CHAIN

CODE NUMBER CARTON 100 FEET STOCK INSIDE LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOADTRADE THICKNESS LENGTH PER 100 FT. LIMIT*

SIZE BRIGHT INCHES INCHES FOOT POUNDS POUNDS

2/0 685754 .018 .44 27 2 231/0 685755 .023 .50 24 2-1/4 351 685756 .028 .60 20 3 45

SAFETY CHAIN

*CAUTION: Working Load Limits should not be exceeded. All data approximate and subject to variation.NOTE: The grades of chain on this page are not intended for use as sling or lifting chains. For overhead lifting use CM Herc-Alloy 800 Chain Slings.

SOME TYPES AND SIZES ARE AVAILABLE VINYL COATED IN WHITE OR YELLOW

THEATRICAL HANGING CHAINSTOCK LINKS WEIGHT PER WORKING LOAD

THICKNESS INSIDE INSIDE PER 100 FT. LIMIT*CODE # INCHES LENGTH WIDTH FOOT POUNDS POUNDS

033-6014 .28 1.50 .47 8 63 1100


USE: U.S. Federal DOT regulations require the aggregate breaking strength (minimum ultimate strength) of the tiedown assem-blies used to secure an article against movement in any direction to be at least 1-1/2 (1.5) times the weight of that article.

Commercial Vehicle Safety Alliance (CVSA) guidelines state the aggregate static working load limit (WLL) of the tiedownassemblies used to secure an article against movement in any direction must be equal to at least 1/2 (.5) times the weight of thatarticle. The information presented in Table VI is provided to assist in the proper application of binder chain assemblies.

WEIGHT OF ARTICLE— LBS. 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 50,000

1/4 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 8 8Binding G70 5/16 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6

3/8 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4Alloy G80 3/8 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4

*Commercial vehicle safety alliance (CVSA) Guidelines state the aggregate static working load limit (W.L.L.) ofthe tiedown assemblies used to secure an article against movement in any direction must be equal to at least1/2 (.5) times the weight of the article. U.S. D.O.T. requires the aggregate breaking strength (Minimum UltimateStrength) of the Tie Down Assemblies used to secure an article against movement in any direction be at least 1-1/2 (1.5) times the weight of that article. The data presented also complies with D.O.T. requirements.

CODE NO. DESCRIPTION RATED WORKING LOAD (LBS.)

BC751620 5/16” x 20 feet G-70 4,700BC738020 3/8” x 20 feet G-70

CUSTOM MADE IN OUR SHOP

STOCK SIZES — SPECIAL LOW PRICE

TABLE VIMINIMUM NUMBER OF CHAINS REQUIRED TO

SECURE AN ARTICLE AGAINST MOVEMENT IN ANY DIRECTION

BINDER CHAINS

6,600


CODE NO. MIN.-MAX. CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) TAKE UP INCHES WEIGHT EACH

DL140 3/16 - 1/4 2600 3 2.5DL380 5/16 - 3/8 5400 4.5 7.0DL120 3/8 - 1/2 9200 4.5 11.2DL580 1/2 - 5/8 13,000 4.75 19.2

STANDARD LEVEL TYPE BINDERForged steel. Quenched and Tempered. Hooks are quenched and tempered alloy steel. Extra heavy construction at leverage pointto prevent spreading. Heel of binder toggles away from load, permitting easy release. Ball and socket swivel joints at hook assem-blies permit a straight line pull. L-150 available with links only; also snubbing type, releasing type and walking type binders.

CODE NO. MIN.-MAX. CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS.) TAKE UP INCHES WEIGHT EACH

DR140 3/16 - 1/4 2600 8 3.5DR380 5/16 - 3/8 6600 8 11.0DR120 3/8 - 1/2 9200 8 13.7DR580 1/2 - 5/8 13,000 8 14.6

NOTE: Special Ratchets up to 2” diameter and 165,000 lb. breaking strength available.

STANDARD RATCHET TYPE BINDERContinuous take-up feature, infinite adjustment, gets the last half link of chain. One piece assembly, no bolts and nuts to loosen.Ratchet spring rust proofed. All load bearing or holding parts forged. Hooks are quenched and tempered alloy steel. Easy operat-ing positive ratchet. Available without links and hooks.

INSTRUCTIONS - LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDERS• Hook load binder to chain so you can operate it while standing on the ground. Position load binder so its handle can be pulled

downward to tighten chain. Be aware of ice, snow, rain, oil, etc. that can affect your footing. Make certain your footing is secure.• The Crosby Group, Inc. specifically recommends AGAINST the use of a handle extender (cheater pipe). If sufficient leverage

cannot be obtained using the lever type load binder by itself, a ratchet type binder should be used.• If the above recommendation is disregarded and a cheater pipe is used, it must closely fit the handle and must slide down the

handle until the handle projections are contacted. The pipe should be secured to the handle, for example, by a pin, so that thepipe cannot fly off the handle if you lose control and let go. The increased leverage, by using a cheater pipe, can cause defor-mation and failure of the chain and load binder.

• During and after tightening chain, check load binder handle position. Be sure it is in the locked position and that its bottom sidetouches the chain link.

• Chain tension may decrease due to load shifting during transport. To be sure the load binder remains in proper position: Securehandle to chain by wrapping the loose end of chain around the handle and the tight chain, or tie handle to chain with soft wire.

• When releasing load binder, remember that is a great deal of energy in the stretched chain. This will cause the load binder han-dle to move very quickly with great force when it is unlatched. Move handle with caution. It may whip—keep body clear.

• Never use a cheater pipe or handle extender to release handle. Use a steel bar and pry under the handle and stay out of thepath of handle as it moves upward.

• If you release the handle by hand, use an open hand under the handle and push upward. Do not close your hand around thehandle. Always keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle.

INSTRUCTIONS - RATCHET TYPE LOAD BINDERS• Position ratchet binder so it can be operated from the ground.• Make sure your footing is secure.

MAINTENANCE OF ALL LOAD BINDERS• Routinely check load binders for wear, bending, cracks, nicks, or gouges. If bending or cracks are present—do not use load

binder.• Routinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of Lever Binders, and pawl part and screw threads of Ratchet Binders to extend prod-

uct life and reduce friction wear.

CHAIN LOAD BINDERS

• Failure to use this load binder properlymay result in serious injury or evendeath to you or others.

• Do not operate load binder whilestanding on the load.

• Move handle with caution. It may whip— Keep body clear.

• Keep yourself out of the path of themoving handle.

• You must be familiar with state andfederal regulations regarding size andnumber of chain systems required forsecuring loads on trucks

• Always consider the safety of nearbyworkers as well as yourself whenusing load binder.

• While under tension, load binder mustnot bear against an object, as this willcause side load.

• Do not throw these instructions away.Keep them close at hand and sharethem with any others who use thisload binder.

WARNING

NOTE: Other Size and Styles Binders Available.


STANDARD WINCH STRAPS222720 — 27’ and 223020 — 30’2” Webbing with 1015 Flat Hook, Code 20. Webbing Part No. 2004.Webbing Breaking Strength 12,000 lbs.Assembly Breaking Strength 10,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 3,335 lbs.

422721 — 27’ and 423021 — 30’4” Webbing with 1021 Flat Hook, Code 21.Webbing Part No. 4000. Webbing Breaking Strength 20,000 lbs.Assembly Breaking Strength 15,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 5,000 lbs.

422730 — 27’ and 423030 — 30’4” Webbing with Sewn Loop, Code 30.Webbing Part No. 4000. Webbing Breaking Strength 20,000 lbs.Assembly Breaking Strength 15,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 5,000 lbs.

422710 — 27’ and 423010 — 30’4” Webbing with 1026 Delta Ring, Code 10.Webbing Part No. 4000. Webbing Breaking Strength 20,000 lbs.Assembly Breaking Strength 16,200 lbs. Working Load Limit 5,400 lbs.

WINCH BARS37030 — STANDARD BAR (PAINTED)

10032 — COMBINATION BAR (PAINTED)

SLIDING WINCH TRACK3606 — STEEL 3607 — ALUMINUM

SLIDING WEBBING WINCHES3820 — STANDARD 5820 — STORABLE

WELD-ON WEBBING WINCHES1820 — STANDARD 7820 — LOW PROFILE

PORTABLE WEBBING WINCHES1820P — STANDARD 1820P2 — STANDARD

FLATBED PRODUCTS

See Page 124 for other end Fittings.


CODE NO. STRAP LENGTH END HARDWARE WORKING LOAD LIMIT

HAND RATCHET TYPE TIE DOWN STRAPS

512720 27 ft. 1015 Flat Hook 3,335 lbs.513020 30 ft. 1015 Flat Hook 3,335 lbs.512739 27 ft. 3705 Chain Anchor 3,335 lbs.513039 30 ft. 3705 Chain Anchor 3,335 lbs.512784 27 ft. 1006 Wire Hook 3,335 lbs.513084 30 ft. 1006 Wire Hook 3,335 lbs.

10,000 lb. Breaking Strength.2” LONG WIDE HANDLE 804 WITH 2004 WEBBING


552721 27 ft. 1020 Flat Hook 5,000 lbs.553021 30 ft. 1021 Flat Hook 5,000 lbs.552740 27 ft. 3705 Chain Anchor 5,400 lbs.553040 30 ft. 3705 Chain Anchor 5,400 lbs.552750 27 ft. 3704 Grab Hook 5,400 lbs.553050 30 ft. 3704 Grab Hook 5,400 lbs.



592710 27 ft. 1026 “V” Ring 5,000 lbs.593010 30 ft. 1026 “V” Ring 5,000 lbs.592721 27 ft. 1021 Flat Hook 5,000 lbs.593021 30 ft. 1021 Flat Hook 5,000 lbs.592736 27 ft. 1016 Wire Hook 6,500 lbs.593036 30 ft. 1016 Wire Hook 6,500 lbs.


WEB TIE DOWNS

Webbing straps must be protected when used on rough or sharp objects. Straps that are cut, worn or damaged shall not be used and

shall be replaced immediately. All strap assemblies shall be inspected prior to each use. The use of "cheater bars" or other means of

increasing leverage on a ratchet bucket handle or winch, other than a Kinedyne approved device, can cause serious injury to the user

and/or bystanders.

WARNING


1015 2” FLAT HOOKBreaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4,535 kgs.Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1,513 kgs.Weight: .73 lbs./.33 kgs.

FLATBED ACCESSORY ITEMS

1021 4” FLAT HOOKBreaking Strength: 15,000 lbs./6,803 kgs.Working Load Limit: 5,000 lbs./2,268 kgs.Weight: 1.06 lbs./.48 kgs.

1209 2” SNAP HOOKBreaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4,535 kgs.Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1,513 kgs.Weight: .61 lbs./.28 kgs.

HAND RATCHET END FITTINGS

1023 2” DELTA FLAT RINGBreaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4,535 kgs.Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1,513 kgs.Weight: .29 lbs./.13 kgs.

1026 4” DELTA RINGBreaking Strength: 20,000 lbs./9,070 kgs.Working Load Limit: 6,670 lbs./3,025 kgs.Weight: 1.36 lbs./0.62 kgs.

3704 3/8” GRAB HOOK ASSEMBLYBreaking Strength: 16,200 lbs./7,347 kgs.Working Load Limit: 5,400 lbs./2,449 kgs.Weight: 1.22 lbs./0.55 kgs.

3705 18” CHAIN ANCHORBreaking Strength: 16,200 lbs./7,347 kgs.Working Load Limit: 5,400 lbs./2,449 kgs.Weight: 2.89 lbs./1.31 kgs.

1212 2”TWISTED SNAP HOOKBreaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4,535 kgs.Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1,513 kgs.Weight: .61 lbs./.28 kgs.

FE7900-1 2”SNAP HOOKBreaking Strength: 6,000 lbs./2,721 kgs.Working Load Limit: 2,000 lbs./907 kgs.Weight: .41 lbs./.19 kgs.

1006 2”NARROW HOOKBreaking Strength: 10,000 lbs./4,535 kgs.Working Load Limit: 3,335 lbs./1,513 kgs.Weight: .58 lbs./.26 kgs.Note: 3" -4" Available #1016 WLL 7333 lbs

37025Plastic (2” - 4”)Corner Protectors

10094Strap Winder


STANDARD LOGISTIC STRAPS651201 — 12’2” Webbing with FE8306-1 Spring Fitting, Code 01. Cam Buckle 43010, Webbing 4900, Track Type Series E,A.Assembly Breaking Strength 2,500 lbs. Working Load Limit 835 lbs.

651601 — 16’2” Webbing with FE8306-1 Spring Fitting, Code 01. Cam Buckle 43010, Webbing 4900, Track Type Series E,A.Assembly Breaking Strength 2,500 lbs. Working Load Limit 835 lbs.

641201 — 12’2” Webbing with FE8306-1 Spring Fitting, Code 01. Ratchet Buckle 811, Webbing 4900, Track Type Series E,A.Assembly Breaking Strength 3,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 1,000 lbs.

641601 — 16’2” Webbing with FE8306-1 Spring Fitting, Code 01. Ratchet Buckle 811, Webbing 4900, Track Type Series E,A.Assembly Breaking Strength 3,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 1,000 lbs.

841211 — 12’, 831611 — 16’ and 832011 — 20’1-3/4” Webbing with FE8029-1 Spring Fitting, Code 11. Overcenter Buckle FE7707-1, Webbing FE102G, TrackType Series E,A. Assembly Breaking Strength 4,000 lbs. Working Load Limit 1,335 lbs.

LOGISTIC TRACK43002 SERIES E TRACK HORIZONTALHigh strength steel, 12 gauge. 50,000 psi minimum yield. Iron phosphate, green primer finish. Weight: 16.6 lbs./7.5 kgs. Length: 10ft./3m.

OTHER LOGISTIC STRAP HARDWARE

1831F-Track

1005Wire Hook

660002Rope Tie Off

FE8264-1Series E/A Fitting with 1” Round Ring.6000 lbs. Breaking Strength. 2000 lbs. WLL.

FE8029-1Series E/A Spring Loaded Fitting.4500 lbs. Breaking Strength. 1500 lbs. WLL

2019 SERIES E TRACK VERTICALHigh strength steel, 11 gauge. 50,000 psi minimum yield. Iron phosphate,green primer finish. Weight: 11.6 lbs./5.3 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m.

2007 SERIES A TRACK HORIZONTALHigh strength steel, 12 gauge. 50,000 psi minimum yield. Iron phosphate, green primer finish.Weight: 16.6 lbs./7.5kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m.

FE725-01 ALUMINUM SERIES A TRACK HORIZONTALAluminum. 37,000 psi minimum yield. Natural finish. Weight: 8.3 lbs./3.8 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m.

FE720-01 SERIES A TRACK VERTICALHigh strength steel, 11 gauge. 50,000 psi minimum yield. Iron phosphate,green primer finish. Weight: 13.2 lbs./6.0 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m.

2005 SERIES F TRACK HORIZONTAL OR VERTICALHigh strength steel, 15 gauge. Galvanized finish. Weight: 6.9 lbs./3.1 kgs. Length: 10 ft./3m.

INTERIOR VAN PRODUCTS

All ratings for Series E or A fittings are based on using 43002 or FE702-01 track. Rating may be reducedwhen fittings are used in other tracks. WARNING


INTERIOR VAN PRODUCTSBARS AND BEAMS

SAF-T-BAR IIFE8040-60 Aluminum Tube: adjusts from 87.25” to 104.25”. Weight: 10.2 lbs./4.9 kgs.FE8040-90 Steel Tube: adjusts from 87.25” to 104.25”. Weight: 12.1 lbs./5.5 kgs.

SERIES E/A ALUMINUM DECKING/SHORING BEAMFE8066-1 adjusts from 85” to 94.7”. Weight: 20.5 lbs./9.3 kgs.FE8066-3 adjusts from 90.2” to 100”. Weight: 21.0 lbs./9.5 kgs.

HEAVY DUTY SERIES E/A ALUMINUM DECKING/SHORING BEAMFE8000-1 adjusts from 85” to 94.7”. Weight: 23.5 lbs./10.6 kgs.FE8000-12 adjusts from 90.2” to 100”. Weight: 24 lbs./10.8 kgs.

Kinedyne offers a full line of one-inch ratchet and utility straps.These versatile tie-downs can be used on pick-up trucks, utility trail-ers, car top racks, boat trailers or anywhere a strong secure tie-down is needed. All one-inch straps are easy to use and have thesame quality and durability features of Kinedyne's heavy duty tie-downs used on flatbed and van trailers. Offered bulk packed orindividually packed in vinyl display bag with Strap-All™ brand header card.

711681 — 16’ length.Breaking Strength: 2,500 Ibs./1,134 kgs., Working Load Limit: 835 Ibs./379 kgs.

RATCHET STRAP WITH 800 RATCHET AND S HOOKS711587 — 15’ length.Breaking Strength: 1,200 Ibs./544 kgs., Working Load Limit: 400 Ibs./181 kgs.

STRAP-ALL™ ONE-INCH STRAPS

RATCHET STRAP WITH 800 RATCHET, WIRE HOOKS AND D RINGS


Breaking strengths shown in this catalog are based on the minimum load a component or assembly will withstand before failing.WORKING LOAD LIMITS SHOWN IN THIS CATALOG ARE RATED AT ONE-THIRD OF THE MINIMUM BREAKING STRENGTH.Unless otherwise specified all ratings are based on a straight tensile pull. Load directions other than straight can result in a sig-nificant reduction in breaking strength.

The ratings shown in this catalog are contingent upon using Kinedyne track, beams, webbing or hardware as a system.The weak-est link (sew patterns, webbing, hardware, etc.) determines the minimum breaking strength rating of the strap assembly or tie-downsystem. Tie-downs must be attached to securing points of equal or greater strength for break-strength rating to be maintained.NOTE: All straps shown in this catalog are intended to be used as cargo securing devices. No straps are to be used for lifting pur-poses.

All ratings are for products in new condition. Age, wear or damage to any tie-down system can greatly reduce its rating. All prod-ucts should be inspected on a regular basis. CAUTION: Webbing straps must be protected when used on rough or sharp objects.All worn, deformed or damaged products should immediately be removed from service and replaced.

All Kinedyne products should be used in accordance with local, state, federal, and industry regulations. IT IS THE OWNER'SAND/OR USER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO EVALUATE THE SUITABILITY OF ANY CARGO SECURING PRODUCT FOR THEIRPARTICULAR APPLICATION. Failure to comply with recommended usage guidelines may result in personal injury or cargo -damage.

GENERAL INFORMATIONW

AR

NIN

GS

Winches &Winch/CombinationBars

LogisticTrack

Series E, A andKaptive Beams®

Series FShoring Bars

Cargo Bars

RatchetBuckles

WARNING: When tightening or loosening winches, always maintain a firm grip onthe winch bar. Never release a winch bar without checking the pawl to ensurethat it is fully engaged between ratchet teeth. Releasing a winch bar without thepawl being properly engaged can cause serious injury to the user or bystanders.The use of a slip resistant handle winch bar, specifically designed to tighten orloosen winches, is recommended. Kinedyne winch bars (page 118) shall be usedto tension and release tie-down assemblies. "Cheater Bars" ("extenders") shallnot be used with the winch bars. Users shall stand clear of the winch bar handleduring operation of the winch bar in case the winch bar slips. The tip of thewinch bar shall be inserted through both holes in the end cap to prevent thewinch bar from "slipping out" and overloading the tip and/or end cap. Winchesshall not be loaded in excess of their working load limit. Winches shall not beused as pulling or lifting devices. A minimum of 12" of Webbing shall be insertedthrough the slot, and a minimum of two (2) wraps shall be on the winch mandrel.

CAUTION: Excessive wraps of webbing on the mandrel will reduce the workingload limit of the winch.

PORTABLE WINCH WARNING: Set screws on portable winches are designed toposition the winch while the tie-down assembly is being tightened. They shallonly be snug tight. Overtightening of screws may cause the bracket to bend,weakening the winch and causing it to fail. Portable winches shall be removedand stored when not in use.

WARNING: Welding galvanized material may form toxic fumes. Welding shall bedone with adequate ventilation.

WARNING: Do not overload beams or create a top-heavy, unstable trailer.

WARNING: When Series F bars are used in the vertical position, the spring end ofthe bar must be up to avoid bouncing out of the rack. Shoring bars shall not beused in decking applications, unless otherwise specified.

WARNING: Cargo bars are not intended for the use with cargo on wheels.Overtensioning of ratchet mechanism may cause damage to trailer sidewalls.NOTE: Cargo bars do not have load ratings due to varying conditions of trailersidewalls.

WARNING: The use of cheater bars or other means of increasing the leverage ona ratchet bucket handle, other than a Kinedyne approved device, can cause seri-ous injury to the user and/or bystanders.


CODE NO. DIAMETER LINEAR DENSITY (LBS./100 FT.) STD. REEL MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH (LBS.)

N3166 3/16 1.00 600’ 900N1406 1/4 1.50 600’ 1,490N5166 5/16 2.50 600’ 2,300N3806 3/8 3.50 600’ 3,340N7166 7/16 5.00 600’ 4,500N1206 1/2 6.50 600’ 5,750N9166 9/16 8.15 600’ 7,200N5806 5/8 10.5 600’ 9,350N3406 3/4 14.5 600’ 12,800N7806 7/8 20.0 600’ 18,000N1006 1 26.4 600’ 22,600N1146 1-1/4 40.0 600’ 33,800N1126 1-1/2 55.0 600’ 47,800N1346 1-3/4 83.0 600’ 70,000N2006 2 95.0 600’ 83,000N2126 2-1/2 149. 600’ 126,000N3006 3 210. 600’ 180,000

1200 ft. and longer lengths available. See Page 128 for working load information.

NYLON ROPEThese ropes are the strongest ropes manufactured. Size for size, they are over twice as strong as Manila. Nylon ropes are extreme-ly elastic, in fact, their working elasticity is almost four times as much as Manila and Dacron and about twice that of monofilamentPolypropylene.This provides excellent energy absorption. However, Nylon is not recommended where elasticity is a problem. Beingrot and mildew resistant, these ropes can be stored wet. This rope is white and is available in a full range of sizes. Stock color iswhite.


PE3166 3/16 1.20 600’ 900PE1406 1/4 2.00 600’ 1490PE5166 5/16 3.10 600’ 2300PE3806 3/8 4.50 600’ 3340PE7166 7/16 6.20 600’ 4500PE1206 1/2 8.00 600’ 5750PE9166 9/16 10.2 600’ 7200PE5806 5/8 13.0 600’ 9000PE3406 3/4 17.5 600’ 11,300PE7806 7/8 25.0 600’ 16,200PE1006 1 30.4 600’ 19,800PE1146 1-1/4 46.2 600’ 29,800PE1126 1-1/2 67.0 600’ 42,200PE1346 1-3/4 98.0 600’ 61,000PE2006 2 118. 600’ 72,000PE2126 2-1/2 181. 600’ 110,000PE3006 3 258. 600’ 157,000


POLYESTER ROPERecommended wherever minimum stretch, high strength and durability are required. Polyester Rope is manufactured from 100percent polyester fibers. These ropes have strengths more than twice those of Manila. Their working elasticity and stretch charac-teristics are less than those of Nylon and about one-half those of monofilament Polypropylene. As with all synthetics, Polyester isresistant to rot and organisms and is available in all sizes. Stock color is white.


PD1206 1/2 6.7 600’ 5400PD5806 5/8 9.2 600’ 7200PD3406 3/4 12.5 600’ 9800


POLY-DACThe most well known combination rope in the world. POLY-DAC with its two red tracers combines the best properties of syntheticfibers, as the cover yarns of each strand are hi-tenacity polyester wrapped over polyolefin giving good abrasion resistance andstrength. The core yarns are polyolefin for economy and light weight. Stock color is white.

3-STRAND FIBER ROPE


3-STRAND FIBER ROPE & SOLID BRAIDED NYLON ROPE


PP3166 3/16 .70 600’ 720PP1406 1/4 1.20 600’ 1,130PP5166 5/16 1.80 600’ 1,710PP3806 3/8 2.80 600’ 2,440PP7166 7/16 3.80 600’ 3,160PP1206 1/2 4.70 600’ 3,780PP9166 9/16 6.10 600’ 4,600PP5806 5/8 7.50 600’ 5,600PP3406 3/4 10.7 600’ 7,650PP7806 7/8 15.0 600’ 10,400PP1006 1 18.0 600’ 12,600PP1146 1-1/4 27.0 600’ 18,900PP1126 1-1/2 38.4 600’ 26,800PP1346 1-3/4 59.0 600’ 38,800PP2006 2 69.0 600’ 46,800PP2126 2-1/2 107. 600’ 72,000PP3006 3 153. 600’ 103,000


POLYPROPYLENE ROPEThis monofilament line is the most widely used of the synthetics today. It is by far the most economical. Polypropylene incorporatesmany of the advantageous qualities of all other synthetics and natural fiber ropes. It possesses excellent strength characteristics,remarkable durability and handling ease. However, it is not recommended for use on bitts and capstans where heat is a factorbecause it will tend to stick and fuse. This rope has outstanding chemical resistance and dielectric properties. Its working elastic-ity lies between Nylon and Manila. It will not rot, mildew or shrink and it floats. Polypropylene is available in a full range of sizes.Stock rope is yellow in color.

CODE NO. DIAMETER LINEAR DENSITY (LBS./100 FT.) STD. COIL MINIMUM TENSILE STRENGTH (LBS.)

M14012 1/4 2.00 1250’ 540M5166 5/16 2.90 600’ 900M3806 3/8 4.10 600’ 1,220M7166 7/16 5.25 600’ 1,580M1206 1/2 7.50 600’ 2,380M9166 9/16 10.4 600’ 3,100M5806 5/8 13.3 600’ 3,960M3406 3/4 16.7 600’ 4,860M7806 7/8 22.4 600’ 6,950M1006 1 27.0 600’ 8,100M1146 1-1/4 41.6 600’ 12,200M1126 1-1/2 60.0 600’ 16,700M1346 1-3/4 89.5 600’ 23,800M2006 2 108. 600’ 28,000M2126 2-1/2 167. 600’ 41,800M3006 3 242. 600’ 57,500


MANILA ROPE

and weight requirements. It is specially lubricated to give long service life. Manila Rope is durable, strong and flexible. It is engi-neered to meet the exacting requirements of marine and fishing usage. Manila is extremely popular in the industrial and agricul-tural fields. It is also an excellent all-purpose rope.

CODE NO. SIZE NO. DIA. (IN.) REC. WORK LOAD (LBS.) UNIT WT. (LBS.)

SB18010 4 1/8 69 1000 FT. SPOOL 5SB31610 6 3/16 135 1000 FT. SPOOL 12SB14010 8 1/4 169 1000 FT. SPOOL 17SB3805 12 3/8 450 500 FT. SPOOL 19SB1205 16 1/2 714 500 FT. SPOOL 16

NOTE: Other spool lengths are available

An extremely strong, soft, lightweight cord with excellent resistance to rot, abrasion, mildew, petroleum products and many chem-icals, and with shock-absorbing elasticity that allows it to withstand great strain. Solid braided construction. stays round and workswell in pulleys. Natural silvery white color. Working loads are derived by taking 15-20% of approx. avg. new rope tensile strength.

WHITE SOLID BRAIDED NYLON ROPE

Our Manila Rope is a superior product. It meets Federal Specification T-R-605b, amendment 3, for tensileOur Manila Rope is a superior product. It meets Federal Specification T-R-605b, amendment 3, for tensile and weightrequirements. It is specially lubricated to give long service life. Manila Rope is durable, strong and flexible. It is engineeredto meet the exacting requirements of marine and fishing usage. Manila is extremely popular in the industrial and agriculturalfields. It is also an excellent all-purpose rope.

WEIGHT AV.TENSILECODE NO. DIA. CIRCUM. LBS./100 FT. STRENGTH

PB140 1/4” 3/4” 2.5 2,800PB516 5/16” 1” 3.6 4,200PB380 3/8” 1-1/8” 5.0 5,550PB716 7/16” 1-1/4” 6.4 7,400PB120 1/2” 1-1/2” 8.9 9,900PB916 9/16” 1-3/4” 11.6 12,600PB580 5/8” 2” 14.2 15,600PB340 3/4” 2-1/4” 18.0 19,600


PB780 7/8” 2-3/4” 27.0 29,000PB100 1” 3” 36.8 37,500PB118 1-1/8” 3-1/2” 45.0 46,000PB114 1-1/4” 3-3/4” 54.0 54,500PB1516 1-5/16” 4” 61.0 61,500PB112 1-1/2” 4-1/2” 73.0 71,500PB158 1-5/8” 5” 86.0 87,200

600 ft. standard reel. See Page 128 for working loadinformation.


NB140 1/4” 3/4” 1.7 2,330NB516 5/16” 1” 2.6 3,400NB380 3/8” 1-1/8” 3.7 4,800NB716 7/16” 1-1/4” 5.0 6,600NB120 1/2” 1-1/2” 6.4 8,300NB916 9/16” 1-3/4” 8.4 11,800NB580 5/8” 2” 12.0 14,700NB340 3/4” 2-1/4” 16.0 20,000


NB780 7/8” 2-3/4” 21.8 27,400NB100 1” 3” 26.0 33,000NB118 1-1/8” 3-1/2” 35.8 44,000NB114 1-1/4” 3-3/4” 41.0 50,600NB1516 1-5/16” 4” 46.8 57,400NB112 1-1/2” 4-1/2” 59.8 72,000NB158 1-5/8” 5” 74.0 88,200



PN140 1/4” 3/4” 2.3 2,950PN516 5/16” 1” 3.4 4,300PN380 3/8” 1-1/8” 4.7 5,660PN716 7/16” 1-1/4” 6.1 7,400PN120 1/2” 1-1/2” 7.8 10,500PN916 9/16” 1-3/4” 10.4 13,100PN580 5/8” 2” 12.8 16,300PN340 3/4” 2-1/4” 17.6 23,500


PN780 7/8” 2-3/4” 23.5 30,800PN100 1” 3” 31.5 40,600PN118 1-1/8” 3-1/2” 39.0 49,900PN114 1-1/4” 3-3/4” 47.0 59,100PN1516 1-5/16” 4” 57.5 73,500PN112 1-1/2” 4-1/2” 68.5 87,000PN158 1-5/8” 5” 80.0 99,200


is constructed of a polyester cover and core. This braid provides high strength with low stretch and excellent abrasion resistance.Applications: mooring lines, stringing lines, winch lines, underground pulling lines, guy lines, slings, bull ropes.

Double braids are actually two ropes in one. The jacket is braided over a braided core. Braid on Braids are very flexible and havea high strength to weight ratio. The jacket also serves to protect the core. Braid on braids remain round and firm and will not rotateunder load. They are spliceable. Sizes from 1/4” to 1-5/8” diameter.

POLYESTER DOUBLE BRAID

is constructed of a nylon cover and core. This braid provides high strength as well as excellent shock absorbing elasticity.Applications: mooring lines, towing lines, anchor lines.

NYLON DOUBLE BRAID

is constructed of a polyester cover and a nylon core. Due to balanced load distribution this combination provides higher strengthsthan our standard double braid ropes. Applications: mooring lines, stringing lines, winch lines, purse lines, hoisting lines.

POLYESTER/NYLON DOUBLE BRAID

CODE NO. SIZE BREAKING STRENGTH SPOOL LENGTH WT./100’ LBS.

TR1806 1/8” 99 lbs. 600’ .3TR18025 1/8” 99 lbs. 2500’ .3TR18030 1/8” 99 lbs. 3000’ .3

Black cotton jacked rope used in stage rigging.

OTHER STYLES, SIZES, COLORS AND PUT UPS AVAILABLE

DOUBLE BRAIDED ROPES

TRICK LINE (BLACK THEATRICAL ROPE)



MAYPOLE BRAID/CHARACTERISTICS SOLID BRAID HOLLOW BRAID DOUBLE BRAID DIAMOND TWISTED

Number of Strands or Carriers 9, 12 or 16 8, 12 or 16 16, 24 or 32 8 or 16 3Spliceable No Yes Yes No YesStrength to Weight 5 2 1 4 3Flexibility 3 1 2 4 5Flattens Under Load No Yes No Yes NoRotates Under Load No No No No YesMechanical Elongation 1 4 5 3 2Cost Per Size 2 4 1 3 5Working Load (a % of Tensile) 15-20% 15-20% 15-20% 15-20% 8-15%Abrasion Resistant 1 5 2 3 4Best - 1Worst - 5

ROPE CONSTRUCTION SELECTION GUIDEWARNING: This guide is designed for general reference only. The construction comparisons assume using the same rope fiber and size. Expert advice should be sought when choosing arope where protection of life or property is involved.

POLYPRO- POLY-MANIL SISAL COTTON NYLON POLYESTER PYLENE ETHYLENE KEVLAR1 SPECTRA2

STRENGTHBreaking Tenacity - Dry (Grams/Denier) 5.0 - 6.0 4.0 - 5.0 2 - 3.0 7.8 - 10.4 7.0 - 9.5 6.5 6.0 18 - 26.5 30.0Wet Strength vs. Dry Strength Up to 120% Up to 120% Up to 120% 85 - 90% 100% 100% 100% 95% 100%Shock-Load Absorption Ability Poor Poor Very Poor Excellent Very Good Very Good Fair Poor FairWEIGHTSpecific Gravity 1.38 1.38 1.54 1.14 1.38 0.91 0.95 1.44 0.97Floats No No No No No Yes Yes No YesELONGATIONPercent at Break 10 - 12% 10 - 12% 5 - 12% 20 - 34% 12 - 15% 15 - 25% 15 - 25% 1.5 - 3.6% 3.5%Creep (Extension Under Sustained Load) Very Low Very Low — Moderate Low High High Very Low ModerateEFFECTS OF MOISTUREWater Absorp. of Individual Fibers Up to 100% Up to 100% Up to 100% 2 - 8% Less than 1% None None 3.5 - 7.0% NoneDielectric Properties Very Poor Very Poor Very Poor Poor Good Excellent Excellent Poor ExcellentDEGRADATIONResistance to UV in Sunlight Good Good Good Good Excellent Poor Fair Fair Fair

Black Best Black BestResistance to Rot and Mildew Poor Poor Poor Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent ExcellentStorage Requirements Dry Only Dry Only Dry Only Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or Dry Wet or DryROPE ABRASION RESISTANCESurface Good Fair Poor Very Good Excellent Good Good Fair Very GoodInternal Fair Fair Fair Excellent Excellent Good Good Fair ExcellentTHERMAL PROPERTIES3

Melts at Does Not Melt Does Not Melt Does Not Melt 420 - 480° 490 - 500° 330° 275° 800° Begins 297°Chars at 350° Chars at 350° Chars at 300° to Decompose

RESISTANCEResistance to Acids Poor Poor Poor Fair Good Excellent Excellent Fair ExcellentResistance to Alkalis Poor Poor Fair Very Good Fair Excellent Excellent Fair ExcellentResistance to Oils and Gas Poor Fair Poor Very Good Very Good Very Good Very Good Very Good Very Good

1 Based on Dupont Kevlar® Data2 Based on Allied/Signal Spectra® Data, Type 9003 Resistance is relative to the length of exposure, percent of concentration and temperature.

CORDAGE FIBER PROPERTIES—TYPICAL VALUES

ROPE AND FIBER COMPARISON GUIDES


(*RWL) RECOMMENDED WORKING LOADSRecommended working loads should be exceeded only with expert knowledge of conditions and professional estimates of risks. If the rope has not been subjected to dynamic loading orother excessive use and has been inspected and found to be in good working condition, it can be used in the following recommended manner. The recommended working loads for twistedrope are derived by taking 8-11% of new rope tensile strength for nylon and 1~14% for other twisted ropes in this catalog. The recommended working loads for braided rope are 15-20% ofnew rope tensile strength. The percentages vary according to rope size and type.

USE OF RECOMMENDED WORKING LOADSBecause of the wide range of rope use rope conditions, exposure to several factors affecting rope behavior, and the degree of risk to life and property involved, it is impossible to make blan-ket recommendations as to working loads. However, to provide guidelines, recommended working loads are tabulated for rope in good condition with appropriate splices, in non-critical appli-cations and under normal service conditions.

NEW ROPE TENSILE STRENGTHSNew rope tensile strengths are based on tests of new and unused rope of standard construction in accordance with Cordage institute Standard Test Methods. All figures are "Average"— Theminimum is 10% below stated amount.

AVOID OVERLOADINGWorking loads should be exceeded only with expert knowledge of conditions and professional estimates of risk. Working loadsshould be reduced where life, limb or valuable property are involved; or for exceptional service conditions such as shock loads,sustained loads, etc.

AVOID ABRASIONOuter and inner rope fibers contribute equally to the strength of your rope. When worn, your rope is naturally weakened. Where itis necessary for a rope to rub over an object, protect it with chafing gear, such as canvas wrapped and tied around the rope.

AVOID SUDDEN STRAINRope that is strong enough under a steady strain can be broken with a sudden jerk. Care when working with rope is extremelyimportant.

AVOID KINKSWhen rope is repeatedly turned or twisted in one direction, it is certain that kinks will develop, unless twists are repeatedly thrownin, or out of rope. Pulling a kink through a restricted space such as a tackle block will seriously damage the rope fibers.

AVOID SHARP ANGLES

BRAIDED ANDTWISTED ROPE

SPLICINGAVAILABLE

IN OUR SHOP

Sharp bends greatly affect the strength of a rope. Any sharp angle is a weak spot. Pad it for safety, and even then, Be Careful.

AVOID CHEMICALSVirtually all synthetic fiber ropes are resistant to damage from oil, gasoline, paint and most chemicals.To be on the safe side, how-ever, keep your rope free of any type chemical. Natural fiber ropes are, of course, severely damaged by exposure to chemicals

KEEP ROPE CLEANDirt on the surface and imbedded in rope acts as an abrasive on fibers. When rope becomes dirty, wash it thoroughly with cleanwater. Be sure to dry natural fiber ropes before storing.

AVOID IMPROPER STORAGESynthetic fiber ropes require no special storing conditions other than keeping them out of direct sunlight, away from the elementsand out of extremely hot rooms.The ultra-violet rays of sunlight have a weakening effect on rope that is exposed for prolonged peri-ods of time. Natural fiber ropes must, of course, be kept dry or they will rot in a very short time.

REVERSE ENDSProlonged use, or wear, of one part of a rope will naturally decrease its effectiveness at that point. Occasionally reverse your rope,end-for-end, to distribute the wear more evenly. A good example is an anchor line aboard a boat.

—CAUTION—"Never allow anyone to stand in line with or within 45° on either side of a rope under tension. Should the rope fail or other parts of the assembly fail, the recoil force could cause serious injuryor damage, especially if the rope is nylon.”

FAILURE OF A TENSIONED ROPE AND/OR CONNECTIONS IS A SERIOUS HAZARD. SUDDEN LOSS RELEASE FROM A TENSIONED ROPE CAUSES SNAPBACK, WHICH CANRESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.

Recoiling rope may oscillate violently in an unpredictable path,away from the failure point hitting anything in its way with great impact.Personnel in the path of the recoiling rope may be seriously hurt or even killed. Rope and its connecting hardware must be selected with sufficient safety factors for the specific dynam-

ic use conditions, and the rope and/or connector must be inspected before each use and replace if worn, frayed or cut.

ROPE SPECIFICATIONS

PROPER USE AND CARE OF CORDAGE


(Assuming line is to be dropped into and not carefully laid in)

V = Cubic footage requiredC = Rope circumference in inchesL = Length of rope in feet

Example: 2” circ.2 = 4 x 15,000 = = 72 Cu. Ft. Required.

Box will hold entire length.

V =

Sharp bends significantly reduce rope strength. A working rope should never be subjectedto a bend of less than 3 times rope diameter. A bend ratio of 4 times, or more, will prolongrope life. Eye-splice length should be at least 3 times the diameter of the cylinder (bitt, etc.)over which the eye is used. A length of 5 times diameter is even better.

Sheave diameter should be 8 times braided rope diameter and 10 times twisted ropediameter. Sheave groove must be wider than rope diameter. Never use wire rope or V-beltsheaves because they pinch fiber ropes and cause excessive friction and damage.

Never allow anyone to stand in line with or within 45° on either side of a rope under ten-sion. Should the rope fail or other parts of the assembly fail, the recoil force could cause seri-ous injury or damage, especially if the rope is nylon.

CRITICAL CONDITIONS OF USE

Lines should not be subjected to bending radius less than 3 x diameter of line. Preferably 8x diameter will extend life of line.

Eye Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10%In Line Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10%Bowline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35-40%Square Knot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45-50%Two Half Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30%

Design factors at the high end of the range or larger shall be used when:1. Small ropes are used (because they can be more severely damaged by cutting, abra-

sion and sunlight).2. Loads are not accurately known.3. Operators are poorly trained.4. Operation/use procedures are not well defined and/or controlled.5. Inspection is infrequent.6. Abrasion, cutting or dirt are present.7. Shock loads or extreme dynamic loadings are likely.8. High temperatures are present.9. Chemicals are present.10. Ropes are kept in service indefinitely.11. Tensions on the rope is maintained continuously for long periods.12. Rope can be subject to sharp bends or is used over pulleys or surfaces with too small a

radius.13. If knots are used (because strength is reduced by up to 50%.)14. Death, injury or loss of valuable property may result from failure.For critical applications, a design factor greater than 12 may be necessary. Users must deter-mine the design factor as they are the only ones who can assess service conditions andestablish operating procedures. The load applied to the rope shall not exceed the workingload. If uncertain, contact the rope manufacturer or a qualified engineering consultant forassistance.

In all cases where any such conditions are present, or there is any question aboutthe loads involved or the risks of use, the working load should be substantiallyreduced and the rope inspected frequently.

PERCENT OF STRENGTH LOSS

BENDS/SHEAVE SIZES

Inspect rope frequently, whether working or in storage.Occasionally reverse your rope, end-for-end, to distribute thewear more evenly.

Use worn rope only where strength failure will not causeinjury or damage.

WATCH ROPE CONDITION

HOW MUCH LINE CAN BE STORED IN BOX OR BIN?

CAUTION: Do not put line on reel under tension.To do so can cause extreme contracting forces to crush drum.

HOW MUCH LINE ON A DRUM OR REEL?

DO NOT USE WIRE ROPE OR V BELT SHEAVES FOR SYNTHETIC ROPE AS ROPE IS PINCHED INSIDE.

PROPER USE AND CARE OF CORDAGE

60,000830

C2 x L830


A COMPLETE FALL PROTECTION SOLUTION

Effective February 6, 1995 any employee engaged in construction activities or on a walk-ing/working surface of 6 feet or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by aPersonal Fall guard rail system or safety net system.

We supply high quality fall protection equipment that is specifically designed to insure your safety and comfort. Our equipment complies with OSHA and ANSI fall protection regulations.

Read carefully andunderstand all instructions

before using. A fall could result in serious injury or death. Do notuse unless properly trained.

PERSONAL FALL-ARREST SYSTEMA system used to arrest a worker in a fall from a working level. Itconsists of an achorage point, connectors, and body harness.

POSITIONING SYSTEMA system used to position a worker at an appropriate work level. Itconsists of an anchorage, body belt or body harness, and connectingdevice.

RETRIEVAL SYSTEMA system used for non-entry rescue from permit-required spaces. Itconsists of a retrieval line, chest or full-body harness, and a liftingdevice or anchor.

SUSPENSION SYSTEMA system used to lower and support a worker while allowing a hands-free work environment. It consists of a personal protective gear,connecting device, and anchor point.

OSHA (1926-501, SUBPART M)

• The use of shock-absorbing lanyards is highly recommended for fall protection.• Shock-absorbing lanyards may reduce fall arresting forces to less than 900 pounds, a

reduction of 50-70% compared to traditional lanyards.• Shock absorbers may elongate up to 3.5 feet.• Always tie off in a manner which limits a free fall to 6 feet or less.• Always use lanyards containing locking snaphooks.• Do not tie knots in lanyards as it may reduce strength 50%.• Do not wrap lanyards around sharp surfaces.• Make sure that worker will not strike a lower level should a fall occur

GENERAL GUIDELINES AND WARNINGSHere are some general imperatives and cautions regarding the use of fall protection equipment.

EMPLOYER RESPONSIBILITIES:• Ensure that all employees understand all aspects of fall protection equipment before using

it.• Make fall protection part of your overall safety program.• Appoint a competent person on site to inspect all fall protection equipment at regular inter-

vals and keep a record of inspection results.• Make sure all components of your fall protection system are compatible; the safest method

is to acquire all equipment from one supplier.• Permit only trained personnel to use the equipment.• Ensure that rescue takes place at once should a fall occur.

EVERYONE’S RESPONSIBILITIES:• Read and understand all instructions and warnings before using the equipment.• Inspect all products before each use.• Discard any equipment showing excessive wear or deformation.• Replace any equipment which has been involved in a fall.• Use fall protection any time you are at a level 6 feet above the ground or above a lower

level.• Never use fall protection equipment for towing, hoisting or lifting.• Understand OSHA regulations and ANSI standards pertaining to the work environment

before using fall protection equipment.

SPECIFIC PRODUCT INFORMATION ANDWARNINGS

• Only the back dee ring may be used for fall protection. Side, front and chest dee ringsshould be used for positioning only

• Shoulder dee rings should be used for retrieval only• All straps must be secure before utilizing the harness.

LANYARDS AND RELATED CONNECTING DEVICES

FULL BODY HARNESSES

• Anchor point must have ability to support 5,000 pounds per worker• Always work directly under the anchor point.• Do not wrap lanyards around sharp or rough surfaces. Use a tie-off strap to wrap around

the surface and connect the lanyard to the strap.• Anchor point must be at an elevation that limits free fall to 6 feet or less.• Anchor point must be suitable for use with the snaphook and must not allow the load to

shift to the snaphook keeper.

ANCHOR POINTS

ABOUT FALL PROTECTION

WARNING


CODE NO. DESCRIPTION SIZE

UH1DSL Single Dee Ring Small-Large 28” - 38”UH1DLXL Single Dee Ring` Large-XLarge 36” - 46”UH3DSL Three Dee Rings Small-Large 28” - 38”UH3DLXL Three Dee Rings Large-XLarge 36” - 46”

CODE NO. SIZE

DH3DS 30 - 36 SmallDH3DM 36 - 44 MediumDH3DL 40 - 48 LargeDH3DXL 44 - 52 XLargeDH3DXXL 48 - 56 XXLarge

The most effective way to prevent injury or death in the event of a fall is to wear a full body harness as part of a total fall protec-tion system. Harnesses are engineered to dispurse impact forces evenly among shoulders, torso, buttocks, and legs.

When using full body harnesses, be aware of these guidelines: Only the back dee ring may be used for fall protection. Side,front and chest dee rings should be used for positioning only. Shoulder dee rings should be used for retrieval only. All straps mustbe secure before utilizing the harness. Never attach more than one snap to a dee ring. Please review safe use and inspection infor-mation on Pages 141-143.

The DH30 series is a strong, rugged, comfortable, yet lightweight full body harnessdeveloped for use in the industrial and construction environments. The DH30 combinesfour separate functions into one full body harness: A removable tool belt, a great looking,comfortable, adjustable 6” body/back pad, a shoulder strap system that will relieve theweight of the tool belt from the user’s waist/back, a full body harness for the ultimate infall protection, sub pelvic strap, and grommeted buckle leg straps.

DH30 SERIES

Our most popular model, the Ultra-Lite harness weighs only about 2 pounds, making itideal for workers who are switching from body belts to harnesses or who are wearing aharness for the first time. The Ultra-Lite harness is designed to fit S-L and is also avail-able in L-XL.

ULTRA-LITE HARNESS

MANY OTHER STYLES ANDSIZES ARE ALSO AVAILABLE.

FULL BODY HARNESS

Chest strap with pass thru adjusterbuckle

Identification and wearer instructionlabel

Side D-rings for restraint or position-ing (if present)

Leg strap adjuster buckles

Leg strap

Back D-ring for fall arrest

Back pad

Slotted hip pad

Sub pelvic strap for addedsupport

Heavy duty harness, DH3D.Removable waist belt.

Adjustable comfort pad.

Heavy duty harness, DH3D.

Shoulder pads.

NOTE: XXL AND XXXL ALSO AVAILABLE

SEE SAFETY INFORMATION PAGES 145-147.


SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

CODE NO. LENGTH

STANDARD SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDSOne inch wide nylon web lanyard withshock absorbing pack and doublelocking lanyard snap each end.

One inch wide nylon web lanyard withshock absorbing pack and doublelocking lanyard snap one end. 1-3/4”throat ladder hook other end.

One inch wide nylon web lanyard withshock absorbing pack and doublelocking lanyard snap one end. 2-1/4”throat rebar hook other end.

Z901-3 3Z901-4 4Z901-6 6

CODE NO. LENGTH

Z902-3 3Z902-4 4Z902-6 6

CODE NO. LENGTH

Z903-3 3Z903-4 4Z904-6 6

CODE NO. LENGTH

100% TIE-OFF SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDSOne inch wide 2-leg 100% tie-off lan-yard with shock absorbing pack andthree double locking lanyard snaps.

One inch wide 2-leg 100% tie-off lan-yard with shock absorbing pack anddouble locking lanyard snap, plus two1-3/4” throat ladder snaps.

One inch wide 2-leg 100% tie-off lan-yard with shock absorbing pack anddouble locking lanyard snap, plus two2-1/4” throat rebar snaps.

ZY901-3 3ZY901-4 4ZY901-6 6

CODE NO. LENGTH

ZY902-3 3ZY902-4 4ZY902-6 6

CODE NO. LENGTH

ZY903-3 3ZY903-4 4ZY903-6 6

CODE NO. LENGTH

LOOP TYPE ATTACHMENT SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

One inch web lanyard with shockabsorber pack and attachment loopone end and lanyard snap other end.Loop is placed through back Dee ring,then the lanyard is fed through theloop to snug down for a secure attach-ment. Used where a lanyard snap isnot desired.

One inch web lanyard with shockabsorber pack and attachment loopone end and lanyard snap other end.Loop is placed through back Dee ring,then the lanyard is fed through theloop to snug down for a secureattachment. Used where a lanyardsnap is not desired. 1-3/4” throat lad-der hook.

One inch web lanyard with shockabsorber pack and attachment loopone end and lanyard snap other end.Loop is placed through back Dee ring,then the lanyard is fed through theloop to snug down for a secure attach-ment. Used where a lanyard snap isnot desired. 2-1/4” throat rebar hook.

ZE901-3 3ZE901-4 4ZE901-6 6

CODE NO. LENGTH

ZE902-3 3ZE902-4 4ZE902-6 6

CODE NO. LENGTH

ZE903-3 3ZE903-4 4ZE903-6 6

ROPE TYPE SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

NOTE: OTHER STYLES AND LENGTHS ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST

1/2” nylon rope lanyards can also be supplied by using Code #’s Z701, Z702, Z703, orZE701, ZE702, ZE703.

SEE SAFETY INFORMATION PAGES 141-143.


CODE NO. LENGTH

NO. 56S #11 REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLY

ZTB901-3 3ZTB901-4 4ZTB901-6 6

NOTE: Also available in ZTB902 with 1-3/4” throat ladder hook or ZTB903 with 2-1/4” throat rebar hook

1-3/4” throat opening, drop-forged steel, 5000 lb. test rebar snap hook. Two 5/8” throat double locking snap hooks. CAUTION: Donot use on attachments less than 1-1/4” diameter.

NO. 56G #18 REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLYSame construction as No. 56S except it incorporates a 2-1/4” throat rebar snap hook, which is compatible with the #18 rebar. CAU-TION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-1/4” diameter.

NO. 81S #11 REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLYChain assembly eliminates the need for a swivel attachment. 1-3/4” throat opening, drop-forged steel, 5000 lb. test rebar snap hook.Two 5/8” throat opening double locking snap hooks. CAUTION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-1/4” diameter.

NO. 81G #18 REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLYSame construction as No. 81S except it incorporates a 2-1/4” throat rebar snap hook, which is compatible with the #18 rebar.CAUTION: Do not use on attachments less than 1-3/4” diameter.

NO. 93G #18 REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLYSame construction as 935 except incorporates a 2-1/4” throat rebar snaphook, which is compatible with the #18 rebar. CAUTION:Do not use on attachments less than 1-3/4” diameter.

NOTE: Rebar chain assemblies are to be used as positioning devices only.A secondary approved lanyard must be used to prevent falls.

NO. 93S #11 REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLY1-3/4” throat opening, drop-forged steel rebar snap hook. Complete with swivel and Dee-ring. CAUTION: Do not use on attach-ments less than 1-1/4” diameter.

REBAR CHAIN ASSEMBLIES (FOR POSITIONING ONLY)

TIE-BACK STYLE SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDOne inch wide nylon web lanyard with shock absorbing pack and double locking lanyard snaps plus an adjustable tie-back ring.

CODE NO. LENGTH

ZS901-6 6 ft. Extended, 4 ft. relaxed

STRETCH TYPE LANYARD WITHSHOCK ABSORBING PACKElastic Lanyard with a 4’-6’ range. Keeps lanyard from tangling and out ofthe way.

WEB ADJUSTERSAvailable on all web lanyards. Can decrease length up to 50% ofmaximum.

SHOCK ABSORBING LANYARDS

MODEL 56

MODEL 81

MODEL 93

MODEL 56

Note: Other lengths and styles available


Most self retracting devices can be broken down into a number of basic components: a) the anchorage point or handle; b) the housing including:i) drum containing excess spooled line; ii) locking mechanism; and iii) spring mechanism; c) the line itself; d) the connecting means; and e) the fallindicator.

The anchorage point or handle must be durable and meet ANSI standards for anchorage strengths. Some include swivels which greatly reduce the chances of the line becoming entan-gled or twisted.

The housing can be made of any number of materials including: stainless steel, cast aluminum and/or syntlhetics. The housing is very important because it sheilds the inner workingsof the device from contaminants and debris which could cause corrosion or prevent the unit from functioning properly. Our lifelines have a housing and inner components that are environ-mentally sealed for added protection.

The drum contains the spooled line and, on many units, an additional reserve line which prevents use of the lifeline at its end, while allowing additional energy absorption. When thereserve line is deployed, an indicator should appear to show that the reserve line has been deployed and requires servicing.

RETRACTABLE LANYARDS

CODE NO. DESCRIPTION

8327A 8 foot length 13⁄4” webbing retractable lanyard w/carabiner

All self retracting devices perform a tethering function which allows unrestricted vertical movement to the device while arresting the user’s fall.These deviceshave a housing normally anchored to the anchorage of a fall arrest system containing a drum-wound lifeline. The retracting end of the lifeline will unwindfrom the drum under slight tension during normal movement below the device.When tension is removed, the drum will automatically retract the lifeline. Quickmovement, which is typically applied at the onset of a fall, will lock the drum and arrest the user’s motion. The self retracting device is designed to arrest afall while minimizing fall distance and impact forces.

OSHA regulations state "Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0. 61 m) or less, rip-stitch lanyards, and tear-ing and deforming lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum load of 5,000 Ibs. (22 kN) applied to the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended posi-tion". (OSlIA, 29 CFR Parts 1910 and 1926.)

The self retracting lifeline (as defined by ANSI Z359.1-1992) is a device which contains a drum-wound line which may be slowly extracted from orretracted onto the drum under slight tension during normal movement of the user. The line has means for attachment to the fall arrest attachmenton the body support. After onset of a fall, the device automatically locks off and arrests the fall.

The retractable lifeline, or fall arrest block is a device which is usually long in length (6.0 to 100 m, 20 - 320 ft. bearing point length). It is specif-ically engineered for fall arrest in the vertical plane of motion. When the user falls at more than approximately 1.2 m (4.5 ft) per second, the deviceautomatically locks off to arrest the fall. The device will remain locked until released, and then resume normal operation. Note: The unit should beinspected following loading or fall arrest. Most units have an indicator which changes appearance in the event of severe loading. The unit must besent to an authorized dealer or manufacturer for servicing in the event that the indicator activates.

The retractable lifeline is available in varying lengths depending on the manufacturer and required use. This device anchors above the workarea for fall arrest protection during vertical movement of a single individual. In many units the arrest force is minimized by an intemal shock absorb-ing mechanism. We supply a number of retractable lifelines for various applications, uses, and personnel.

Retractable Lanyards Retractable lanyards or web retractors are shorter in length and more compact than the retractable lifeline. These devicesrange between 1.5 to 6.0 m (5 - 20 ft.) bearing point length.

State-of-the-art in fall arrest technology, and highly recommended where durability and high mobility are essential. This webbing lanyard offers up to 8 feetof movement, while eliminating lanyard slack. A spring keeps a slight constant tension on the lanyard, thus keeping it from dragging and eliminating the trip-ping hazard. Should a fall be detected, an internal braking system engages and arrests the fall. A free fall situation is virtually nonexistent with this unit. Theunit is covered by a durable, highly visible vinyl jacket to extend service life. A carabiner is included for anchorage attachment.

RETRACTABLE LIFELINES

CODE NO. DESCRIPTION WEIGHT EA. (LBS)

R20 20 ft. wire rope retractable lifeline 9R25 25 ft. wire retractable lifeline 10R30 11R50 50 ft. wire retractable lifeline 14Units require periodic recertification by the manufacturer. Please check your owner’s manual for instructions.

Self Contained Retractable Lifelines provide freedom of movement and a cushioned fall protection for individuals working at heights. Just attach theRetractable Lifeline overhead, out of the way; the retractable will maintain a light constant tension on the cable. Should a fall occur, an inertia brake will auto-matically activate to arrest the worker’s fall within a maximum of two feet.

Retractables are available in 25, 30, 50, 65 and 100 ft. and come standard with galvanized steel cable. The FCP Retractables are compatible with allfull body harnesses. For ease of attachment, consider ordering the tie-off strap. Stainless steel cable and Kevlar rope are available upon request.

SELF RETRACTING DEVICES

SELF RETRACTING LIFELINES

RETRACTABLE LANYARDS

COMPONENTS AND WORKINGS OF SELF RETRACTING DEVICES

RETRACTABLE LIFELINE AND LANYARDS

NOTE: Longer lengths available on request

30 ft. wire retractable lifeline

R10 10 ft. wire rope retractable lifeline 6



81CR3 3 ft. tie-off strap, dee ring on each end81CR4 4 ft. tie-off strap, dee ring on each end81CR5 5 ft. tie-off strap, dee ring on each end81CR6 6 ft. tie-off strap, dee ring on each end

TIE-OFF STRAPSImportant components of fall arrest systems are tie-off straps. Designed as a portable and versatile tie-off, to provide a compati-ble anchorage point for fall arrest. They easily exceed the 5,000 pound tie-off requirement and are lightweight, available in lengthsto suit your individual needs.


1204BC Boatswain’s Chair

BOATSWAIN’S CHAIRConstructed from 1-3/4” wide polyester and 12” x 24” x 1” board. Work seat comes with a waist belt. A secondary lifeline with arope grab and harness must always be used with the Boatswain’s Chair


BMR12-1 Fits 4-1/2” to 12” wide beam with up to a 1” thick flange top or bottom of I or H beamBMR18-2 Fits 8” to 18” wide beam with up to a 2” thick flange top of I beam onlyBBC24-4 Fits 12” to 24” wide beam and up to a 4” thick flange bottom flange only

“BEAMER” STRUCTURAL STEEL FALL PROTECTION“Beamer Fall Arrester”, hereafter referred to as “Beamer”, has been designed and approved as a fall arresting device for use on“I” and “H” beams during steel erection/and building construction. “Beamer” will provide Fall Arrest for one (1) person when usedper manufacturer’s recommendations and specifications. “Beamer” is not to be used on any type of WOOD attachment point.

IMPORTANT: Including shock absorber and hooks, lanyard may not exceed six feet (6’) in overall length.

NOTE: Other Styles and Sizes Available.


CONCRETE D-RING ANCHORFor added versatility, this anchor can be used for permanent or temporary applications - it also incorporates a re-useable D-ringassembly, just install a new bolt and it’s ready to go again. Flexible anchor is ideal for use with DBI/SALA shock absorbing lan-yards, self retracting lifelines or even horizontal lifeline systems. Rugged design for harsh environments with no moving or frag-ile parts for dust or debris to foul-up. For jobsite flexibility & ease-of-use, the device can be installed into 11/16 in., 18mm, or 3/4in. holes. - only standard drill bits needed! 5,000 lb. rated, OSHA compatible connection point swivels 360 degrees for ultimatesafety & useability. Extremely simple installation - drill hole, screw-in the anchor until “red” torque indicator cap shears offrevealing a “green” hex-head which notifies the user the anchor has been installed properly. Exceeds all OSHA and ANSIrequirements including ASTM E488 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors for added safety.

ANCHORAGE STRENGTHAnchorages selected for personal fall arrest systems (PFAS) shall have a strength capable of sustaining static loads, applied in thedirections permitted by the PFAS, of at least: (A) 3,600 lbs. (16kN) when certification exists (Reference ANSI Z359.1-1992 for cer-tification definition), or (B) 5,000 lbs. (22.2kN) in the absence of certification. When more than one PFAS is attached to an anchor-age, the anchorage strengths set forth in (A) and (B) above shall be multipled by the number of personal fall arrest systemsattached to the anchorage. Per OSHA 1926.500 and 1910.66—Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest systems(PFAS) shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least5,000 lbs. (22.2kN) per user attached, or be designed, installed and used as part of a complete PFAS which maintains a safetyfactor of at least two and is supervised by a qualified person.


Concrete D-Ring Anchor2104560

ANCHORS • TIE-OFF STRAPS • BOATSWAIN’S CHAIRS • “BEAMER”


BMR-2000 Fits 3-1/2” to 14” wide beam with up to a 11⁄4” thick flange top or bottom of I or H beamBMR18-2 Fits 8” to 18” wide beam with up to a 2” thick flange top of I beam onlyBBC24-4 Fits 12” to 24” wide beam and up to a 4” thick flange bottom flange only

“BEAMER” STRUCTURAL STEEL FALL PROTECTION“Beamer Fall Arrester”, hereafter referred to as “Beamer”, has been designed and approved as a fall arresting device for use on“I” and “H” beams during steel erection/and building construction. “Beamer” will provide Fall Arrest for one (1) person when usedper manufacturer’s recommendations and specifications. “Beamer” is not to be used on any type of WOOD attachment point.

IMPORTANT: Including shock absorber and hooks, lanyard may not exceed six feet (6’) in overall length.




RG5834 Fall Arrest Rope Grab 5⁄8” or 3⁄4” synthetic rope*19200 Fall Arrest Rope Grab 5⁄8” synthetic rope only (MOST COMMON ITEM)

FALL ARREST ROPE GRABSFor vertical fall arrest protection. Features dual cams for double safety. For use with 5/8” and 3/4” dia. synthetic rope. Patenteddesign pivots open for easy attachment anywhere on life line. Automatically travels up with user on pre-tensioned life line.Incorporates spring-loaded cams to hold rope grab in parked position.


TTWG500 Wire Rope Grab For 3/8’ wire rope with wire coreVW655 Wire Rope Grab For 5/16" & 3/8" wire rope with wire core

WIRE ROPE GRABSFor vertical fall arrest protection. Features dual cams for double safety. For use with 3/8” dia. solid core wire rope. Automaticallytravels with user. Conforms to OSHA specifications and ANSI recommendations.


TTCSCS Cable Safety Climb SystemNOTE: Please specify ladder length.

CABLE SAFETY CLIMB SYSTEM

CROSS-OVER STYLEFRONT VIEW

NOTE: RAIL TYPE LADDERSYSTEMS ALSO AVAILABLE

Sealed anchor headw/impact attenuator

Permanently securedforged eye bolt

Permanently swagedcable sleeves

Adjustableclamp brackets

H.D. steel squaretubing supports

Removable wire rope grabincluded w/each system

Cable stand-off(every 25 ft.)

3/8” dia. galvanizedwire rope

Removable cableclamps & thimble

Galvanized HD steelanchor bracket

Adjustable anchoreye bolt

ROPE GRABS • CABLE GRABS • LADDER SYSTEMS

RG5834

TTWG500

19200



*LL580N 5/8” 3-Strand Nylon Rope*LL340N 3/4” 3-Strand Nylon Rope*LL580PP 5/8” 3-Strand Poly Pro Rope*LL340PP 3/4” 3-Strand Poly Pro Rope*LL580PD 5/8” 3-Strand Poly Dac Rope (MOST COMMON ITEM)*LL340PD 3/4” 3-Strand Poly Dac Rope

NOTE: 1) See Rope section, pages 124-129 for more information on rope.2) Please specify the end termination you want from the list below.3) Rope shall remain knot free as knots can reduce strength up to 50%.4) Any size and length available.5) Check manufacturers recommendations on rope grabs.

VERTICAL LIFELINE ROPERopes used for vertical lifelines require a minimum breaking strength at the termination of at least 22kN (5,000 lbs.). This meansthat ropes with spliced terminations must have a breaking strength of at least 27kN (6,000 lbs.). Lifelines should be made fromsynthetic rope, usually nylon, Poly Pro, or Poly Dac. Check rope grab operating instruction for the proper size and type of rope.

LIFELINE ROPE AND CONNECTORS

HORIZONTAL LIFELINE SYSTEMHORIZONTAL LIFELINE SYSTEM CONSIST OF THE FOLLOWING:* UnitensionerTM

* 5/8" Dia. synthetic rope* Two-anchorage webbing or cable slings* Two carabiners* Two steel o-rings* Nylon carrying bag

This unit performs the following functions:1. Stretching the synthetic rope2. Maintaining and controlling desired tension3. Absorbing motive energy of the fall4. Permitting adjustments to the system.

These adjustments to the system will substantially reduce the forces onthe anchorages in case of a fall.

96952-30 30' System96952-60 60' System

Other Horizontal Lifeline SystemsAvailable For Special Needs.



4000RA Reusable Roof Anchor

ROOF ANCHORReusable roof anchor, steel construction. Adjusts to any roof pitch. NOTE: Use in conjunction with harness, rope grab, lifeline, andlanyard. Other roof anchor and fall protection devices are also available.

ROOF ANCHORS AND END TERMINATIONS


RB214 2-1/4” throat large rebar hook

RB134 1-3/4” throat ladder/rebar hook

DL100 Double locking Lanyard snap hook

21001A Auto locking carabiner 11,400 lb.21001AR Auto locking carabiner 5,500 lb.


DR100 Standard Dee ring

EY10 Standard 10” long spliced eye

TPT Teardrop style plastic thimble for 5/8” to 3/4” rope

RPT Round plastic thimble for 1/2” and 5/8” rope

END TERMINATIONS

Break Strength

Many Other Roof FallProtection Items Available

Please Call

Many Other Hardware Items Available on Request


SAFETY NETSLeading Edge's 300 Series Personnel Safety Nets are made of durable high tenacity nylon. Leading Edge's exclusive net designutilizes double strand construction for optimum strength and durability. This unique design provides the highest degree of per-formance while maintalning a lightweight product that is as easy to install as it is strong. The personnel safety nets can be com-bined with a debris liner to provide both personnel and debris protection in one system. The nets are available for a wide range ofapplications which include: High Rise Construction, Bridge Construction and Repair, Roof Replacement and Repair, RailroadBridges, Shafts and Openings, Steel and Concrete Construction, and General Fall Protection

ENGINEERED SOLUTIONSLeading Edge provides custom designed systems to meet site specific needs. In many cases, systems provide several areas ofprotection, thus encompassing personnel, debris and public protection in one package. Debris Net Systems often replace unsight-ly or restrictive sidewalk sheds and platforms. Debris Net Systems generally assure an unrestricted flow of traffic and access toand around construction or restoration areas. In many cases this allows facilities to continue to operate with little or no interrup-tion. Special attachments, loading and clearance are examples of areas where Leading Edge's manufacturing and design excel.Systems are available on rental or purchase basis.

STANDARD PERSONNEL & DEBRIS NET SIZES:Leading Edge's 300 Series Personnel Safety Nets are made of durable high tenacity nylon. Leading Edge's exclusive net designutilizes double strand construction for optimum strength and durability. This unique design provides the highest degree of per-formance while maintalning a lightweight product that is as easy to install as it is strong. The personnel safety nets can be com-bined with a debris liner to provide both personnel and debris protection in one system. The nets are available for a wide range ofapplications which include: High Rise Construction, Bridge Construction and Repair, Roof Replacement and Repair, RailroadBridges, Shafts and Openings, Steel and Concrete Construction, and General Fall Protection

DEBRIS NETSLeading Edge's Debris Nets are manufactured from the most advanced materials in a wide range of meshes which range from 3-1/2" to solid. Debris Nets are available fire retarded, or with the exclusive Envirocoat™ treatment for superior performance anddurability in sun, wind and the demanding environments. Debris Nets are used in a diversity of applications whichinclude:Scaffolding Enclosures, Facade Protection and Containment, Ceiling and Roof Containment, Sidewalk OverheadProtection, Protection Over Roadways and Streets, Separation of Trades, Public Protection, Adjacent Property Protection, GeneralDebris Protection.

INDUSTRIAL GUARDSRack and conveyor guards are available in a wide range of materials and mesh sizes. The guards can be dyed to meet your spe-cific requirements. Leading Edge's support services are available to aid you in selecting materials and developing or selectinghardware specific to your needs. Stationary and moveable systems are available. Guards are used in a wide range of applica-tions.Conveyor Guards, Storage Rack Guards, Mezzanines, Secured Storage Areas, Temporary and Permanent Enclosures,Equipment Guards,Retracting Guards, General Guarding Applications.

SPECIALTY NETSSTANDARD PERSONNEL & DEBRIS NET SIZES

Nets and netting systems are available for special applications like heliports, mezzanines, and other areas with spe-cial requirements. System design assistance is available. Heliports, Mezzanines, Conveyor Guards, Cargo Nets,Barrier Nets, Vertical Nets

CUSTOMIZED SYSTEMS• Lightweight aluminum and steel construction - Reduces installation, moving and transportation costs. Fully engi-neered and tested system - Complies with ANSI A1011, OSHA & The Army Corps of Engineers. Specially designedmounting adapters - Assures the correct attachment to your structure. Split Pole design allows easy storage, shippingand fits in most conventional hoists. Incorporates a 17 ft. wide Safety and Debris Combo Net. Approximate weights ofHardware: Poles (21' long) - 38 Ibs. ea. Mounting Brackets -15 Ibs. ea. Corner Mounting Brackets - 30 Ibs. ea. SpreaderPoles - 30 Ibs. ea.

CEILING AND ROOF CONTAINMENTLeading Edge net systems provide protection from debris falling from ceiling areas during reconstruction or as aninterim solution The systems can provide protection for personnel, the public and equipment below, as well as work-ers above the system. In most cases costly down time or relocation of operations, can be eliminated. Systems are cus-tom designed to meet your specific needs Systems are available for all levels of containment including:WeatherProtection, Water Collection, Sandblast, Public Protection, Dust Protection, Debris Containment

SAFETY NETS

COLUMN ADAPTER FLOOR MOUNT

WALL MOUNT RETRACTED

U.S. SIZES5' x 10' 15' x 20' 25' x 25'5' x 15' 15' x 25' 25' x 50'10' x 10' 15' x 30' 30' x 30'10' x 15' 15' x 40' 30' x 40'10' x 20' 15' x 60'10' x 25' 20' x 20'10' x 30' 20' x 25'10' x 40' 20' x 30'

20' x 40'


LARGE CAPACITY GATOR-MAX™ & GATOR-LAID©CONFINED SPACE RESCUE SYSTEMS

To Order Recovery Unit:Model R50Capacity Lbs. 350Cable Length 50’Cable Dia./inch 3/16” Gal.Size (w,h,d) inch 9” x 15” x 9”Weight Lbs. 23.4Tensile Strength:

G 4200 lbs.S.S. 3700 lbs.Synthetic Rope 4200 lbs.

Locking Speed, ft/sc 4.5Arrest Force, lbf 900Arrest Distance, inch 18” - 24”#204 Bag

The above systems include a recovery unit, a tripod, a mountingbracket, a carabiner, pully and carrying bag.

To Order Recovery Systems:R50 G TP7 (50 Galvanized + 7 Ft Tripod)R50 SS TP7 (50 Stainless Steel + 7 Ft Tripod)R50 K TP7 (50 Synthetic Rope + 7 Ft Tripod)R50 G TP9 (50 Galvanized + 9 Ft Tripod)R50 SS TP9 (50 Stainless Steel + 9 Ft Tripod)R50 K TP7 (50 Synthetic Rope + 9 Ft Tripod)

To Order Tripods:TP7 7’ TP9 9’Tripod Tripod

Maximum Static Load 5000 lbs. 5000 lbs.Maximum Work Load 350 lbs. 350 lbs.Height at Max Extension 85” 109”Height at Min Extension 49” 73”Distance between feet

at Max Extension 55” 68”at Min Extension 35” 48”

Aluminum Leg Extrusions 6061T6 6061T6Upper 1-3/4” x 1-3/4” x 1/8”Lower 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/8”

Adjustment Lengths 2-3/4” 2-3/4”Wire lock Pin Steel SteelFeet Aluminum AluminumHead Steel SteelLeg Chains 1/8” x 165” 1/8” x 192”Weight 33 38

RESCUE AND RECOVERY SYSTEMSThe FrenchCreek Rescue Recovery Tripod System meets all theOSHA requirements for confined space rescue. The R50Rescue/Recovery unit has raising and lowering capabilities as wellas acting as a retractable lifeline. In the event a fall occurs, the unitis easily converted to a rescue device, enabling the injured workerto be raised or lowered to safety at a rate of 20 ft. per minute.

Each component of the system is available individually. Whenordered as a system, a tripod, recovery unit, mounting bracket,carabiner and a carrying bag for the rescue device are included.

The R50 winches and systems are available in 25' or 50' lengths,with Galvanized, Stainless Steel or Synthetic Rope.


SWING FALL HAZARDSwing fall is a pendulum-like motion thatcan occur when a worker moves in ahorizontal direction away from a fixedanchorage, and then falls. While theforce generated in a swing fall is thesame as the force in a vertical fall, thereis a potential hazard of colliding with astructure such as a building or platform.

ENERGY ABSORBERA fall of even a few feet will create tremendouslyhigh impact forces to both the fallen worker and theentire fall protection system. High impact forcescould cause significant injury, even if a worker is ina full body harness.This force could also stress theanchor point beyond a safe working load. The bestmethod of reducing impact force is to use a per-sonal energy absorber (EAP); this is usuallyachieved by creating friction as it dissipates energyof the fall through distance. The energy absorberwill reduce impact forces considerably, effectivelyreducing impact loading to the fallen individual,connecting means, anchorage connector and theanchor. A lanyard with an integrally connectedenergy absorber offers uncomplicated use; thistype of lanyard is also less likely to be altered.NOTE: With the use of an energy absorber, onemust take into account extended fall distance withelongation and deployment.

TOTAL FALL DISTANCETotal fall distance is the maximum verti-cal change in distance from the bottomof the individual’s feet at the onset of afall to the position of the feet after the fallis arrested—including free fall distanceand deceleration distance. Total fall dis-tance can be affected by many factorsincluding: (a) Length of connectingmeans, (b) Position and height ofanchorage relative to work platform, (c)Position of attachment and D-ring slideon the full body harness, (d)Deployment of shock absorber, (e)Movement in lifeline, (f) Initial position ofworker before free fall (i.e. sitting, stand-ing, etc.)

HORIZONTAL LIFELINESAFETYHorizontal lifelines often act as a “floating” anchorageallowing a worker to travel horizontally for long distanceswithout the risk of large pendulum or swing falls. When aworker falls into a horizontal lifeline, the forces acting onthe anchorages are multiplied several times from theirvertical component. This must be taken into accountwhen selecting the anchorages and the anchorage con-nectors. The lifeline must be made of low stretch materi-al to limit the amount of sag produced during a fallthereby limiting the amount of required clearance toobstructions below.

FAS = Fall arrest systemHLL = Horizontal lifelineMAL = Maximum arrest loadFFD = Free fall distanceMAF = Maximum arrest forceTFD = Total fall distance

= Sag + Free fall distance+ Deceleration distance

FORCE VECTORRecognizing a force vector is veryimportant when tensioning ropes orcables in the horizontal plane, asoccurs with a lifeline or deflection

line. Allowing sufficient sag in the line is one method of reducing forces to end anchorages.Other methods would include the use of inline energy absorbers.

Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for erecting temporary horizontal lifelines. Itshould be noted that there are no defined standards for horizontal lifeline anchorages. Whenan energy absorber is not used, the anchorages should each be rated for at least 16,000 lbs.,unless the entire system is designed by a professional engineer. Engineering considerationsinclude length of span, nature of lifeline, number of users, amount of pretension required, in-line energy absorption, and the dynamic or static nature of the connecting means.

SWING HAZARD & TOTAL FALL DISTANCE


HARNESS INSPECTIONFREQUENCY• Before each use, visually inspect per steps listed below.

• The full body harness must be inspected by a competent person other than the user atleast annually. See section 5.2 and 5.3 for guidelines. Record the results of each formalinspection in the inspection log found in section 9.0.

IMPORTANTIf the Full Body Harness has been subjected to fall arrest or impact forces, it must be imme-diately removed from service and destroyed. Extreme working conditions (harsh environ-ments, prolonged use, etc.) may require increasing the frequency of inspections.

INSPECTION STEPSStep 1. Inspect harness hardware (i.e. buckles, D-rings, back pad, keepers, etc.); these

items must not be damaged, broken, distorted, or have any sharp edges, burrs,cracks, worn parts, or corrosion. Check any PVC coated hardware for cuts, rips,tears, holes, etc. in the coating. Make sure buckles work freely. Inspect parachutebuckle spring.

Step 2. Inspect webbing; material must be free of frayed, cut, or broken fibers; check fortears, abrasions, mold, burns, discoloration, etc. Inspect stitching; check for pulled orcut stitches. Broken stitches may be an indication that the harness has been impactloaded and must be removed from service.

Step 3. Inspect labels; all labels should be present and fully legible. Labels must be replacedif illegible or missing.

Step 4. Inspect each system component or subsystem per associated manufacturer’sinstructions.

Step 5. Record the inspection date and results in the inspection log.

If inspection reveals a defective condition, remove unit from service immediately and destroyor contact factory authorized service center for repair.

LANYARD INSPECTIONIMPORTANTExtreme working conditions (harsh environment, prolonged use, etc.) may require increas-ing the frequency of inspections.

INSPECTION STEPSStep 1. Inspect Energy Absorbing Lanyard or Energy Absorber component hardware (i.e.

snap hooks, adjusters, swedges, thimbles, etc.) These items must not be damaged,broken, distorted, or have any sharp edges, burrs, cracks, worn parts, or corrosion.Make certain the connecting hooks work properly. Hook gates must move freely andlock upon closing. Make certain adjusters (if present) work properly.

Step 2. Inspect the Energy Absorbing Lanyard or Energy Absorber component per the fol-lowing, as applicable:

WEBBING AND STITCHING: Inspect webbing. Material must be free of frayed, cut,or broken fibers. Check for tears, abrasions, mold, burns, discoloration, etc. Inspectstitching. Check for pulled or cut stitches. Broken stitches may be an indication theEnergy Absorbing Lanyard or Energy Absorber component has been impact loadedand must be removed from service. The webbing must be free of knots, excessivesoiling, heavy paint buildup, and rust staining. Check for chemical or heat damage(this type of damage may show up as a brown, discolored, or brittle areas). Checkfor ultraviolet damage (this type of degradation is indicated by discoloration and thepresence of splinters or slivers on the webbing surface). All of the above factors areknown to reduce webbing strength. Damaged or questionable webbing should bereplaced. NOTE: For Model ZM901, inspect for cuts or tears in the tubular jacket, ifcore web (white color) is exposed, remove from service immediately.

SYNTHETIC ROPE: Inspect rope for concentrated wear. Material must be free offrayed strands and broken yarns, cuts and abrasions, burns, discoloration, etc. Therope must be free of knots, excessive soiling, heavy paint buildup, and rust staining.Rope splices must be tight, with five full tucks, and thimbles shall be held by thesplice. Check for chemical or heat damage (this type of damage may show up asbrown, discolored, or brittle areas). Check for ultraviolet damage (this type of degra-dation is indicated by discoloration and the presence of splinters and slivers on therope surface). All of the above factors are known to reduce rope strength. Damagedor questionable ropes should be replaced.

WIRE ROPE: Inspect entire length of wire rope. Always wear protective gloves wheninspecting wire rope. Inspect for broken wires by passing cable through your glovedhands, flexing it every few inches to expose breaks. Broken wires can be removedby bending the wire back and forth parallel to the rope length. Do not attempt to pullwires out of rope. Replace the wire rope if there are six or more randomly distributedbroken wires in one lay, or three or more broken wires in one strand in one lay (A“lay” of wire rope is the length of wire rope that it takes for a strand [the larger groupsof wires] to complete one revolution or twist along the rope). Replace the wire ropeif there are any broken wires within 1 inch of the metal compression sleeves(swedges) at either end of the assembly. Wire rope should be free of corrosion.

Step 3. ENERGY ABSORBING COMPONENT: Inspect Energy Absorber to determine if ithas been activated, there should be no evidence of elongation. Make certain ener-gy absorber cover is secure and not torn or damaged.

BEFORE EACH USE of any fall protection equipment, carefully inspect it to assure that it isin serviceable condition. Check for worn or damaged parts; ensure all hardware (i.e. snaphooks, swedges, thimbles, etc.) are present and secure and are not distorted, or have anysharp edges, burrs, cracks, or corrosion. Make sure self locking snap hooks or carabinerswork properly. Inspect rope/webbing/wire rope for wear, cuts, burns, frayed edges, breaks orother damage. Do not use if inspection reveals an unsafe condition.

HARNESS MAINTENANCE,SERVICING, STORAGE• Clean full body harness with water and mild soap solution. Wipe off hardware with clean,

dry cloth, and hang to air dry. Do not force dry with heat. An excessive buildup of dirt, paint,etc. may prevent the full body harness from working properly, and in severe cases, degradethe webbing to a point where it weakens and should be removed from service.

• If you have any questions concerning the condition of your harness, or have any doubtabout putting it into service, contact Bairstow.

• Additional maintenance and servicing procedures (i.e. replacement parts) must be com-pleted by a factory authorized service center be in writing. Do not attempt to disassemblethe unit.

• Store full body harnesses in a cool, dry, clean environment out of direct sunlight. Avoidareas where chemical vapors may exist.Thoroughly inspect the full body harness after anyperiod of extended storage.

INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE


LARGE CAPACITY GATOR-MAX™ & GATOR-LAID©OSHA STANDARDS (EXCERPTS)

Safety Standards for Fall Protection in the Construction Industry(OSHA 1926.501 - Duty to have fall protection)

(a) General. (l) This section sets forth requirements for employers to provide fallprotection systems. All fall protection required by this section shall conform tothe criteria set forth in 1926.502 of this subpart.

(b)(l) Unprotected sides and edges. Each employee on a walking/working sur-face (horizontal and vertical surface) with an unprotected side or edge which is6 feet (1.8m) or more above a lower level shall be protected from falling by theuse of guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.

Editors Note: The requirements stated in (b)(l) are similar for: leading edges,hoist area, holes, formwork and reinforcing steel, ramps, runways and otherwalkways, excavations, dangerous equipment, overhead bricklaying and relatedwork, roofing work on low-slope roofs, steep roofs, precast concrete erection,residential construction and wall openings.

(OSHA 1926.502 - Fall protection system criteria and practices)

(a) General. (l) Fall protection systems required by this part shall comply with theapplicable provisions of this section.

(2) Employers shall provide and install all fall protection systems required by thissupport for an employee, and shall comply with all other pertinent requirementsof this subpart before that employee begins the work that necessitates the fallprotection.

(d) Personal fall arrest systems. Personal fall arrest systems and their use shallcomply with the provisions set forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, body beltsare not acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest system. Note: The use of abody belt in a positioning device system is acceptable and is regulated underparagraph (e) of this section.

(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to which theyare connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the snaphook bydepression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member, or shall be alocking type snaphook designed and used to prevent disengagement of thesnaphook by the contract of the snaphook keeper by the connected member.Effective January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks shall be used.

(15) Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest equipment shall beindependent of any anchorage being used to support or suspend platforms andcapable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached,or shall be designed, installed, and used as follows: (i) as part of a complete per-sonal fall arrest system which maintains a safety factor of at least two; and (ii)under the supervision of a qualified person.

(16) Personal fall arrest systems, when stopping a fall, shall: (i) limit maximumarresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used with a bodybelt; (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN)when used with a body harness; (iii) be rigged such that an employee can nei-ther free fall more than 6 feet (1.8m), nor contact any lower level; (iv) bring anemployee to a complete stop and limit maximum deceleration distance anemployee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07m); and, (v) have sufficient strength to with-stand twice the potential impact energy of an employee free falling a distance of6 feet (1.8m), or the free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less.

(e) Positioning device system. Positioning device systems and their use shallconform to the following provisions:(l) Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an employee cannot free fallmore than 2 feet (.9m).(2) Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of supportingat least twice the potential impact load of an employee's fall or 3,000 pounds(13.3 kN), whichever is greater.

(OSHA 1926.503 - Training requirements)

(a) Training Program. (l) The employer shall provide a training program for eachemployee which might be exposed to fall hazards. The program shall enableeach employee to recognize the hazards of falling and shall train each employ-ee in the procedures to be followed in order to minimize these hazards.

Fixed Ladders (OSHA 1910.27)

(d.5) Ladder safety devices may be used on tower, water tank and chimney lad-ders over 20 feet in unbroken length in place of cage protection. No landing plat-form is required. All ladder safety devices, such as those that incorporate lifebelts, friction brakes, and sliding attachments, must meet the design require-ments of the ladders that serve.

Ladder Safety Devices (ANSI A14.3-1992)

7.1.3 The ladder safety device shall be designed to absorb the impact of a solidobject weighing at least 500 pounds in a free fall of 18 inches.

7.1.4 Design and installation of mountings shall not reduce the design safetyfactors of the fixed ladders.

7.3.1 The safety sleeve shall be of a type which can be operated entirely by theperson using the ladder safety device. It shall permit the person using the lad-der safety device to ascend or descent without having to continually manipulatethe safety sleeve. 7.3.3 The maximum length of the connection between the cen-terline of the carrier and the point of attachment to the body belt shall not exceed9 inches.

Powered Platforms For Building Maintenance (OSHA 1910.66)

(j) Personal Fall Protection. Employers must provide personal fall arrest systemsmeeting the requirements outlined. Requirements include the following:

Anchorages to which personal fall arrest equipment is attached shall be capa-ble of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, orshall be designed, installed and used as part of a complete personal fall arrestsystem which maintains a safety factor of at least two, under the supervision ofa qualified person.

Personal fall arrest systems shall, when stopping a fall: 1) limit maximum arrest-ing force on an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used with a body belt; and2) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) whenused with a body harness.

Personal fall arrest systems shall be rigged such than an employee can neitherfree fall more than 6 feet (1.8m), nor contact any lower level.

Personal fall arrest systems or components subjected to impact loading shall beimmediately removed from service and shall not be used again for employeeprotection unless inspected and determined by a competent person to beundamaged and suitable for reuse.

Before using a personal fall arrest system, and after any competent or systemis changed, employees shall be trained in accordance with the requirements ofparagraph 1910.66 (i)(l), in the safe use of the system.

Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each use for mildew,wear, damage and other deterioration. Defective components shall be removedfrom service if their strength or function may be adversely affected.

Permit-Required Confined Spaces (OSHA 1910.146)

(a) Scope and application. This section contains requirements for practices andprocedures to protect employees in general industry from the hazards of entryinto permit-required confined spaces.(k)(3) To facilitate non-entry rescue, retrieval systems or methods shall be usedwhenever an authorized entrant enters a permit space, unless the retrievalequipment would increase the overall risk of entry or would not contribute to therescue of the entrant. Retrieval systems shall meet the following requirements:(i) Each authorized entrant shall use a chest or full body harness, with a retrievalline attached at the center of the entrant's back near shoulder level, above theentrant's head, or at another point which the employer can establish presents aprofile small enough for the successful removal of the entrant. Wristlets may beused in lieu of the chest or full body harness if the employer can demonstratethat the use of a chest or full body harness is infeasible or creates a greater haz-ard and that the use of wristlets is the safest and most effective alternative.(ii) The other end of the retrieval line shall be attached to a mechanical deviceor fixed point outside the permit space in such a manner that rescue can beginas soon as the rescuer becomes aware that rescue is necessary. A mechanicaldevice shall be available to retrieve personnel from vertical type permit spacesmore than 5 feet deep.


WEIGHT IN LBS.CHAIN PULL OVERHAUL RATIO SHPPING FOR ADDITIONAL

TO LIFT TO LIFT LOAD NET WEIGHT LOAD CHAIN ONE FT.CAPACITY STD. LIFT FULL LOAD ONE FT. WEIGHT (APPROX.) FALLS OF LIFT

CODE NO. (TONS) (FT.) (LBS.) (FT.) (LBS.) (LBS.) (LINES) (LBS.)

HEAVY DUTY INDUSTRIAL QUALITY HOIST (CB)

CB005 1/2 8 48 25 22 23 1 1.0CB010 1 8 58 43 25 26 1 1.2CB015 1-1/2 8 70 57 32 33 1 1.4CB020 2 8 72 70 41 43 1 1.6CB025 2-1/2 8 66 99 56 58 1 1.8CB030 3 8 72 114 49 53 2 2.1CB050 5 8 68 198 85 89 2 3.0CB080 8 8 75 297 124 131 3 4.2CB100 10 12 72 396 186 203 3 5.5CB150 15 12 74 594 346 368 5 7.9CB200 20 12 72 X 2 396 X 2 524 678 6 10.9CB300 30 12 86 X 2 495 X 2 690 889 10 13.3CB400 40 12 86 X 2 693 X 2 1068 1398 14 18.2CB500 50 12 98 X 2 792 X 2 1422 1752 18 20.6CB800 80 12 86 X 4 693 X 4 3392 - 28 36.3CB1000 100 12 98 X 4 792X 4 6525 - 36 41.2

*Any lift of chain is available on request. When ordering, specify the length of chain.

HARRINGTON HEAVY DUTY CB HAND CHAIN HOIST

Harrington CB Chain hoists combine a rugged exterior shell with machined interior components to handleyour most demanding lifting operations. An efficient drive train minimizes effort, while double enclosedbrake cover, standard slip clutch, and double pawl springs enhance performance and reliability.

Many Benefits From More Features:• Experience exceptional durability thanks to all-steel construction featuring rugged gear case enclosure and

handwheel cover.• Enjoy increased lifting height thanks to low headroom.• Compact design results in lightweight and easy portability.• Minimize manual effort thanks to efficient drive train.• Standard slip clutch device prevents the hoist from being used to lift damaging loads beyond rates capacity.• Double pawl springs provide redundancy for reliable operation of brake mechanism.• Get reliable braking with double enclosed brake cover that keeps out dust, rain, and dirt.

Options:• Chain container• Corrosion-resistant chain• Inspection hook

Capabilities To Count On:• 8-foot standard lift (12-foot for 10 Ton and greater), nonstandard lifts and hand chain drops are also available.• Grade 100 heat-treated manganese alloy load chain resists abrasion and wear while minimizing chain weight.• Forged and heat-treated alloy steel hooks are designed to open slowly, without fracturing under excessive loads.• Test certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load tested to 125% of rated capacity. in accordance with

ASME B30.21 requirements.


STANDARD DUTY CHAIN HOISTS (CF)1/2 Through 5 Ton capacityHarrington CF hand chain hoists give you a practical alternative thanks to an economical design using fewer parts trouble-free serv-ice. Outstanding durability is due to a die-cast aluminum body and high-strength, heat-treated main pinion shaft and load gear. Pre-lubricated ball bearings, precision machined gears, and Weston-style load brake make lifting smooth and easy while allowing longservice and low maintenance.

Many Benefits From More Features:• Experience exceptional strength with a thick die-cast aluminum body.• Handle tough demands with high-strength, heat-treated main pinion shaft and load gear.• Get positive braking action with Weston-style load brake incorporating two moisture-resistant brake pads with four braking surfaces.• Minimize manual effort thanks to smooth running, pre-lubricated ball bearings, and precision machined drive train components.• Simplify maintenance with fewer parts and an easy-to-work-on demand.

Capabilities To Count On:• 10-foot lift is standard, 15- and 20-foot lifts are also stocked; nonstandard lifts and hand chain drops available as well.• Grade 100 heat-treated alloy steel hooks are designed to open slowly and not fracture under excessive loads.• Test certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load tested to 125% of rated capacity, in accordance with ASME B30.21

requirements.

Options:• Chain container• Corrosion-resistant chain• Inspection hook

HARRINGTON CF CHAIN HOIST

Load WeightPull to Chain Net Shipping for

Headroom Std. Lift Overhaul Diameter Weight Weight Add’l a b d e f gCap. Product C Lift Load Ratio (mm) x (lbs.) Approx. One Foot (in) (in) (ft) (in) (in) (in)

(Tons) Code (in) (ft) (lbs) Chain (lbs.) of LiftFall Lines (lbs.)

1/2 CF005 12.8 10 60 19 5.0 x 1 24 26 1.0 5.4 5.9 10 2.0 2.4 1.11 CF010 14.6 10 72 31 6.3 x 1 29 31 1.2 5.8 6.9 10 2.3 2.9 1.1

1-1/2 CF015 17.3 10 84 41 7.1 x 1 4 42 1.4 6.0 8.0 10 2.4 3.4 1.32 CF020 20.1 10 80 63 6..3 x 2 47 49 1.8 5.8 8.0 10 2.3 2.3 1.43 CF030 23.2 10 92 81 7.1 x 2 62 66 2.1 6.0 9.4 10 2.4 2.7 1.75 CF050 24.4 10 92 134 7.1 x 3 82 86 2.9 6.0 13.5 10 2.4 4.5 1.8

Please Note: Special lengths of load and hand chain available upon request.

CF HAND CHAIN HOIST SPECIFICATIONS


New Design• Lighter Weight• Compact Size• Lower Headroom• Nickel Plated Chain• Easy to Operate• Trouble Free

“THE TOUGH ONE” INDUSTRIAL-CONTRACTOR QUALITY (LB)3/4, 1,11/2, 2, 3, 6, and 9 Ton Capacity Plus New Compact Design 23/4 Ton

HARRINGTON HEAVY DUTY LB LEVER HOISTS

Harrington LB lever hoists combine easy operation with a compact, reliable design that easily handles the real-world demands ofcontractor and industrial applications. Examples include day-to-day maintenance, machine repair, construction, service, and man-ufacturing operations. you’ll find every job goes easier thanks to smooth, reliable lifting and pulling actions. Compact size and easyoperation make the LB lever puller the “cumalong to take along” wherever you have a load to move.

Many Benefits From Move Features:• Take and use this hoist anywhere–including tight quarters–thanks to a compact design with low headroom.• Shed weight , not rugged, all steel construction that actually weighs less than comparable aluminum models.• Get positive braking action with Weston-style load brake incorporating two moisture-resistant brake pads with four braking surfaces.

Includes two brake pawls for additional reliability.• Enjoy protection against dirt and moisture with a totally enclosed brake mechanism.• Realize long life with machined, heat-treated, split load double reduction gears.• Operation in close quarters with short, 15-degree recovery strokes, short steel handle and positive rubber grip.• Patented spring-loaded freewheel mechanism allows easy adjustment of the load chain while safeguarding against inadvertent

freewheel under load.

Options:• Load limit warning handle• Point load hook• Top hook extender• Inspection hook

Capabilities To Count On:• 5-foot lift is standard, 10-, 15- and 20-foot lifts also stocked; nonstandard lifts available as well.• Nickel plated load chain resists abrasion and wear while minimizing chain weight and corrosion.• Forged and heat-treated alloy steel hooks open slowly without fracturing under excessive loads.• Test certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load tested to 125% of rated capacity, in accordance with ASME B30.21

requirements.

New &

Improved

3/4 - 23⁄4 Ton 3 Ton 6 Ton 9 Ton


3/4 LB008 11.0 5 54 (36) 5.7 4.7 9.6 3.8 1.6 0.9 5.6 x 1 13 13 0.51 LB010 11.8 5 72 (46) 5.7 4.7 9.6 3.8 1.6 1.1 5.6 x 1 13 14 0.5

1 1/2 LB015 13.2 5 64 (45) 6.3 5.0 10.4 3.9 1.5 1.3 7.1 x 1 18 18 0.72 LB020 14.8 5 59 (42) 6.8 5.9 10.4 4.0 1.8 1.4 8.8 x 1 25 26 1.1

2 3/4 LB028 14.8 5 81 (57) 6.8 5.9 10.4 4.0 1.8 1.4 8.8 x 1 25 26 1.13 LB030 15.6 5 69 7.5 6.3 16.3 4.4 1.8 1.5 10.0 x 1 33 35 1.56 LB060 21.3 5 72 7.5 8.5 16.3 4.4 2.3 2.0 10.0 x 2 57 60 3.29 LB090 26.8 5 78 7.5 12.0 16.3 4.4 4.1 2.9 10.0 x 3 88 93 4.7

Load WeightChain forDia. Shipping Additional

Headroom Std. Pull to (mm) x Net Weight One FootCap. Product C Lift Lift Load* a b D* e f g Chain Fall Weight Approx of Lift

(Tons) Code (in) (ft) (lbs) (in) (in) (in) (in) (in) (in) Lines (lbs) (lbs) (lbs)

ADJUSTABLE FOR*: WHEEL TREAD MIN. RADIUS NET WEIGHTCODE NO. CAP. (TONS) FLANGE WIDTH (IN.) DIAM. (IN.) TRACK CURVE (IN.) (LBS.)

SPECIFICATIONS

PT005 1/4 - 1/2 2.28 - 4.92 2.2 32 13PT010 1 2.28 - 4.92 2.8 39 24PT020 1-1/2 - 2 3.94 - 5.91 3.4 47 40PT030 2-1/2 - 3 3.94 - 5.91 3.9 59 57PT050 5 4.92 - 6.89 4.6 79 99PT080 8 5.91 - 8.66 6.1 118 226PT100 10 5.91 - 8.66 6.1 118 226

*Up to 12 inch flange widths available.

Harrington push geared trolleys help you maneuver easily on your most demanding lifting operations. They featurespecially designed contoured wheels that ensure reliable tracking, and their sealed ball bearings avoid maintenancehassles and provide smooth operation.

Many Benefits From More Features:• Get sure trolley with specially designed contoured wheels that fit both tapered and flat-flanged beams.• Maintenance-free, sealed precision ball bearings are lubed-for-life and offer smooth movement, with low friction and long life.• Get strength and rigidity from a lightweight, compact and long life.• Easily adjust trolley to fit a wide variety of bea flange widths.• Wide standard flange ranges reduce the need for optional extended shaft kits.• Match the needs of the job with a variety of trolley hoist suspensions.

PUSH TROLLEY (PT)

HEAVY DUTY PUSH AND GEARED TROLLEYS

PT

GT NOTE: GT Flange Widths Are The Same As PT

LB CHAIN COME-A-LONG SPECIFICATIONS

LB015 LB030 LB060 LB090


CAPACITIES 1/4 TO 20 TONSVOLTAGES 220/460-3-60Load-supporting frame is sturdy double-steel plate construction for capacities 1/2 ton and over.

Aluminum frame with fins allows better radiation and permits frequent operations.

Two brakes: a Pull Rotor Motor Brake and a Weston Mechanical Load Brake supplied as standard.

All Harrington ER Series Electric Hoists meet NEMA 3R Specifications. The duty rating is class H3. Where NEMA 3S or a duty rat-ing class of H4 is required, consult factory. Meets International Electric Code 1.P.54. Insulation Class B.

Optional voltages available.

Special chain guide allows smooth load chain movement. Chain container.

The load chain is made of specially developed case hardened alloy steel. Excellent in durability, the super-high strength chaincomplies with ISO specifications. Nickel Diffused chain is available for use in such applications as rain, sea water, steam, chemi-cal or other harmful atmospheres.

Built-in bearing in bottom hook permits easier 360° swiveling.

The hooks are drop-forged from special alloy steel and heat treated for strength and toughness. They are designed to open slow-ly when overloaded.

HARRINGTON ER ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS

ERHOOK SUSPENSION TYPECAPACITY 1/4 TO 20 TONS

ERPPLAIN TROLLEY TYPE

CAPACITY 1/4 TO 20 TONS

ERGGEARED TROLLEY TYPE

CAPACITY 1/4 TO 20 TONS

ERMMOTORIZED TROLLEY TYPECAPACITY 1/4 TO 20 TONS

New Wire Rope HoistsElectric Wire Rope Hoists 2,3,5,71/2,10,15,20 Tonsare now available from Harrington along with cranesystems and end trucks.


CAPACITIES: 125 TO 525 LBS.SINGLE PHASE AC 120V 60 HZFeatures:

• 120V Single Phase power supply

• Lifting Speeds available to suit any handling operation

• Low headroom

• Light, die cast aluminum, compact body

• Dual speed adjustable cylinder control is ergonomically designed and has a compact speed selector control device.

• Incorporates a double braking system—a regenerative brake and the Weston brake

• A mechanical braking system using a unique high performance clutch brake with overtravel protection

• High strength, zinc plated load chain

• Chain container (standard)

• Forged, alloy steel hooks with latches

• Gears are immersed in an oil bath with deep groove ball and needle bearings used to support all rotating components

• Permanent magnet DC motor

Benefits:

• Easy and inexpensive installation can be used where no three phase power is available

• The chance for injuries and product damage can be minimized by using the applicable combination of speed and lift.

• Can be used in close quarters

• Product is easily moved, stored or installed

• Comfortable for operator use

• Allows for accurate placement of load

• Prevents damage to unit that can occur when load is overlifted or overloaded

• Lightweight and long-lasting chain

• Offers protection for load chain out of operator’s way

• Will open slowly in an overload situation

• Smooth, quiet operation

• Smaller size contributing to overall compactness of unit

HARRINGTON ED ELECTRIC CHAIN HOIST

MINI TROLLEYMODEL ED - DAMODEL ED - S & DS


The new Lug-All cable winch-hoist costs less, weighs less (only 34 lbs.) and is easier to operate than a chain hoist of the samecapacity. It stores 15 ft. of cable right on its drum and provides 50% more reach than the average chain hoist. The new hoist hasa unique reversible handle that telescopes from 37-1/2” to 57” to provide extra leverage when needed. Permits pulling from a stand-ing position. Available in marine grade. 100% American made. 1/2 ton to 3 ton capacities. Lightweight and portable.

In 1949, LUG-ALL pioneered a new concept . . . a portable cable ratchet winch-hoist with strong aluminum frame, self-storing air-craft cable, a reversible safety handle, and an interlocking pawl system. The LUG-ALL has been imitated. It has never been sur-passed. When you want a winch-hoist, specify LUG-ALL. There’s a big difference.

FEATURES: Operates smoothly right side up or upside down in most positions. Forged-steel safety hooks straighten if over-stressed.Three workable hooks instead of two. Factory tested to 50% overload. Easily rigged and carried by one man. Interlockingpawl system will not slip even if wet or oily. Free release—works only when hoist is unloaded. Operates at two speeds. Adjusts forclose control.

3-TON CAPACITY WITH TELESCOPIC HANDLE

LUG-ALL CABLE WINCH-HOIST

“A” RIG “B” RIG “C” RIG CABLEHANDLE MIN. HANDLE MIN. HANDLE MIN.

PULL FOR DISTANCE PULL FOR DISTANCE PULL FOR DISTANCE TOTALCAPACITY CAPACITY FULL LOAD LIFTING BETWEEN CAPACITY FULL LOAD LIFTING BETWEEN CAPACITY FULL LOAD LIFTING BETWEEN WEIGHT

CODE NO. (TONS) LBS. (LBS.) DISTANCE HOOKS LBS. (LBS.) DISTANCE HOOKS LBS. (LBS.) DISTANCE HOOKS DIAM. LENGTH (LBS.)

1000-15* 1/2 — — — — 1000 77 15’ 16” — — — — 3/16” 16’ 7115-R* 1/2 — — — — 1000 77 15’ 16” — — — — 3/16” 16’ 71500-25 3/4 1500 67 12-1/2’ 21” 750 65 25’ 16” 750 67 25’ 10” 5/32” 26’ 8-1/2125-R 3/4 1500 67 12-1/2’ 21” 750 65 25’ 16” 750 67 25’ 10” 5/32” 26’ 8-1/22250-15 1-1/8 2250 86 7-1/2’’ 21” 1125 83 15’ 16” 1125 86 15’ 10” 3/16” 16’ 8-3/4215-R 1-1/8 2250 86 7-1/2’’ 21” 1125 83 15’ 16” 1125 86 15’ 10” 3/16” 16’ 8-3/42250-20 1-1/8 2250 86 10’ 21” 1125 83 20’ 16” 1125 86 20’ 10” 3/16” 21’ 9-1/4•3000-10 1-1/2 3000 100 5’ 21” 1500 97 10’ 16” 1500 100 10’ 10” 7/32” 11.5’ 9310-R 1-1/2 3000 100 5’ 21” 1500 97 10’ 16” 1500 100 10’ 10” 7/32” 11.5’ 92250-38 1-1/8 2250 100 19’ 23-1/2” 1125 83 38’ 18” 1125 86 38’ 10” 3/16” 39.5’ 13-3/4238-R 1-1/8 2250 100 19’ 23-1/2” 1125 83 38’ 18” 1125 86 38’ 10” 3/16” 39.5’ 13-3/4•3000-30 1-1/2 3000 100 15’ 23-1/2” 1500 97 30’ 18” 1500 100 30’ 10” 7/32” 31.5’ 13-3/4330-R 1-1/2 3000 100 15’ 23-1/2” 1500 97 30’ 18” 1500 100 30’ 10” 7/32” 31.5’ 13-3/4•4000-20 2 4000 115 10’ 26-1/2” 2000 110 20’ 18-1/2” 2000 115 20’ 13” 1./4” 22’ 15-1/2420-R 2 4000 115 10’ 26-1/2” 2000 110 20’ 18-1/2” 2000 115 20’ 13” 1./4” 22’ 15-1/2

6000-15 3 6000 105 7-1/2’’ 34” 3000 105 15’ 26-1/2” 3000 105 15’ 17” 5/16” 18’ 34•Stocked in our warehouse. Suffix “R” denotes rapid lowering units. *Without pulley block. For marine grade (with stainless steel cable, anodized castings, and oiled-for-life bearingsthroughout) add suffix “M” to model number. Specifications and dimensions are subject to change without notice.WARNING: These hoists are intended for industrial use and not for lifting or supporting human cargo.

LUG-ALL CABLE MODELS SPECIFICATIONS

LUG-ALLS HAVE 3 BASIC RIGGING POSITIONS

Adoublecablelift

Bsinglecablelift

Cminimumdistance13”


MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN HOOKSW/STRAP HANDLE PULL W/STRAP HANDLE PULL NET

CAPACITY DOUBLE W/FULL IN SINGLE W/FULL WEIGHT STRAPCODE NO.(TONS) DESCRIPTION REEVED (IN.) DRUM (LBS.) LINE (IN.) DRUM (LBS.) (LBS.) LENGTH

2 1 w/Safety Hooks 24-1/2 67 17-1/2 65 10-1/4 9’5”2B 1 w/Safety Hook and Hot Stick Rings 24-1/2 67 17-1/2 65 10-1/4 9’5”2U 1 w/Gate Type Safety Hooks 29 67 23 65 12 9’5”3 1-1/2 w/Safety Hooks 25 93 19-1/2 90 13 11’8”3B 1-1/2 w/Safety Hooks and Hot Stick Rings 25 93 19-1/2 90 13 11’8”3U 1-1/2 w/Gate Type Safety Hooks 29-1/2 93 23-1/2 90 14-3/4 11’8”3PS 1-1/2 w/Turnbuckle Jaws 24-1/2 93 19 90 13-1/2 11’8”4 2 w/Safety Hooks 26 105 20-1/2 100 14-3/4 9’8”4B 2 w/Safety Hooks and Hot Stick Rings 26 105 20-1/2 100 14-3/4 9’8”4U 2 w/Gate Type Safety Hooks 30-1/2 105 23-1/2 100 16-1/2 9’8”4PS 2 w/Turnbuckle Jaws 25 105 19 100 14-3/4 9’8”

LUG-ALL INSULATED MODELS

PARTS & REPAIR AVAILABLE IN OUR SHOP

LUG-ALL WINCH-HOISTS

Approved by the country’s major utilities for line construction work. 1, 1-1/2 and 2-ton capacities. Lightweight. From 10-1/4 to 16-1/2 lbs. Equipped with 8 or 10 ft. nylon web straps and reversible fiberglass handles.

Available with HOT STICK RINGS. Many models equipped with six 1” hot stick rings for remote operation with a lineman’s stick

WARNING: These hoists are intended for industrialuse and not for lifting or supporting human cargo.

Designed for line construction work, Lug-All insulated winch-hoists make it safer to work with live wires. These lightweight hoistshave one-hand portability and are easy to use in any position. Insulated straps and handles protect against shock, and the easilyreplaceable stress link that breaks on a 50% overload is an excellent accident preventative.

Our hoists with hot stick rings widen the safety margin by eliminating direct contact with the hoist. Six 1” diameter rings on thehooks, handle and pawl shafts allow the lineman to position the hoist with a holding stick or shot gun.

LUG-ALL WEB STRAP WINCH HOIST

the RIGHT way and theWRONG way to use a Lug-All!


MATERIAL WEIGHT (LBS.) GRIPHOIST WIRE ROPELIFTING TOTAL LENGTH OF APPROX.

CAPACITY STAND. OPERAT. WEIGHT OVERALL OPERATE DIAM. BREAK. SPEEDCODE NO. (LBS.) HOIST WIRE ROPE** HANDLE SHIP DIM. (IN.) HANDLE (IN.) IN. (MM) LOAD (LBS.) PER MIN. (FPM)

T-508

T-508 2,000* 14.25 30 ft. @8 2.5 26 16-1/2x9-7/8x3-7/8 22/28 5/16 (8.4) ref. C8 10,000 7-9TU-17 2,000* 18.5 30 ft.@8 2.2 32 20-3/4x9-3/4x4-1/2 22/28 5/16 (8.4) ref. C8 10,000 7-9T-516 4,000* 30 60 [email protected] 5 61 20-7/8x12-7/16x5 25-5/8-45-1/4 7/16(11.6)ref.C12 20,000 6TU-28 4,000* 41 [email protected] 5.3 80 26x13x5-3/4 31-1/2-47-1/2 7/16(11.6)refC12 20,000 7-8T-532 8,000* 51 30ft.@28 5 77 24-7/17x14x5-1/8 25-5/8-45-1/4 5/8(16.3)refC16 40,000 6TU-32 8,000* 59.5 30ft.@28 5.3 105 27x13x6-1/8 31-1/2-47-1/2 5/8(16.3)ref.C16 40,000 5

*Capacity calculated for materials hoisting. For manriding, conform to all safety regulations.**Any odd lengths supplied on request. Unless specified otherwise, wire rope is fitted with its standard safety hook at one end and welded point the other end. Alightweight metal reel, supplied with the wire rope, facilitates carrying and stowing. As a rule GRIPHOIST units are not sold without their wire rope.

Griphoist machines used in conjunction with sheave blocks willefficiently solve most of your pulling and lifting problems. By usingsheave blocks on the hauling rope, the nominal capacity ofGriphoist machines can be multipled 2, 3 and even 4 times asshown in the diagram. As a rule, it is not difficult to figure the num-ber of line parts to be used for a given load. It is however impor-tant, especially when there is a greater number of line parts, totake into account the friction in the sheaves, which can have a non-negligible influence on the strain exerted on the hoist and the topanchoring hook of the block.

Material hoisting capacity 1 ton.

TU-17N.S.N. 3950-00-724-6156. 3/4 ton manriding. U.L.classified.

T-516Material hoisting capacity 2 ton.

TU-28N.S.N. 3950-00-226-9444. 1-1/2 ton manriding. U.L.classified.

T-532Material hoisting capacity 4 ton.

TU-32N.S.N. 3950-01-006-0733. 3 ton manriding. U.L. clas-sified.

INCREASE OF LIFTING ANDPULLING POWER

GRIPHOIST CONTINUOUS CABLE PULLERS

Stake Out Kit Available For Anchoring To The Ground


DIMENSIONS SAFE WORKING LOAD TEST WEIGHTCODE NO. L W H (SLW) CAPACITY LBS. OPTIONAL

SUSPENDED PERSONNEL SUPERCAGE

S-30 30” 30” 44/88” 500 625S-36 36” 36” 44/88” 750 938S-50 36” 48” 44/88” 750 938S-60 36” 60” 44/88” 750 938S-75 48” 48” 44/88” 750 938S-100 48” 48” 44/88” 1,000 1,250S-125 48” 54” 44/88” 1,250 1,563S-150 48” 60” 44/88” 1,500 1,875S-160 48” 96” 44/88” 1,500 1,875S-170 48” 108” 44/88” 1,500 1,875S-200 48” 72” 44/88” 2,000 2,500S-400 72” 144” 44/88” 4,000 5,000S-1000 84” 84” 96” 10,000 12,500S-R5 18” DIA 88” 300 375S-R7 36” DIA 88” 500 625S-AL1 36” 36” 44/88” 500 625S-AL2 48” 48” 44/88” 1,000 1,250S-NP60 60” 60” 72” 1,000 N/AS-NP603 60” 60” 60” 3,000 N/A

All Supercage products were designed to incorporate the following as standard equipment: Removable components for easy main-tenance and repairs. High strength steel 2” square tubing construction. Inward swing door, self-closing, self-latching (with outwardstop plate). Grab rail on entire inside perimeter. Anchors for personnel safety belts or body harness. 6” steel toe plate (entire insideperimeter). Expanded metal from floor deck to top of midrail. Non-slip material floor. Exterior pad eyes for anchoring and taglineuse. Eight upper reinforcing gussets at bail area (for added strength). Special warning decals and permanent metal ID plate.Polyurethane paint, high durability, safety yellow. Operating manual furnished.

Options available at additional cost: Easily detachable test weight assembly for load test procedure. 5-part wire rope liftingattachment (bridle). Protective roof—expanded or solid metal. Fixed crosshead with lifting eye (for direct attach to hook). Forkliftattachment with safety restraint. Rubber bumpers on external perimeter. Tool/storage shelf (inside). Video for safe operation.Alternate paint colors and finishes.

CAUTION: Platforms are to be used only in compliance with Federal rules and regulations. SUPERCAGE products aredesigned, engineered, manufactured, and certified to meet or exceed all existing Federal and State codes. Title 29CFR Part1926.550(g), Crane and Derrick Suspended Personnel Platform. Inspection, load test and certification documents furnished.

SUPERCAGES can be ordered in any size, shape or material to meet your specific applications. We also manufacture non-personnel medical evacuation, and welding equipment Supercages. Ask about our Supercage DFA (Direct Fixed Attached) per-sonnel platforms (cages) which attach directly to the end of the boom on most cranes. DFA models do not require a bridle assem-bly or anti-two block device when used in this manner.

SUSPENDED PERSONNEL PLATFORMS

MODEL S-16048” x 96” x 88”

MODEL S-R736” O.D. x 88”

MODEL S-10048” x 48” x 88”

Shown with optional expanded metal roofand test weight assembly


THERN HAND WINCHES


THERN HAND WINCHES


THERN HAND WINCHES


STANDARD MAX UTILITY I-BEAM VERSATILEHYDRAULIC PNEUMATIC ELECTRIC ELECTRIC ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC ELECTRIC ELECTRIC

REQUIREMENT HY1 AIR 1000 100A 10-12 AC 36 DC 48 300A 30-12 HY3 800• 500 510 520 520***

THE MAX SERIES

Lift Capacity (lbs.) 3000 2500 2000 2500 6000 6000 1600 1600 1600 2000 2000 2000 3000 3000(double line)first layer•••Motor Hydraulic N/A•• 115V or 12V DC 115V or 12V DC 115V or 12V DC Hydraulic 115V or 115V or 115V or 115V or 115V orVoltage 230V AC 230V AC 230V AC 230V AC 230V 230V 230V 230VNo Load Drum 17 32 30 10 11 4 59 21 29 30 8 12 12 12Speed (FPM) Constant Constant Constant Constant

speed speed speed speedFull Capacity 10 FPM 15 FPM 20 FPM 9 FPM 7.25 FPM 4 FPM 30 FPM 15 FPM 29 FPM 20 FPM 8 FPM 12 FPM 12 FPM 12 FPMSingle-Line @1500 lbs. @1250 lbs. @1000 lbs. @1250 lbs. @3000 lbs. @3000 lbs. @800 lbs. @800 lbs. @800 lbs. @1000 lbs. @1000 lbs. @1000 lbs. @1500 lbs. @1500 lbs.Lift SpeedFull Load (amps) 19 100 19 100 19 100 19 9 17 17 5Duty Cycle 50% 50% 25% 25% 25% 25% 25% 25% 25% 25% 50% 50% 50% 50%1/4” Cable 250 250 250 250 250** 250** n/A N/A N/A 250* 250 250 250 250Capacity (ft.)Dimensions 9x9x21 12x11x22 12x14x22 12x14x23 13x13x27 13x13x28 12x14x18 12x14x18 8x8x16 15x14x25 13x11x32 13x11x32 13x11x32 13x10x38(W”xH”xL”)Shipping 60 77 67 69 128 138 54 65 60 143 98 115 115 165Weight (lbs.)

•I-Beam size must be specified at time of order. ••See separate sheet for air consumption. •••See catalog for multiple layer ratings.*Shipped with 40 foot 1/4” cable. **110 foot capacity 3./8” cable; 3/8” cable recommended on this model. ***Three phase.

Model AC 36 shownTHE I-BEAM SERIESModel 800 shown

HYDRAULIC MODELModel HY1 shown

THE UTILITY SERIES

MODEL SPECIFICATIONS

Model 30-12 shownTHE VERSATILE SERIESModel 520 shown

PNEUMATIC MODELModel Air 1000 shown

MY-TE POWER WINCHES

NOTE: Pole Mount Kits Available.


CODE NO. RATED CAPACITY (TONS) GRIP OPENING (IN.) WEIGHT (LBS.)

AVL1/2 1/2 0 - 7/8 10AVL1 1 0 - 7/8 10VL1/2 1/2 0 - 1-3/8 10VL1 1 0 - 1-3/8 10VL2S 2 0 - 1-5/8 23VL2L 2 1-1/2 - 2-3/4 25VL3S 3 0 - 1-5/8 27VL3L 3 1-1/2 - 2-3/4 29VL4S 4 0 - 1-1/8 45VL4M 4 2 - 3-3/4 47VL4L 4 3-3/4 - 5-1/2 49VL6S 6 0 - 2-1/8 49VL6M 6 2 - 3-3/4 50VL6L 6 3 - 5-1/2 53VL8S 8 0 - 2-5/8 60VL8M 8 2-1/2 - 4-1/2 67VL8L 8 4-1/2 - 6-1/2 74VL10S 10 0 - 2-5/8 72VL10M 10 2-1/2 - 4-1/2 80VL10L 10 4-1/2 - 6-1/2 88VL12S 12 1/2 - 3-1/8 92VL12M 12 3 - 5-1/4 101VL12L 12 5 - 7-1/4 112VL20S 20 1/2 - 4-1/4 302VL20M 20 4 - 7 322VL20L 20 7 - 10 345

MODEL VLHorizontal to vertical lift. Capable of turning a single steel plate from horizontal to vertical to horizontal through a 180° arc. Locksopen and closed. to facilitate loading and unloading clamp. Locks closed onto material for a more secure lift. Gripping cams. 2through 20 ton lift capacities incorporate dual gripping cams. Increases grip on load for a more secure lift. Self aligning pivoting diefor increased surface contact between load and clamp. Wide jaw openings within rated lift capacity. High strength shock resistantsteel provides for longer clamp life. Working parts enclosed. Protects parts for longer use.

INSPECTION MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRIt is important to establish a regular procedure for clamp inspection. Frequency of inspection will depend upon the amount of usethe clamp receives, and may well vary from one department or area to another. Merrill clamps are built to withstand rough treat-ment. Grit, dirt, sludge and mud should be removed, however. This may be done easily by immersing the entire clamp in a can ofdegreaser and leaving it there overnight. Also, periodic oiling of all pins and rivits will improve performance and help to extend thelife of the clamp. You may wish to maintain a written record, indicating inspection dates, condition of the clamp on each of thosedates, and any repairs made. Inspection records should be reviewed periodically.

CAUTIONSThe clamps in this catalog are not intended to serve as a permanent connection to a plate or other object. The grip depends onfriction and a camming action. If the gripping surfaces are not properly maintained and the clamp is improperly used, the load mayfall. Use extreme caution where overhead lifting is involved or where a failure could cause property damage or personal injury. Readmaintenance and use instructions.

WARNING1. Do not exceed Working Load Limit.2. Inspect clamp before each lift.3. Do not lift more than one plate or sheet at a time.4. Position clamp to balance load.5. Insert plate or unit to full depth of throat opening.6. Lift slowly and smoothly. Do not jerk load.7. Stand clear of load when lifting.8. Do not use a damaged clamp.9. Read manufacturer’s instructions before using clamps.

10. Do not use any Merrill clamp to lift tapered plates or beams.11. When lifting plates with a hardness over 43 Rockwell C/400 Brinnell, consult the clamp manufacturer.

SAFETY CLAMPS INC. LIFTING CLAMPS

Many OtherStyles and

SizesAbailable


CODE NO. CAPACITY (LBS.) CAPACITY (TONS) FLANGE WIDTH (IN.) NET WEIGHT (LBS.)

BEAM CLAMPS (STOCKED IN OUR WAREHOUSE)

LMBC-1 2000 1 3 - 8.25 10.6LMBC-2 4000 2 3 - 8.25 12.3LMBC-3 6000 3 3.1 - 12.6 24LMBC-5 10000 5 3.1 - 12.6 27.1LMBC-10 20000 10 3.5 - 12.6 46.3

2,000 to 20,000 lbs. 1 to 10 ton. Reliable and rugged. All steel construction is durable yet lightweight. Portable for permanent or tem-porary mounting. Adjustable. Fits securely on a wide range of flange widths and beam sizes. Special design. Clamp jaw designreduces flange stress by distributing load away from flange edge. Low headroom. Built in suspension bar provides close mounting.

S.W.L./WLL AT 0° VERTICAL JAW GRIP ADJUSTMENT JAW APERTUREMIN.-MAX. MIN.-MAX.

CODE NO. METRIC US/IMP. METRIC US/IMP. METRIC US/IMP.

PERMANENTLY FIXED ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

PFC1 1000 KG 1T 75-190mm 3”-7-1/2” 22mm 3/4”PFC1 1000 KG 1T 75-190mm 3”-7-1/2” 22mm 3/4”PFC1 1000 KG 1T 75-190mm 3”-7-1/2” 22mm 3/4”

Permanently fixed adjustable SUPERCLAMP Girder Clamps (PFC) are designed for light industrial applications, particularly wherea permanent overhead anchor point is required. These high-strength inexpensive lightweight clamps are excellent for applicationin small garages and hobbyist workshops.



SWIVEL JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

S5 3000 KG 3T 80 - 315mm 3-1/2” - 12” 26mm 1”S5A 3000 KG 3T 80 - 315mm 3-1/2” - 12” 26mm 1”S6 5000 KG 5T 80 - 315mm 3-1/2” - 12” 26mm 1”S6A 5000 KG 5T 80 - 315mm 3-1/2” - 12” 28mm 1”S11 10000 KG 10T 80 - 315mm 3-1/2” - 12” 30mm 1”

Swivel Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps incorporate the additional benefit of horizontal jaw adjustment. This enables the full lengthand a maximum width of the swivel jaw to anchor evenly on a considerable surface area of the beam flange. Additional tools orwidth adjusting components are not required.



FIXED JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

S1 2000 KG 2T 75 - 190mm 3” - 7-1/2” 22mm 3/4”S2 3000 KG 3T 75 - 190mm 3” - 7-1/2” 22mm 3/4”S2A 3000 KG 3T 75 - 190mm 3” - 7-1/2” 22mm 3/4”S3 4000 KG 4T 150 - 254mm 6” - 10” 22mm 3/4”S3A 5000 KG 5T 150 - 315mm 6” - 12” 42mm 1-5/8”S4S 6000 KG 6T 200 - 457mm 8” - 18” 42mm 1-5/8”S4A 10000 KG 10T 200 - 457mm 8” - 18” 42mm 1-5/8”S12 15000 KG 15T 200 - 457mm 1” - 18” 50mm 2”S14 15000 KG 15T 406 - 610mm 16” - 24” 63mm 2-1/2”

These Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps are truly versatile in application and may be used for lifting, pulling, or as an anchorpoint. Designed specifically to provide maximum jaw grip adjustment.These products are engineered for practical use where mobil-ity is essential. The clamps are speedily applied and do not require additional tools or width adjusting components, such as spac-ing washers.

S.W.L./WLL AT 0° VERTICAL WIDTH ADJUSTMENT TO ACCOM. BEAMMIN.-MAX. MIN.-MAX. FLANGE THICK MAX.


ADJUSTABLE RUNWAY BEAM TROLLEY WITH ANTI-DROP PLATES

BA1 1000 KG 1T 63 - 203mm 2-1/2” - 8” 26mm 1”BA2 1500 KG 1.5T 75 - 203mm 3” - 8” 26mm 1”BA3 2000 KG 2T 75 - 203mm 3” - 8” 26mm 1”B1 3000 KG 3T 75 - 203mm 3” - 8” 28mm 1-1/8”B2 6000 KG 6T 100 - 315mm 4” - 8” 30mm 1-3/18”B3 10000 KG 10T 100 - 315mm 4” - 8” 30mm 1-3/18”

SUPERCLAMP Adjustable Runway Beam Trolleys are of acknowledged and experienced design. the unique quality features of thenew range of manual traveling gear are the “Anti-Drop” Plates (ADPS) which are incorporated into the practical design of thesetransferable and mobile security attachments.

BEAM CLAMPS


RIGGING SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT!All rigging operations involve some element of danger. As today’s rigging requirements become more complex (i.e. heavier and/orawkward loads to lift) greater emphasis must be placed on specifying and using the correct sling necessary for hoisting each par-ticular load. Choosing the right rigging gear requires adequate training in safety procedures for all management and field person-nel.

THE PREVENTION OF RIGGERS MORTIS SERIES has been developed to educate riggers and companies about specify-ing and using rigging gear correctly and safely. It is divided into the following three segments:

SUCCESSFULLY PRESENTED AT MANY COMPANIES INCLUDING:Atlantic Refining • Millstone Nuclear Plant • Bechtel Corporation • Westinghouse Electric • Philadelphia Area “OSHA” Office• General Electric Company • Philadelphia Electric Company • Peach Bottom Nuclear Plant • Limerick Nuclear Plant • DelMarva Power Company • Salem Nuclear Training Facility • Sun Oil Company • Gulf Oil Company • Sun Shbuilding • PublicService Electric & Gas Company • Transamerica Delaval Company • West Valley Nuclear Service Company

RIGGING INSTRUCTION VIDEO TAPE COURSE AND TRANING MATERIALS

Crosby Literature-Your best training material and selling tools.

These product specific brouchures contain impor-tant imformation on rigging requirements, productapplication and warning instructions plus engineer-ing specifications, definitions, illustrations, photosand drawings.

Crosby Training PacksProvides the best product information for your ownin-house programs. Includes videos, naterial tomake overhead transparencies, and a workbookwith test questions and answers. All materials arethe same as you would receive in our product training seminars.

Crosby Reference MaterialTie Down Calculator - contains details on various tie downsrequired for your type system. Detail inspection criteria adapt-ed from the CVSA Cargo Securement Tie Down Guidelines.Lifting Guides - pocket size, laminated folding card with infor-mation on rigging, inspection, capacities and design factor.Each card is packed with information on sling angle, load distribution and hardware.

Crosby Training Materials

For The 21st

Century

1) #PMR-1 An introductory course entitled “Introductory Prevention of Riggers Mortis” designed to fit into a two-hour safety meet-ing. Includes 30 Handbooks & Tests, an Instructors Manual & answer key, an 80-minute video, and 30 riggers handbooks for ref-erence.

2) #PMR-2 The rigging instruction course entitled “PREVENTION OF RIGGERS MORTIS” can be tailored to a company’sneeds from four hours to two full days. This course is on CD and covers such topics as: load control, sling loading, and riggingdesign. It includes 30 Workbooks & Tests, an Instructors manual & answer key, and 30 riggers handbooks for reference and certificates of completion.

3) #PMR-3 The hardware inspection course entitled “Prevention of Riggers Mortis: Sling & Rigging Hardware Inspection” isan advanced course that is independent of the rigging instruction course. Rigging hardware inspectors do not have to be rig-gers. This course comes on CD and includes 30 workbooks & Tests, Instructors Manual & answer key. There is a list of sam-ples required to make this course a hands-on experience for the participants.


GENERAL CAUTIONS AND WARNINGSAll ratings shown in this literature are based upon the item being new or in “as new” con-dition. Catalog ratings are considered to be the greatest load that should be applied tothe item; therefore, any shock loading must be considered when selecting the item foruse in a system.

Catalog ratings are based upon usual environmental conditions and consideration mustbe given to item selection when unusual conditions are to be encountered.

In general, the products displayed within this literature are used as a part of a systembeing employed to accomplish a task. Therefore, we can only recommend the utilizationof such products to accomplish the desired task, within their working load limit.

The products shown are subject to wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, deformation,intentional alteration and other usage factors which may necessitate a reduction in theproduct’s Working Load Limit rating or a reduction in its Safety Factor.

Therefore, it is recommended that all products be regularly inspected to determine theircondition as a basis for deciding if the product may continue to be used at the catalogassigned WLL, a reduced WLL, a reduced safety factor, or removed from service.

The products shown are, in general, items intended to be used in a tension or pull man-ner, so, caution must be used so that the product is not subjected to a side loading thatwill cause an additional and unintended loading.

All hook latches shown are intended to retain loose slings or fittings under slack condi-tions. They are not intended to be antifouling devices, so, caution should be used to pre-vent the latch from supporting any of the load. Periodic inspection of latches must bemade tonsure their proper operating condition.

Welding of or to load supporting parts or products can be a source of a problem. It isnecessary to have knowledge of materials, heat treatment and welding proceduresbefore welding of any item is to be considered.We suggest consulting us for information,and proof testing if necessary.

FITTING MAINTENANCEAll fittings are subject to wear and disfigurement in the form of nicks and gouges, andshould be inspected periodically for these conditions.

Any detection of a crack or permanent deformation in a fitting (i.e., hook, shackle, link,etc.) is cause to remove the fitting from service and have it destroyed.

DEFINITIONSWORKING LOAD LIMIT — The maximum recommended load that should be exerted onthe item.The following terms are also used for the term Working Load Limit: “SWL”, “SafeWorking Load”, “Working Load”, “Rated Load”, and the “Resultant Safe Working Load”.All Working Load Limit values, unless noted otherwise, are for in-line pull with respect tothe centerline of the item.

PROOF LOAD — The average load to which an item may be subjected before visualpermanent deformation occurs or a load that is applied in the performance of a prooftest.

PROOF TEST — A term designating a tensile test applied to the item for the sole pur-pose of detecting injurious defects in the material or manufacture.

BREAKING STRENGTH — That total force (lbs. or kg.) at which the sling fails. The totalweight strain which can be applied before failure. In the USA, it is usually at five timesthe rated capacity; it is seven times rated capacity. Also known as Ultimate Load.

SHOCK LOAD — A resulting load from the rapid change of movement, such as impact-ing or jerking, of a static load. A Shock Load is generally significantly greater than thestatic load.

SAFETY FACTOR — An industry term denoting theoretical reserve capability. Usuallycomputed by dividing the catalog stated ultimate load by the catalog stated working loadlimit and generally expressed as a ratio, for example 5 to 1. Also called Design Factor.

ABRASION — The mechanical wearing of surface resulting from frictional contact withmaterials or objects.

COMPETENT PERSON — A person designated for inspection who is trained and qual-ified by knowledge and practical experience and who has the necessary instructions toenable the required test or examination to be carried out.

ELONGATION — The measurement of stretch, expressed as a percentage of the fin-ished length.

FITTING — A load bearing metal component which is fitted to the sling. Can be ofsteel, aluminum or other material that will sustain the rated capacity of the sling.

SYNTHETIC FIBER — Man-made material used for the cover, the core and the threadof the Twin-Path® sling products.

TELL-TAILS — Extensions of the load core yarns. When the sling is stretched beyondits elastic limit, they shrink and eventually disappear under the tag. Take out of service ifless than 1/2” is exposed.

THREAD — The synthetic yarn which is used to sew the sling cover and tag and to pro-vide the stitch which separates the individual load cores.

TWIN-PATH® — A patented and trademarked product which is composed of two sepa-rate load bearing cores and two separate seamless covers in a single sling.

All ratings given in tons refer to short tons of 2,000 lbs. unless otherwise noted.

There is always a safe way to lift every load. For any of your special lifting requirements,please contact your technical sales representative.

NOTE: The right is reserved to make changes in product design, material and specifi-cations without incurring obligations.

GENERAL INFORMATION AND DEFINITION OF TERMS


IF YOU KNOW: MULTIPLY BY: TO FIND:

inches 25.4 millimeters (mm)inches 2.54 centimeters (cm)feet 0.30 meters (m)yards 0.9144 meters (m)miles 1.61 kilometers (km)millimeters .0394 inchescentimeters .39 inchesmeters 3.28 feetmeters 1.09 yardskilometers .62 milesmetric tons 1.102 U.S. tonsU.S. tons .9072 metric tonskilograms 2.204 poundspounds .453 kilogramsmetric tons 2204.62 poundsmetric tons 1000.0 kilogramsFahrenheit (temp.) 5/9 (after subtracting 32) Celsius (temp.)Celsius (tem.) 9/5 (then add 32) Fahrenheit (temp.)

FACTORS

FRACTION (IN.) DECIMAL (IN.) METRIC (MM.)

1/16 .0625 1.5881/8 .1250 3.1753/16 .1875 4.7621/4 .2500 6.3505/16 .3125 7.9383/8 .3750 9.5257/16 .4375 11.1121/2 .50900 12.7009/16 .5625 14.2885/8 .6250 15.87511/16 .6875 17.4623/4 .7500 19.05013/16 .8125 20.6387/8 .8750 22.22515/16 .9375 23.8121 1.0000 25.400

DECIMAL/METRIC EQUIVALENT TABLE

SUMMARY OF COMMON CONVERSIONS

DISCLAIMERThe information contained herein as to the products offered, including without limitation their technical descriptions, dimensions, specifications, physical characteristics and suit-ability for various uses are based solely and entirely upon information provided to us by the manufacturers of such products. Furthermore, we point out that the manufacturers ofthe products offered in the present catalogue may change such information without notice at any time. While we have made every effort to verify the accuracy of such information,we make no representation or warranty in this regard and take no responsibility in the event of any inaccuracies, misdescriptions or changes in the product information containedherein. In no event shall we be liable to you for any injury, loss or damage of any kind or nature whatsoever including but not limited to general or special damages, direct, indirector consequential damages, punitive damages, loss of anticipated profits or revenues or any liability of yours calculated by reference to any loss of anticipated profits or revenues ofany third party, which in any case may arise, directly or indirectly, as a result of the use or application of the product or of any information provided by us, negligently or otherwise,or by the infringement of any proprietary rights.

All products ordered from us on the basis of this catalogue shall be sold to you subject to the terms and conditions, including without limitation the exclusion and limitation of liabil-ity clauses, contained in our standard invoice.

Fahrenheit Celcius806 430608 320212 100100 3886 3075 2468 2059 1550 1041 532 014 -10-4 -20-22 -30-40 -40-50 -58-250 -418

BREAKING FORCE1 kN (Kilonewton) = 101.972 kgf (kilogram/force)1 kN (Kilonewton) = 224.809 pounds/force1 kip = 1,000 lbs1kpf = .4536 lbs. pounds/forceMASS/UNIT LENGTH1 inch = 25.4 mm 1 mm (millimeter) = .03937 inch1 foot = .3048 m (meter) 1 cm (centimeter) = .3937 inch1 yard = .9144 m (meter) 1 m (meter) = 3.28084 ft 1 mile = 1,609 M (meter) 1 km (kilometer) = 1,000 meters1 rod = 5.5 yards1 chain = 22 yards1 shot = 90 ft.AREA1 sq. in. (square inch) = 645.16 mm2(square millimeter)1 sq. ft. (square feet) = .0929 m2 (square meter)1 m2(square meter) = 10.7639 ft2 (square feet)1 acre = 45,560 sq. ft. = 4,046.86 sq.meters1 hectare = 10,000 sq.meters = 2.47 acresTENSILE GRADE1770 N/mm2 = 180 kp/mm2 = IPS breaking strength1960 N/mm2 = 200 kp/mm2 = EIPS breaking strength2160 N/mm2 = 220 kp/mm2 = EEIPS breaking strength

167

I-75I-85

BOLTON ROAD

SOUT

H AT

LANT

A RO

AD

CHATTAHOOCHEE AVE.

ELLS

WOR

TH IN

D.

HUFF RD.

MAR

IETT

A BL

VD.

HOLMES

HOW

ELL

MIL

L RD

.

NORT

HSID

E DR

IVE

14TH STREET

10TH STREET

I-75I-85

ATLANTAWATERWORKS

I-285 TO

I-285 TOI-285 TO

I-285 TO

1785 Ellsworth Industrial Drive

404-351-2600

TOLL FREE: 1-800-241-8990PHONE: 404-351-2600

E-MAIL: [email protected]: www.bairstow.com

FAX: 404-355-2046

WARRANTYBairstow Lifting Products Company will guarantee ourproducts to be free of defects in workmanship and materialat time of shipment. Our obligation under this warranty islimited to replacement F.O.B. Atlanta, Georgia. No otherfirm, person, or corporation is authorized to assume for us,any other liability in connection with the sale or use of thesegoods. Bairstow Lifting Products Company is not liable fordamages which may result from misuse, abuse, or physicalalteration of the product, nor do we accept any liabilityresulting from usage in excess of working load limits. If theuser is unfamiliar with the proper use of our products, we willbe glad to supply full information for proper usage uponrequest (free).

TERMS OF SALE1. F.O.B.: Point of Shipment2. Minimum Invoice Charge: $25.003. No material may be returned for credit without our written

consent. A 25% restocking charge and full outgoing andincoming freight charges will apply to material acceptedfor return. Material returned without prior consent will notbe accepted.

4. All deviations or shortages on shipments must be reportedwithin thirty (30) days, or credit will not be allowed.

5. Special items ordered outside of the regular stock itemsmay not be returned for credit.

6. Custom fabricated items may not be returned.

1785 ELLSWORTH INDUSTRIAL DRIVE, N.W., ATLANTA, GEORGIA 30318

See us online at www.bairstow.com

DOWNTOWNATLANTA

•Exit 252


PROOF TESTING• CERTIFICATION & TAGGING• 650,000 LBS. CAPACITY• HOIST REPAIR AND TESTING

FREE INSPECTIONS• WIRE ROPE• RIGGING GEAR• FALL PROTECTION• SLINGS

FALL PROTECTONTRAINING

• TRAINING VIDEOS, LITERATURE,AND CD’S AVAILABLE

• PRODUCT USE DEMONSTRATIONS

RIGGING PRODUCTSTRAINING

• CROSBY CERTIFIED TRAINER• VIDEOS, BOOKS, AND CD’S

AVAILABLE• HANDS-ON TRAINING

BAIRSTOW SERVICES OFFERED

Documents

Bairstow Rigging